1. society
2. work
3. contracts

PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
EAGER PARK
VOLUME 1 OF 1
DIVISIONS 01-32 SPECIFICATIONS
OWNER
EAST BALTIMORE DEVELOPMENT, INC.
AGENT FOR OWNER
FOREST CITY – NEW EAST BALTIMORE PARTNERSHIP
CONTENTS
Division 01-32 Construction Specifications
Work Description of Security and Telecommunications
Bid Document Submission
August 15, 2014
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
Landscape Architecture, Urban Design, Planning
800 Wyman Park Drive, Suite 100
Baltimore, Maryland 21211
410-235-6001 voice
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS - Issued by Owner
DIVISION 01
SECTION 01 11 20 - DEFINITIONS........................................................................................................... 5
SECTION 01 20 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES ................................................................................... 11
SECTION 01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES ......................................................................................................... 13
SECTION 01 23 00 - OFFER OPTIONS ................................................................................................... 17
SECTION 01 26 00 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES ....................................................................... 19
SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.......................................... 25
SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS ........................................................................................... 29
SECTION 01 31 32 - SOIL INVESTIGATIONS DATA .......................................................................... 31
SECTION 01 32 13 - SCHEDULING ........................................................................................................ 33
SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................ 41
SECTION 01 35 01 - LBE/MBE/WBE INCLUSION AND WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................................................................................... 49
SECTION 01 35 13 - PROJECT PROCEDURES...................................................................................... 65
SECTION 01 35 26 - HEALTH AND SAFETY ........................................................................................ 67
SECTION 01 11 20 - SECURITY .............................................................................................................. 71
SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS .............................................. 73
SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................ 77
SECTION 01 52 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTILITIES ........... 83
SECTION 01 57 20 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION ..................................................................... 95
SECTION 01 60 00 - SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING .............................................................. 99
SECTION 01 60 01 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 107
SECTION 01 63 00 - SUBSTITUTION AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION ....................................... 109
SECTION 01 66 00 - PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS .......................... 119
SECTION 01 74 00 - PROJECT CLEANING ......................................................................................... 121
SECTION 01 74 19 - WASTE MANAGEMENT .................................................................................... 123
SECTION 01 76 00 - PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK .................................................................. 129
SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 131
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ..................................................... 135
SECTION 01 78 36 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS.................................................................... 139
SECTION 01 78 39 - WARRANTIES ..................................................................................................... 143
SECTION 01 78 46 - EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS ............................................................................ 145
SECTION 01 79 00 - SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING .............................................. 147
SECTION 01 92 00 - FIELD ENGINEERING ........................................................................................ 153
DIVISION 03
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ............................................................................ 157
SECTION 03 45 00 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE...................................................... 177
DIVISION 04
SECTION 04 43 13.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER .................................................... 191
DIVISION 05
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING ..................................................................... 199
SECTION 05 12 13 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL .............................. 209
SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING ................................................................ 219
SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS............................................................................... 227
SECTION 05 73 13 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS ................................................... 235
SECTION 05 75 00 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL...................................................................... 245
DIVISION 06
SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY ...................................................... 251
SECTION 06 15 33 - WOOD DECKING ................................................................................................ 255
DIVISION 07
SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLACTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING ...................................... 261
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ........................................................... 269
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS ............................................................................................... 275
DIVISION 09
SECTION 09 96 00 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS .................................................................. 287
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10
SECTION 10 14 00 - SPECIALTIES (SIGNAGE).................................................................................. 295
SECTION 10 75 00 - FLAGPOLES ......................................................................................................... 309
SECTION 10 81 13 - BIRD CONTROL DEVICES ................................................................................ 315
DIVISION 12
SECTION 12 93 00 - SITE FURNISHINGS............................................................................................ 319
DIVISION 13
SECTION 13 31 40 - TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE ...................................................... 325
DIVISION 26
SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL ........................................... 349
SECTION 26 05 01 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................... 353
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES .... 359
SECTION 26 05 30 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS..................................... 363
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS .............................. 367
SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTR. SYSTEMS ..... 375
SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES ....................................................................... 381
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS .................................................................................................. 385
SECTION 26 51 00 - ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES ...................................................... 391
DIVISION 31
SECTION 31 11 00 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING ............................................................................ 415
SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING ................................................................................................. 419
SECTION 31 23 19 - DEWATERING ..................................................................................................... 435
DIVISION 32
SECTION 32 11 13 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE ........................................................................... 439
SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING ............................................................................................. 441
SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING .......................................................................................... 443
SECTION 32 13 16 - DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING ................................................................ 457
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 32 13 73 - PAVING JOINT SEALANTS ............................................................................... 469
SECTION 32 14 00 - UNIT PAVING ...................................................................................................... 475
SECTION 32 15 40 - DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING .................................................... 487
SECTION 32 17 23 - REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVMENT MARKINGS ........................... 491
SECTION 32 17 26 - DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES ............................................................ 495
SECTION 32 18 16.13 - PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING .............................................. 497
SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ................................................................. 501
SECTION 32 84 00 - PLANTING IRRIGATION ................................................................................... 507
SECTION 32 91 15 -SOIL PREPARATION ........................................................................................... 515
SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES ......................................................................................... 523
SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS ................................................................................................................ 531
DIVISION 33
SECTION 33 05 10 - UTILITY STRUCTURES ..................................................................................... 545
SECTION 33 11 16 - WATER DISTRIBUTION .................................................................................... 551
SECTION 33 40 00 - SANITARY SEWERAGE .................................................................................... 553
SECTION 33 41 00 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING ............................................................. 555
SECURITY AND TELCOMMUNICATIONS
TELECOM AND SECUIRTY WORK BY SIEMENS AND BY OTHERS
APPENDIX A
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING CUT SHEETS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 011120 - DEFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Basic definitions are included here to define terminology used throughout Specifications.
2. Definitions in this Section are in addition to terms defined in General Conditions.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
ACCEPTABLE PERFORMANCE: A component or system being able to meet specified design
parameters under actual load.
ACCEPTANCE: Refers to the Owner's written acknowledgment that the entirety of the Work has been
completed by Contractor. The Owner's possession or use of any portion of the Work shall not be deemed
Final Completion and Acceptance under the Contract. There is no “Substantial Completion” utilized on
this Project.
ADDENDUM: shall have the same meaning as "amendment" defined in the General Conditions.
APPROVE: The term "approved", where used in conjunction with the Owner's action on the Contractor's
submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the duties and responsibilities of the Owner as stated in
General Conditions. Such approval shall not release the Contractor from responsibility to fulfill Contract
requirements unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents.
AS REQUIRED: In the interest of conciseness, where the phrase "As Required" is used without an object,
it should be interpreted to mean, "as required to perform the Work".
CERTIFY: The word "certify" and any derivative thereof refers to assigned written declaration vouching
for a subject in writing and/or formally attesting to the quality or worth of a portion of the Work. Business
letter format may be form of certification. Contractor shall cause certificates from subcontractors,
vendors, manufacturers and other such entities to be signed by a duly authorized officer of such entities.
Provide only original "wet signature" certificates.
THE CONTRACT: In addition to the definition in the General Conditions, the Contract represents the
entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a
Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any
kind 1) between the consultants to the Owner and Contractor, 2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor
or Sub-subcontractor or 3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor. The
Owner shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract
intended to facilitate performance of the duties of consultants to the Owner.
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents consist of the fully executed contract
document reflecting the agreement between Owner and Contractor (herein the Agreement), Conditions of
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 5
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued
prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after
execution of the Contract. A Modification is: 1) a written amendment to the Contract; or, 2) a Change
Order; or, 3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner. Unless specifically
enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as RFP
requirements (advertisement or invitation to offerors, Instructions to Offerors, sample forms, the
Contractor's offer or portions of addenda relating to RFP requirements). The intent of the Contract
Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the
Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding
as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the
Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended
results. Bring all inconsistencies in the Contract Documents to Owner's attention, prior to installation, for
Owner's interpretation. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, Sections and articles, and
arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or
in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract
Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the
Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. The Drawings, Specifications and
other documents prepared by the Owner's consultants are instruments through which the Work to be
executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a
copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents furnished by the Owner, and unless
otherwise indicated the Owner shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law,
statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the
Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner, on request, upon
completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents furnished by the Owner, and
copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to
be used by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on
other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written
consent of the Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment
suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings,
Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner appropriate to and for use in the execution of
their work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory
copyright notice, if any, indicated on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents furnished by the
Owner. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in
connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Owner's copyright
or other reserved rights. Omissions from the Drawings or Specifications or the misdescription of details
of work which are manifestly necessary to carry out the intent of the Drawings and Specifications, or
which are customarily performed, shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such omitted or
misdescribed details of the Work but they shall be performed by Contractor as if fully and correctly set
forth and described in the Drawings and Specifications. Follow figures marked on Drawings in preference
to scale measurements. Large scale Drawings shall in general govern small scale Drawings. Compare all
Drawings and verify the figures before laying out the Work and be responsible for any errors which might
have been avoided thereby.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 6
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
CONTRACT PRICE: the firm fixed price set out in the executed contract document as full compensation
to Contractor for performance of the Work.
CONTRACT TIME: the period of time in which Contractor must perform the entirety of the Work.
Contract Time is initiated by Contractor's receipt of Owner's written notice to Contractor that Contractor
is to proceed with the Work (herein "Notice to Proceed").
CONTRACTOR: the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the
Contractor's authorized representative.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL: In interest of conciseness and an imperative writing style, any sentences,
statements, and clauses used may exclude any form of verb "shall" normally expressed in verb phrase
with verbs such as "furnish", "install", "provide", "perform", "construct", "erect", "comply", "apply",
"submit", etc. Any such sentences, statements, and clauses are to be interpreted to include applicable form
of phrase "the Contractor shall" and requirements described therein interpreted as mandatory elements of
Contract.
DIRECTED: Terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required",
and "permitted" mean "directed by the Owner", "requested by the Owner", and similar phrases. However,
no implied meaning shall be interpreted to extend the Owner's responsibility into the Contractor's area of
construction supervision.
THE DRAWINGS: The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents,
wherever located and whenever issued, Indicating the design, location and dimensions of the Work,
generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, sketches and diagrams.
DRAWING SYMBOLS: Graphic symbols: Where not otherwise noted, symbols are defined by
"Architectural Graphic Standards", published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., latest edition.
Mechanical/Electrical Drawings: Graphic symbols used on mechanical and electrical Drawings are
generally aligned with symbols recommended by ASHRAE. Where appropriate, they are supplemented
by more specific symbols recommended by technical associations including ASME, ASPE, IEEE and
similar organizations. Refer instances of uncertainty to the Owner for clarification before proceeding.
FURNISH: Unless specifically limited in context, means; furnishing to Project site items specified, to
include packaging, shipping, unloading, storing, protecting, unpacking, relocating and assembling thereof.
GENERAL CONDITIONS: refer to the Contract provisions referenced in the Agreement, any parts,
sections or attachments, thereto.
INDICATED AND SHOWN: refers to graphic representations, notes or schedules on the Drawings, or
other Paragraphs or Schedules in Specifications, and similar requirements in Contract Documents. Where
terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified", are used, it is to help locate the reference;
no limitation on location is intended except as specifically noted.
INDUSTRY STANDARDS: Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include
more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 7
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference. Individual Sections indicate certain codes and standards. Keep these available at
the Project site for reference. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not
specified, comply with the standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents. Updated Standards: At
the request of Owner, or authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall submit a Change Order
proposal where an applicable code or standard has been revised and reissued after the date of the Contract
Documents and before performance of work affected. The Owner will decide whether to issue a Change
Order to proceed with the updated standard. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or
more standards is specified, and they establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum
quantities or quality levels, satisfy the most stringent requirement unless the Contract Documents
expressly indicate otherwise. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties
as to which quality level is more stringent to the Owner for a decision before proceeding. Minimum
Quantity or Quality Levels: In every instance, Provide or perform the minimum quantity or quality level
Indicated or specified. Comply exactly, within specified tolerances, with the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or Contractor may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum values, as noted, or appropriate for the
context of the requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Owner for a decision before proceeding.
Copies of Standards: Contractor is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to the Work.
Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards
are needed for performance of a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from the publication
source. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards generating organization,
authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the
"Encyclopedia of Associations", published by Gale Research Co.
INSPECTION: As used in these documents means: "The type of Observation that a reasonably prudent
Owner representative, in the exercise of ordinary care, would make to determine if the Work is in general
compliance with the Contract Documents; they are not inspections as would necessarily disclose a
defect."
INSTALL: Means incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment and
connections to perform Work Indicated and protection thereof after installation until Final Completion
and Acceptance.
OBSERVATION: "Observe" or "Observation" means, "to become generally familiar with the process
and quality of the Work and to determine if the Work is proceeding in general accordance with the
Contract Documents based on what is plainly visible at the construction site, without the removal of
materials or other construction that is in place".
THE PROJECT: The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate
contractors.
THE PROJECT MANUAL: The Project Manual is the volume or volumes usually assembled for the
Work which may include the RFP requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 8
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
Specifications. Project Manual is formatted based on guidelines established by the Construction
Specifications Institute.
1. Division: Standard category of construction information: Divisions form basic framework of Project
Specification. Division titles appear in table of contents of Project Manual.
2. Section: Portion of Project Specifications covering one portion of total Work or requirements.
Individual Sections dealing with related items are grouped together under 39 Divisions. Sections are
included in Project Manual as needed to meet requirements. a. Sections of Division 1 include general
requirements for administration, procedures, and temporary facilities. Section in Division 2 through
Division 39 include specific requirements for units of Work.
3. Part: Organizational device to divide Specification Section into three distinct groupings of related
information.
a. PART 1 - GENERAL: Defines specific administrative and procedural requirements unique to the
Section.
b. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Describes, in detail, quality of items that are required for incorporation
into Project under the Section.
c. PART 3 - EXECUTION: Describes, in detail, preparatory actions and how products are to be
incorporated into Project.
4. Article: Major subject consisting of related paragraphs within part of Specification Section.
5. Paragraph: One or more sentences, dealing with particular item or point, separated from preceding
text by beginning on new line. Groups of paragraphs of related information constitute an article.
6. Specification Language:
a. Basic grammatical moods of sentences can be used to clearly and concisely convey Specification
requirements.
b. The simple imperative mood is method for instructions covering installation of products and
equipment. The verb which clearly defines action becomes first word in the sentence. The
imperative sentence is concise and readily understandable. Example: "a. Spread adhesive with
notched trowel."
c. Streamlining is used to list products, materials, reference standard, and other itemized
specifications. This technique places subject first and hence provides key words for quick
reference. Example: "a. Sealant: Silicone."
d. These Specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined form. This imperative
language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words "shall be"
shall be included by inference where colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.
e. In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all"
and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an", but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent
from one statement and appears in another does not affect the interpretation of either statement.
PROVIDE: Means Furnish and Install.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 9
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
REGULATION: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction
industry that control performance of the Work, whether lawfully imposed by authorities having
jurisdiction or not.
SEE: In interest of conciseness, references to Specification Sections and details are preceded by word
"See". Any such references are to be interpreted to include applicable form of phrase ", and comply
with,".
THE SPECIFICATIONS: The Specifications, in addition to the definition in the General Conditions, are
that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,
construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. The
Specifications include the requirements defined in Construction Specification Institute Masterformat
Divisions 0 through 39 inclusive of the Project Manual. Specifications are organized by "Sections" with
such Sections represented by unique 6 digit numbers and titles.
SUBCONTRACTOR: A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor
to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative
of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors
of a separate contractor.
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR: A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect
contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor"
is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor
or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.
THE WORK: The term "Work" means the construction, commissioning and services required by the
Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials,
equipment and services Provided or to be Provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's
obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. Work includes coordination of
work of other trades. Although not Indicated, Work includes providing supplementary or miscellaneous
items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 011120
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
0111020 ‐ 10
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
DEFINITIONS
SECTION 012000 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Requirements included:
a. Owner shall use Contractor's approved schedule of values as the sole basis of determining
progress payments. Contractor's schedule of values shall equal in total the Contract Price as
described in the General Conditions.
c. Owner will independently determine the approximate measurement of payable Contractor
progress as of the monthly payment closure date.
d. After a joint Contractor/Owner review of work in progress on a day to be determined by
Owner and Contractor, but approximately 5 days before the end of the month, Owner will
independently process for payment to Contractor the amount Owner deems appropriate as of
the respective payment closure dates.
e. Contractor shall submit, for the record, monthly invoices on forms prescribed by Owner to
the Owner in the amounts calculated by the Owner in accordance with the foregoing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 012000
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 11
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 12
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
B. Unit Price is an amount proposed by offerors, stated on Offer Form, as a price per unit of
measurement for materials or services added to or deducted from Contract Sum by appropriate
modification, if estimated quantities of Work required by Contract Documents are increased or
decreased at Owner’s option and sole discretion.
C. If quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed change so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to
Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
D. Owner will confirm in field the Contractor’s measurement of work-in-place that involves use of
established unit prices. If disputes arise, Owner reserves the right to have this work measured,
at Owner’s expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
2.
DESCRIPTION
A. Work includes:
3.
1.
Overhead and profit in Unit Prices.
2.
Indicate Unit Prices on Offer Form.
3.
Unit Prices indicated on Offer Form will be made part of Contract.
UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1: Upon direction of Owner or geotechnical engineer, additive cost per cubic
yard for removal of unsuitable subgrade material under roads, sidewalks and concrete
foundations and replacement with suitable compacted CR-6 gravel or AASHTO 57 coarse
aggregate (as selected by geotechnical engineer) in accordance with civil and structural
drawings and specifications. Unit price applies irrespective of depth or volume removed and
replaced. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for subgrade disturbance caused by
Contractor’s improper construction practices.
B. Unit Price No. 2: Upon direction of Owner or geotechnical engineer, additive cost per cubic
yard for removal of unsuitable subgrade material under concrete foundations and replacement
with lean 1500 psi concrete. Unit price applies irrespective of depth or volume removed and
replaced. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for subgrade disturbance caused by
Contractor’s improper construction practices.
C. Unit Price No. 3: Upon direction of Owner or geotechnical engineer, additive cost per cubic
yard for removal of unsuitable subgrade material under concrete foundations and making base
of footing deeper, thereby increasing the volume of footing concrete of the strength specified
for foundations. Unit price applies irrespective of depth or volume removed and replaced.
Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for subgrade disturbance caused by
Contractor’s improper construction practices.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012200 ‐ 13
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
UNIT PRICES
D. Unit Price No. 4: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per linear foot for construction of new
concrete curb and gutter. Concrete curb and gutter shall be constructed in accordance with
Baltimore City Standard 620.05, and with Section 32 13 13 of the Specifications. Unit price
shall include all work, materials and incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall
not be paid under this unit price for replacement of existing curb and gutter to remain damaged
by Contractor’s construction practices, or for replacement of new curb and gutter damaged
during construction or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Owner or Owner’s
Representative.
E. Unit Price No. 5: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for construction of new
4 inch thick concrete paving. Concrete paving shall be constructed in accordance with Detail
1/L2.00, and with Section 32 13 16 of the Specifications. Unit price shall include all work,
materials and incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this
unit price for replacement of existing concrete paving to remain damaged by Contractor’s
construction practices, or for replacement of new concrete paving damaged during construction
or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Owner or Owner’s Representative.
F. Unit Price No. 6: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for construction of new
6 inch thick concrete paving. Concrete paving shall be constructed in accordance with Detail
1/L2.00, and with Section 32 13 16 of the Specifications. Unit price shall include all work,
materials and incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this
unit price for replacement of existing concrete paving to remain damaged by Contractor’s
construction practices, or for replacement of new concrete paving damaged during construction
or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Owner or Owner’s Representative.
G. Unit Price No. 7: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for sawcut and
removal of existing full depth asphalt paving. Sawcut and removal of asphalt paving shall be
performed in accordance with the details on sheet C2.04 of the drawings. Unit price shall
include all work, materials and incidentals required to complete the work.
H. Unit Price No. 8: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for construction of
new full depth (10 inch) asphalt paving. Asphalt paving shall be constructed in accordance with
Section 32 12 16 of the Specifications. Unit price shall include all work, materials and
incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for
replacement of existing asphalt paving to remain damaged by Contractor’s construction
practices, or for replacement of new asphalt paving damaged during construction or otherwise
deemed unacceptable by the Owner or Owner’s Representative.
I. Unit Price No. 9: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per cubic yard for furnishing and
placement of topsoil. Unit price applies irrespective of depth or volume removed and replaced.
Topsoil shall be furnished and placed in accordance with Section 32 91 15 of the Specifications.
Unit price shall include all work, materials and incidentals required to complete the work.
J. Unit Price No. 10: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for installation of new
seeded lawn. Seeded lawn shall be installed in accordance with Sections 32 91 15 and 32 92 00
of the Specifications. Unit price shall include grade preparation and all other work, materials
and incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012200 ‐ 14
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
UNIT PRICES
for replacement of existing seeded lawn to remain damaged by Contractor’s construction
practices, or for replacement of new seeded lawn damaged during construction or otherwise
deemed unacceptable by the Owner or Owner’s Representative.
K. Unit Price No. 11: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per each unit for removal and
replacement of existing roadway light pole, fixture and lamp deemed as unsuitable for salvage
or reuse by the Owner or Owner’s representative. Unit price shall include all work, materials
and incidentals required to complete the work, including rewiring the light pole and fixture as
needed. This work assumes reuse of the existing light pole concrete foundation, including
anchor bolts. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for damage to existing light
poles caused by Contractor’s improper construction practices.
L. Unit Price No. 12: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for construction of
new pedestrian thickness (Type A) concrete unit paving. Pedestrian concrete unit paving shall
be constructed in accordance with Detail 7/L2.00, and with Sections 32 13 13 and 32 14 00 of
the Specifications. Unit price shall include all work, materials and incidentals required to
complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for replacement of new
concrete unit paving damaged during construction or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the
Owner or Owner’s Representative.
M. Unit Price No. 13: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per square yard for construction of
new vehicular thickness (Type B) concrete unit paving. Vehicular concrete unit paving shall be
constructed in accordance with Detail 8/L2.00, and with Sections 32 13 13 and 32 14 00 of the
Specifications. Unit price shall include all work, materials and incidentals required to complete
the work. Contractor shall not be paid under this unit price for replacement of new concrete unit
paving damaged during construction or otherwise deemed unacceptable by the Owner or
Owner’s Representative.
N. Unit Price No. 14: Upon direction of Owner, additive cost per each unit for construction of new
drinking fountain. Each drinking fountain shall be constructed in accordance with Detail
4/L2.05, the civil water distribution plans, and with Sections 12 93 00 and 33 11 16 of the
Specifications. Unit price shall include connection to adjacent water source, up to 50 lineal feet
of water piping, furnishing and installation of concrete base and drinking fountain and all other
work, materials and incidentals required to complete the work. Contractor shall not be paid
under this unit price for replacement of new drinking fountain damaged during construction
caused by Contractor’s improper construction practices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 012200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012200 ‐ 15
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
UNIT PRICES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012200 ‐ 16
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
UNIT PRICES
SECTION 012300 - OFFER OPTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Section Includes: General requirements for offer option prices and brief description of each offer
option.
DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
1. Definition: Offer option is an amount proposed by the Offerors and stated on the Owner's proposal
form, that will be added (or deducted, if so indicated) to/from the Base offer amount if the Owner
decides to accept corresponding change in either scope of the Work or in products, materials,
equipment, systems or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. The term
“alternate” shall be considered equivalent to “option.”
2. General: Submit with the offer, offer options for the Work outlined below stating difference in price
(addition or reduction) from the total base offer. Offerors must price offer options with bid.
3. Any, all or no options may be exercised by the Owner at its sole discretion.
4. Options selected by the Owner, if any, will be made part of the Contract and the Contract Price will
be adjusted accordingly.
5. Contractor acknowledges that the Owner may, at its sole discretion, incorporate any or all options into
the Contract up to 90 days after the date of Notice to Proceed, without any adjustment in Milestone
durations, the Contract Time or the Contract Price (other than that effected by the option pricing
itself).
6. Descriptions of offer options in this Section are recognized to be incomplete and abbreviated and do
not necessarily detail full range of materials and processes needed to complete the work for the offer
option. Refer to applicable Specification Sections and to applicable Drawings for specific
requirements of the work regardless of whether references are so noted in description of the offer
option.
7. In proposing a firm fixed price for the following offer options, the offeror asserts and affirms that it
has examined the Drawings and Specifications, and is aware of adjustments of adjacent work
necessary to accomplish stated desired results, whether or not such adjustments are specifically
described in the Contract Documents.
8. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent work as required to ensure that
the work affected by each accepted offer option is complete and fully integrated into the Project.
9. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
10. The cost for each alternate shall include costs of related coordination, modification or adjustment, fee,
overhead, profit, general conditions/requirements, etc.
11. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to each party
involved, notification of status of each offer option. Indicate whether offer options have been
accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at later date. Include complete description of
accepted offer options, if any.
12. Schedule: Schedule of offer options is included below in this Section. The Specification Sections
and/or Drawings referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods
necessary to achieve the work described under each offer option.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012300 ‐ 17
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OFFER OPTIONS
a. Include as part of each offer option, miscellaneous devices, appurtenances and similar items
incidental to or required for complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of offer
option.
SCHEDULE OF OFFER OPTIONS: State on the proposal form the amount to be added OR
DEDUCTED for each of the following:
The requirements of each of the alternates listed below are described and identified on the drawings and
in the specifications.
A. Base Bid: All proposed improvements in the South Block including the electrical power feed
from the middle block power source.
B. Alternate #1: Add all proposed improvements in the Middle Block, including the two pedestrian
crosswalks connecting the south side of Chase Street to the north side of Chase Street. Includes
extending electrical conduits to the south side of Chase Street and capping for future use.
C. Alternate #2: Alternate #2: Add all proposed improvements in the North Block, including the
two pedestrian crosswalks connecting the south side of Chase Street to the north side of Chase
Street.
D. Alternate #3: Construct Pavilion B. This work includes the structure, footings, roof, electrical
receptacles and associated electrical feeds from main line junction box.
E. Alternate #4: Delete glass guardrail and replace with metal mesh fencing and rail.
F. Alternate #5: Delete all poured in-place concrete pedestrian crosswalks in Base Bid and replace
with thermoplastic pain striping.
G. Alternate #6: Delete all poured in-place concrete pedestrian crosswalks in Alternate #1 and
replace with thermoplastic pain striping.
H. Alternate #7: Delete all poured in-place concrete pedestrian crosswalks in Alternate #2 and
replace with thermoplastic pain striping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION 012300
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012300 ‐ 18
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OFFER OPTIONS
SECTION 012600 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Work included:
Contractor activities and requirements pertaining to contract change orders and associated processes.
B Definitions:
1. Change Order: A written order to the Contractor signed by Owner directing an addition, deletion
or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued after
the effective date of the Contract. A Change Order may result from a Construction Change
Directive, which is an order directing Contractor to proceed on the basis of force account or on a
PDL basis as defined herein. Change Orders shall state the dollar value of the change or establish
method of payment, any adjustment in Contract Time, and, when negotiated prices and/or
adjustment(s) in Contract Time and/or Milestones are involved, shall provide for the Contractor's
signature indicating his acceptance.
C. Basis for Establishing Costs
1. General: The cost or credit to Owner resulting from Change Orders shall be determined in one or
more of the following ways: (1) by the Contract parties' mutual acceptance of a lump sum
properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit Owner evaluation; or
(2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or (3) by Force
Account.
2. Mark-ups: Apply only allowable mark-ups to Contractor-proposed estimates of the direct cost of
labor (defined as only craft labor and working foremen to the extent defined herein), materials,
equipment and other approved categories of costs Contractor proposes to incur in the execution of
work under Change Orders. Allowable overhead and profit percentage mark-ups are set out in the
following. These percentages shall provide full and final compensation to Contractor for the cost
of additional bonding, estimating, drafting, CAD, field supervision above the level of working
foremen including executives, managers, administrators, office managers, supervisors, other
home office staff and other staff not located on the Project site, superintendents, assistant
superintendents and general foremen, field engineers, schedulers, accountants, timekeepers, office
managers, and other on-site staff1, office supplies, drinking water, temporary heat, light and
power, safety equipment, general clean-up, small tools, field offices, tool trailers, field toilets,
personnel vehicles including pick-up trucks, minor consumables, and other cost of labor,
materials, equipment and incidental overhead or profit not incorporated in Work or Change Order
work and directly or indirectly associated with Work or Change Order work, overhead costs of all
sorts including home (including local and regional) office, general, administrative, corporate and
legal overhead costs, preparation of cost proposals and schedule analyses connected with Change
Orders (whether such Change Orders are contemplated or implemented), liability, property
damage and other insurances. The following percentages shall be added to the net increases (or
deducted from, for net credits) the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the full markup for
overhead and profit. The percentages for overhead and profit to be allowed by Owner on
Contractor's self-performed Change Order work may vary according to the nature, extent, and
complexity of work involved, but in no case shall exceed the following:
Labor: ............................................................................................................. 8%
1 The list of Contractor and subcontractor staff and position types included in change order mark-up percentages is
intended to provide representative examples of non-craft labor. Therefore, the listing is not comprehensive or
exhaustive.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 19
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Materials: ........................................................................................................ 6%
Equipment rental: ........................................................................................... 8%
Owner -approved items and expenditures not listed above: ........................... 6%
3. Combined Increases and Decreases: On proposals involving both increases and decreases in the
Contract Price, the overhead and profit mark-ups will be allowed on the net increases only. On
net decreases, deduct corresponding overhead and profit.
4. Limit of Mark-Up on Subcontracted Change Order Work: Contractor may apply a mark-up fee
of up to 5% on the approved cost of subcontracted Change Order work, however this percentage
shall apply to the first Subcontractor tier only, which may be no higher than the mark-ups in item
2 above. Mark-up on multi-tier subcontracted work shall be subject to the following limitations.
The aggregate arithmetic total of percentage mark-ups for overhead and profit and fee, expressed
as whole integers, applied to the whole or any portion of subcontracted work at all tiers in the
Contractor's Change Order proposals may not exceed a total of 25 based on the following
formula: Contractor's mark-up on Subcontractors' proposals equals "a", Subcontractors' mark-up
equals "b", and Sub-Subcontractors' mark-ups equal "c" through "n". The aggregate of these
figures expressed as whole integers (a + b + (c through n)) shall be less than or equal to 25 for
increased cost portions of Change Order proposals and shall be equal to 25 for reduced cost
(credit to Owner) portions of Change Order proposals. The Owner shall not be responsible to
allocate percentages between Contractor, Subcontractors and/or Sub-Subcontractors at any tier.
5. Force Account: When the price or other terms for work under a contemplated Change Order
cannot be agreed upon, and the Owner directs the Contractor to proceed on a "Force Account"
basis, the Contractor shall promptly execute such work in accordance with the Owner’s written
direction. Submit a separate daily report for each Change Order under Force Account to the
Owner on forms furnished by Owner, together with applicable delivery tickets and material use
information. Failure by Contractor to submit the daily report for Owner approval and signature
before the close of the next working day shall extinguish Contractor’s right to recover change
order costs for that day. Contractor shall reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed by the
Owner and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes may be entered by each
party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed
copy of the daily reports. Force Account reports by Subcontractors to Contractor or other parties
performing force account work under Change Orders shall be submitted through the Contractor
and must use the same forms as used by Contractor.
The reports shall:
a. Describe nature of work underway and locations of same.
b. Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked.
c. Describe and list quantities of materials used.
d. Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including
loading and transportation, if applicable.
e. Describe other services and expenditures authorized by Owner in such detail as the Owner
may require.
6. Allowable costs: Comply with the following requirements for proposals and record keeping for
Change Order work, including under Force Account.
a. Labor: Report cost of Change Order labor by itemizing each craft involved, and indicating
hourly rate for each and hours required, excluding premium pay, paid to employees proposed
by Contractor to be directly engaged in Change Order work. The costs of labor will be the
cost for wages prevailing for each craft or types of workers performing the work under
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 20
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
Change Order at the time the Change Order is done or contemplated to be performed, plus
employer payments of all applicable burdens including payroll taxes, Social Security,
unemployment insurances, workers compensation insurance, health and welfare, pension,
Social Security (FICA) tax, Federal unemployment insurance (FUTA), and other direct costs
resulting from Federal, State or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits such as union
dues, apprenticeship funds, subsistence and/or mileage, required by lawful collective
bargaining agreements. The use of a labor classification which would increase the Change
Order cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such
additional costs to the satisfaction of the Owner. Labor productivity assumed by Contractor
in its lump sum Change Order cost proposals shall be the same as that assumed by Contractor
for similar work included in the Contract Price as of execution of the Contract. By execution
of this agreement, Contractor agrees that national estimating standards including R.S. Means,
Mechanical Contractors Association (MCA) and National Electrical Contractors Association
(NECA) indicate conservative productivity assumptions by the standards of the Work (and
any associated Change Orders) and may not be used by Contractor in Change Order cost
proposals. Propose productivity factors which are applicable to the work under the
contemplated lump sum Change Order and provide data supporting their derivation and
reasonableness to the Owner for its review and consideration. Report labor costs for
equipment operators and helpers only when such costs are not included in invoices for
equipment rental, if applicable. The labor cost for working foremen shall be apportioned to
all of their assigned work and only that portion applicable to Change Order work shall be
paid under the Change Order. In no case will a ratio higher than one foreman per six workers
be allowed for Change Order work, and Contractor shall pro-rata reduce cost of foremen
under change order work that contains fewer than six people in change order work crews. In
the event Owner directs Contractor to perform work on a basis which will result in costs for
premium time, the premium portion of applicable wages for Change Order work which the
Contractor was directed by Owner to be performed other than normal working hours may be
allowed by Owner, including social security taxes, unemployment insurance, and union
fringe benefits if required by lawful union agreements, but overhead and profit mark-ups
shall not be applied to such premium time costs.
b. Materials: The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which
such materials are locally available (whichever yields the lowest cost to Owner) and
delivered to the job site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax (if applicable), freight and
delivery. Reduce proposal in proportion to any pertinent tax rebates which shall inure to
Contractor's benefit. The Owner reserves the right to approve materials and sources of
supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary for the progress of the Work. No
markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Owner.
c. Equipment (Including Tools): No payment will be made to Contractor for the use of
equipment or tools which have a replacement value of $500 or less. Regardless of
ownership, the rates (including mark-up, if any) to be used in determining equipment rental
costs shall not exceed rates listed in "Construction Equipment Ownership and Operating
Expense Schedule", of the applicable Region, latest edition, published by Department of the
Army, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Washington, D.C. The rental rates paid shall include
the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and
maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all incidentals. If the
equipment is not already on the Project site, necessary loading and transportation costs for
equipment used on the Change Order work may be included in Contractor Change Order
proposals. If equipment is used intermittently and, when not in use, could be returned to its
rental source at less expense to the Owner than holding it at the work site, it shall be returned,
unless the Contractor elects to keep it at the work site at no expense to the Owner. All
equipment shall be acceptable to the Owner, in good working condition, and suitable for the
purpose for which it is to be used. Manufacturer's ratings and manufacturer's approved
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 21
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
modifications shall be used to classify equipment and it shall be powered by a unit of at least
the minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer. The reported rental time for
equipment already at the job site shall be the duration of its use on the Change in the Work,
commencing at the time it is first put into actual operation on the Change in the Work, plus
the time required to move it from its previous site and back or to a closer site.
d. Other Items and Expenditures: The Owner may authorize other items which may be required
on the Change Order work. Such items include labor, services, material and equipment
which are different in their nature from those required for the Work specified in the Contract
and which are of a type not ordinarily available from the Contractor or any of his
Subcontractors at any tier. Proposals or invoices covering all such items in detail shall be
submitted with Contractor's Change Order proposals.
D. Methods Used In Determining Adjustments to Contract Time:
Adjustments to the Contract Schedule which may or may not result in adjustments to Contract
Time flowing from Change Orders are controlled by the provisions in Specification Section
01 32 13. Extended overhead are costs which may be incurred by Contractor as a result of an
extension of the Contract Time. The applicability of extended overhead costs for time extensions
are governed by the requirements of Section 01 32 13. Extended overhead costs, if allowed in
accordance with the stipulations set out in Section 01 32 13, may only include costs incurred on
the Project site and shall exclude all cost categories included in overhead and profit mark-ups as
set out in this Section.
E. Steps In Change Order Procedure:
1. Request for Proposal: Request for Proposal (RFP) defines proposed changes in the Work
which are contemplated by Owner and which may or may not result in Change Order(s), and
is prepared and given to Contractor by Owner.
2. Notice of Potential Impact: Upon receipt of a request for proposal (RFP), Contractor shall
immediately review and evaluate the scope of such RFP's. Make an immediate determination
of any potential impact on the Work. In the event any potential impact is determined, notify
Owner immediately, but in no case more than 3 business days after Contractor's receipt of
RFP. Owner may direct Contractor to stop work in the area affected by the change to
minimize the cost impact, or may direct Contractor to immediately proceed with the change
described in the RFP or some modification thereof, as the Owner deems fit.
3. Timing of Proposal Submission: Submit proposals and breakdown as promptly as possible,
but no later than twelve (12) working days following Contractor's receipt of Owner's RFP.
Owner may, at its discretion, under a partnering arrangement with Contractor, elect to allow
Contractor a negotiated incentive for timely submission by Contractor of Change Order
proposals.
4. Content and Format of Proposal: Submit all proposals for contemplated Change Orders in
the form of a lump sum fixed price proposal, unless otherwise requested by the Owner.
Furnish the summaries and details of Change Order proposals in the format and on forms
required by Owner. With each proposal for a change involving an increase or decrease in the
Contract Price, submit an itemized breakdown that includes the following, and any other
information requested by the Owner:
a. Labor costs (separated into trades), including all payroll burdens.
b. Material quantities and unit prices. (Separated into trades).
c. Construction Equipment (priced as herein described).
d. Subcontractor costs.
e. Other approved items and expenditures.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 22
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
f.
Mark-ups for overhead, profit and other costs as defined above.
5. Proposal Review: In considering proposals for changes in the Work involving added work,
reduced or deleted work, or any combination thereof, Contractor proposals will be checked in
detail by the Owner, utilizing unit prices where specified or agreed upon, with the objective
of arriving at equitable adjustments.
6. Change Order Issuance: Change Order will be prepared by Owner if Contractor's proposal, or
amended version thereof, is acceptable and agreed upon by Owner. Contractor is authorized
to proceed after Owner issues notice to proceed with work in Change Order.
7. Procedure In Event of Non-Agreement: When the necessity to proceed with a change does
not allow sufficient time to properly check a proposal, or the cost of the Change Order work
cannot be agreed upon using lump sum, unit prices or other pricing method satisfactory to
Owner, or because of failure to reach an agreement, or for other reason deemed by Owner to
be in Owner's interest, Owner may, at its sole discretion, order the Contractor to proceed on
the basis of price to be determined at the earliest practicable date (PDL Change Order). Upon
such written direction, perform the work directed and record all applicable costs in
accordance with the Force Account procedure set out in this Section.
8. Miscellaneous Requirements:
a. Obligations of Surety Under Change Orders: Changes in the Work, or extensions of time,
made pursuant to the Contract, shall in no way release the Contractor or Surety from their
obligations. Notice of such changes or extensions shall be waived by the Surety.
b. Change Orders, supplemental agreements and Owner-approved revisions to Plans and
Specifications will take precedence over the pertinent elements of the Contract
Documents which are thereby amended or deleted.
c. No change in Work, whether by way of alteration, addition, clarification or interpretation,
shall be the basis of adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time unless and until
authorized by Owner in a Change Order, executed in accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents.
d. Agreement on any Change Order shall constitute a final settlement of all matters related
thereto, including all direct and indirect costs associated with such change, and any and
all adjustments to Contract Price and/or Contract Time.
e. Failure of Contractor and Owner to agree on an adjustment of Contract Sum or Contract
Time shall not excuse Contractor from proceeding with prosecution and performance of
Work not affected by Change Orders. Ensure that Contractor and Subcontractors, Subsubcontractors and Suppliers handle all disputes in a manner which will permit Work to
proceed on schedule while any matter in dispute is being resolved.
f.
Invoices Under Force Account Work: Vendors' invoices for material, equipment rental,
and other expenditures under Force Account Change Orders signed by Owner shall be
submitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by
invoices or other documentation, the Owner may establish the cost of the item involved at
the lowest price which was current at the time of the report.
h. Change Order Requests (CORs): If the Contractor claims that additional cost or time is
involved because of, (1) any written interpretation issued by Owner, (2) any order by the
Owner to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) any written order for a
change in the Work issued under an RFP or, (4) any other Contractor claims of any
nature, the Contractor shall provide written notice of such claim within twenty (20)
calendar days of the events or things giving rise to such claim. No such claim shall be
valid and Contractor shall be deemed to have finally waived such claim unless so made.
The above notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute the work,
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 23
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case the Contractor shall
proceed in accordance with Owner direction. Any change in the Contract Price or
Contract Time resulting from such claim shall not be paid unless authorized by duly
executed Change Order.
i.
Disputed Work: If the Contractor and Owner are unable to reach agreement on disputed
work, Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with the work on a Force Account
basis. Promptly execute such work when so directed. Payment shall be as later
determined by the disputes provisions of the general conditions of contract. Although not
to be construed as proceeding under Change Order provisions, the Contractor shall keep
and furnish records of disputed work in accordance with paragraph herein entitled "Force
Account". Applicability of this paragraph may be amended, if acceptable to both
Contractor and Owner, by a Project-specific alternate disputes resolution agreement.
j.
Owner-Directed Acceleration: Owner may direct Contractor to accelerate execution of
the work. If such acceleration is not required to recover time lost due to Contractoraccountability causes, Contractor shall be entitled to a Change Order allowing Contractor
to recover reasonable and direct costs of such acceleration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 012600
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 24
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
General coordination procedures.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
Project Web site.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
are assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 013119 "Project Meetings" for a description of project meetings.
Section 013213 "Scheduling" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction
schedule.
Section 013300 "Submittals" for procedural requirements for submittals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
RFI: Request from Owner, Owner’s representative, Architect, or Contractor seeking
information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at
meetings.
1.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 25
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.
1.4
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that
are designated as Owner's property.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of
the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
2.
B.
Owner will return RFIs submitted to Owner by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project name.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Owner.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 26
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
a.
C.
RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,
acceptable to Owner.
1.
D.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
Owner’s Action: Owner will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Owner after 1:00
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
1.5
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Owner in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI
response.
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Use software log that is part of Project Web site. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
Owner's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Owner's
time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
Owner's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract
Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Change Order Procedures."
a.
E.
Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Owner.
RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Owner's response was received.
On receipt of Owner's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to
affected parties. Review response and notify Owner within five days if Contractor disagrees
with response.
PROJECT WEB SITE
A.
Provide, administer, and use Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project
communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the
following functions:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 27
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Project directory.
Project correspondence.
Meeting minutes.
Contract modifications forms and logs.
RFI forms and logs.
Task and issue management.
Photo documentation.
Schedule and calendar management.
Submittals forms and logs.
Payment application forms.
Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
Online document collaboration.
Reminder and tracking functions.
Archiving functions.
B.
Provide up to five Project Web site user licenses for use of the Owner, Architect, and Architect's
consultants. Provide eight hours of software training at Architect's office for Project Web site
users.
C.
On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy of Project Web site files to Owner
and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
012600 ‐ 28
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Requirements included:
a. On a periodic basis, during normal business hours, Contractor's Project Manager,
Superintendent and Subcontractor representatives shall attend meetings upon request of
Owner Representative. Owner Representative may invite other Owner representatives and
other parties as Owner Representative deems appropriate. Owner Representative will chair
the meetings. Owner Representative will prepare minutes of the meetings, and at its sole
discretion, may tape-record the meetings. Contractor shall sign the minutes indicating its
agreement therewith within 3 business days of its receipt thereof or return same signed with
suggested amendments. The meetings shall include:
(1) Progress review meetings: Held on a periodic basis, usually weekly, to review work in
progress, schedule status, issues that are current as of meeting and other matters raised
by Owner Representative or Contractor. Contractor shall be prepared, at such meetings,
to propose and commit Contractor to corrective actions and associated timetables for
remediation of Contractor-accountability deviations from Contract requirements, if
applicable. Agenda may include:
(a).
Construction schedule by means of presentation by Contractor of a 3-week
“short-interval” schedule (one week back, two weeks look-ahead), filtered to show only
activities that are active in the 3-week window and whose total float is 20 working days
or less.
(b).
Critical work sequencing
(d).
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders
(e).
Procedures for processing applications for payment
(g).
Submittal of shop drawings, product data and samples
(h).
Preparation of record documents
(i).
Use of premises
(k).
Equipment deliveries and priorities
(l).
Safety / Emergency procedures
(n).
Security
(o).
Housekeeping
(p).
Working hours
(q). Review present and future needs of each entity present, including
items as:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
(i).
Interface requirements
(iv).
Deliveries
(v).
Off-site fabrication problems
013119 ‐ 29
such
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MEETINGS
(r).
(2)
(vi).
Access / Site Utilization
(viii).
Temporary facilities and services
(x).
Hazards and risks
(xii).
Quality and work standards, including first installs / mock-ups
(xiv).
Documentation of information for payment requests
Miscellaneous Information/Daily Reports
(i).
List of Subcontractors at the site
(ii).
Approximate count of personnel at the site
(iii).
Weather conditions, including high and low temperatures
(iv).
Accidents and unusual events
(v).
Meetings and significant decisions
(vi).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses
(viii).
Orders and requests of governing authorities
(ix).
Major equipment and materials received
(x).
Services connected, disconnected
(xi).
Equipment or system tests and start-ups
(xii).
Partial completions, occupancies
Coordination meetings:
(a) Held on a periodic basis, as deemed necessary by Owner Representative, to review
issues relevant for proper coordination of the Work with the Project as a whole,
including work by Owner and separate contractors. Such meetings shall not be used
by Contractor instead of its ongoing coordination work required by the Contract
and such meetings shall not be construed to transfer to Owner Contractor's
coordination duties under the Contract.
(3) Miscellaneous meetings:
(a) Held on an as needed basis, as deemed necessary by Owner Representative or as
proposed by Contractor and accepted by Owner Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 013119
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013119 ‐ 30
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT MEETINGS
SECTION 013132 - SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SOILS REPORT
A. Soils report dated January 24, 2014 has been prepared by Kozera Associates for Owner. Report
was prepared to assist in design process. This report is available for review at the Owner’s
business office.
B. The soils report is for informational purposes only and should not be considered part of the
Contract Documents. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer
retained by the Owner and represent his interpretation of the subsurface conditions, tests, and the
results of analysis which he has conducted. Should the data contained in this report not be
adequate for the offerors' purposes, offerors shall make their own explorations, tests, analyses,
and geotechnical report prior to bidding.
C. No representation or warranty is made by Owner or any other party regarding completeness,
accuracy, adequacy, or contents of this report or of the subsurface investigation upon which this
report is based.
1.02 AVAILABILITY
A. A copy of report is available from Owner upon request.
1.03 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
A. Contractor accepts full responsibility for using soil information in preparing bids.
B. Contractor is responsible to obtain, at its expense, any additional information necessary to bid and
perform Work.
C. Obtain and pay for services of qualified geotechnical engineer to perform any pertinent
Contractor-performed services recommended in the soils report or other Contractor-performed
items or services required to perform the Work.
D. Contractor agrees it will make no claim, if, in performing the Work, it finds actual subsurface
conditions encountered do not conform to those indicated by soil borings, test excavations, and
other subsurface investigations.
E. Provide cathodic protection for systems designated in soil investigation report as requiring same.
Also, provide cathodic protection systems prescribed elsewhere in Contract Documents and as
required to perform the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 013232
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013132 ‐ 31
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013132 ‐ 32
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SOIL INVESTIGATION DATA
SECTION 013213 - SCHEDULING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A. Summary of Work
1. Ensure timely execution of the Work using a critical path method schedule, because
timely Contractor performance is essential to this contract.
2. Allow Owner to monitor Contractor's Contract Schedule continuously and cooperate with
Owner such that Owner may audit Contractor's management of the Contract Schedule.
3. Use approved Contract Schedule for management of the entire Work, and make no
change, modification, or updating of logic and/or durations in the Contract Schedule
without prior written concurrence from Owner.
B. Purpose of this Specification
1. Assure adequate Contractor planning, scheduling, and reporting during execution of the
Work so it may be executed in an orderly and expeditious manner within the specified
time constraints.
2. Assure coordination of Contractor's self-performed work with work of a.) all of the
elements of Contractor's organization, including subcontractors, if any, b.) between such
subcontractors and vendors at all tiers, c.) Owner personnel and Owner consultants (if
applicable) and d.) separate contractors (if applicable).
3. Assist in processing of payments to Contractor.
4. Assist Contractor and Owner in monitoring the progress of the Work.
5. Assist Contractor and Owner in evaluating impact of proposed changes to the Work, if
any. Coordinate such evaluation with applicable requirements of any change order
Section that is part of this Contract.
6. Assist in detecting problems for the purpose of taking timely and effective corrective
actions, to provide a mechanism for monitoring the effect of such corrective actions and
to make adjustments in such corrective actions as necessary to ensure timely execution of
the Work.
7. Assure the approved Contract Schedule is used to manage the entire Work.
C. Standard Software
1. Utilize latest version of Primavera Project Planner or MS Project.
2. Set adjustable settings, including those pertaining to float calculation and progress/logic
override, in accordance with Owner’s instructions. Assume and utilize the most
conservative available settings.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
1. Milestones: Milestones listed in the Contract Documents represent only the major items of
work or interface dates. Milestones are considered essential to the satisfactory performance of
this Contract and to the coordination of all work on the Project. Indicate Milestones
(including the Work completion milestone, converted to working days) in the Contract
Schedule as zero duration activities with "Finish-No-Later-Than" dates. Milestones represent
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 33
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
the latest allowable completion durations, measured from the Contract’s initial Owner-issued
notice to proceed (NTP). Unless specifically excepted by Change Order, offer options or bid
alternates, if any and if exercised by Owner, shall be performed by Contractor within the
durations set out below. Coordinate the application of the following Milestones with the
contents of this specification and the Work.
List of Milestones
Code
Activities
Work Days
from NTP
A
Order Long Lead Items Identified by Owner Agent
30
B
Complete Work in readiness for final IDW lists.
120
C
Complete Work (Final Completion and Acceptance)
150
Additional milestones to be determined prior to award.
2. Contract Schedule: The Contract Schedule is the document that controls Contractor's
timely execution of the Work. It is initially defined by the number of Work Days listed in
the Contract Documents for completion of each Milestone and for completion (in
calendar days) of the Work, until the Owner approves the Detailed CPM Schedule
(“DCS”). Upon acceptance by Owner of the DCS, the DCS becomes the Contract
Schedule. Upon approval by Owner of mutually agreed change orders that amend the
DCS, the most current such approved amended version of the DCS becomes the Contract
Schedule.
3. Work Days are defined as the days in the calendar during the period of Work
performance, excluding Saturdays, Sundays and legally-mandated federal employee
holidays (which apply to the area in which the Work is performed). The federal holidays
are: New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day
and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Saturday, preceding Friday is taken as holiday,
and if holiday falls on a Sunday, the following Monday is taken as holiday. All work days
shall be considered fully available for Contractor to perform the work indicated in all
pertinent activities in the Contract Schedule, unless Contractor qualifies for weather
delays as described below.
4. Data Date: The last Work Day of each month, for all months between NTP and Final
Completion and Acceptance, in accordance with schedule update requirements of this
specification.
5. Extended Overhead Cost: Cost incurred by Contractor in the event the Contract Time is
extended beyond the completion date set for the entire Work, and Owner-caused time
extension is the sole-and-controlling cause of such extension. Only costs incurred by
Contractor on the Project work site are eligible to be classified as Extended Overhead
Costs, and only if Contractor satisfies all pertinent requirements set out in this
specification. In coordination with the CSI Division 1 specification governing contract
change orders, such costs shall be limited to direct daily costs associated with temporary
facilities on the project site and supervision assigned full-time to the Project site. Any
actual or alleged off-site costs associated with time extensions shall be deemed fully
compensated by the percentage mark-ups in the Change Order Section that is part of this
Contract, if any, or as negotiated between the parties.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 34
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
PART 2 - PROCEDURES AND REPORTS
2.01
A.
DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE (DCS)
Submit to Owner Representative within twenty-one (21) calendar days following NTP
two hard copies (and one electronic copy) of detailed time-scaled precedence format
network graphics and reports of proposed DCS containing the following:
1. Narrative of Contractor's proposed phasing and sequencing methodology, with named
geographical areas of work, major systems and major activities each identified with
unique codes.
2. Activity Report: The activity number, description, estimated duration in Work Days,
coding structure, early start and finish dates, late start and finish dates, total and free
float and responsibility code.
3. Presentation showing that proposed DCS conforms with all Milestone durations
and/or dates specified.
4. Break-out of dates for delivery of Owner-furnished material and/or equipment, if
applicable.
6. Computer-Generated Graphics: Network diagram plots, showing critical path(s).
7. Provide a Key Items Procurement Report for all "key" (major equipment and materials
and long-lead (over 8 weeks, from order placement to delivery)) items fabricated or
supplied for the Work. For each such key item, include activities in the DCS for
submittal, submittals review, fabrication, in-plant testing, shipment and delivery, field
installation, field testing, functional performance testing and commissioning.
8. Present evidence that Contractor's proposed DCS shall not (a) be controlled by
limitations in the quantities of labor or other resources, or alternatively, (b) propose a
plan for selective management by Contractor of selected resource types to ensure that
no resources may control the critical path or paths at any time during execution of the
Work.
9. Details of each calendar. Base schedule on standard workweek consisting of five 8hour days (Monday through Friday), subject to holidays described above. Contractor
may propose working outside of normal work hours, including multiple shifts,
working holidays and weekends, and other non-standard calendars, provided
Contractor obtains Owner approval a minimum of five work days in advance of the
proposed occurrence of work outside of normal hours. All Contractor’s schedule
calendars shall indicate the holidays as non-working days, unless the Owner expressly
approves otherwise. Indicate non-productive time in last two weeks of December of
each calendar year. Create a calendar for weather-affected activities in accordance
with the requirements herein pertaining to schedule effects of weather.
10.
With the final iteration of the DCS submission, provide a written commitment
from the first tier of subcontractors to be represented in the form of a signed
acceptance of the submitted version of the DCS by all such parties. This requirement
is an essential part of this Contract, and shall control payment to Contractor.
B.
Special Constraints: Minimize special constraints and add none during the execution of
the Work without Owner’s express approval. Clearly identify and explain proposed
special constraints including:
1. Finish-to-finish, start-to-start, start-to-finish, and finish-to-start leads and lags.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 35
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
2. Starts-on, starts-no-earlier, finishes-on and finishes-no-earlier date constraints.
3. Special calendars, beyond Owner-approved standard five day and seven day calendars.
4. Resource caps.
C. Duration and Cost Limits: Ensure that the level of detail of the Contractor's DCS is a
function of the complexity of the work involved. Ensure that all activities have duration
of not more than fifteen Work Days unless Owner expressly authorizes an exception.
Owner will take into account special attributes of the Work, such as long-lead equipment
with extended engineering, fabrication and delivery schedules.
D. Activity Details: Incorporate the following elements and requirements in proposed DCS:
1. Use clear and concise activity descriptions, designed to ensure that the beginning and
end of each activity shall be objectively observable and verifiable during execution of
the Work.
2. Restrict each activity to a single performing organization. Such organizations shall
include Contractor self-performing work organization(s), subcontractors (if any),
manufacturers, fabricators, and time-sensitive suppliers. Involve all such performing
organizations in the development of the Contract Schedule and secure their individual
and collective express commitment and sign-off to satisfy the requirements of the
Contract Schedule proposed by Contractor to Owner.
3. Code activities in the DCS that are Owner responsibility to execute as Owner
responsibility activities. Include such activities as review and acceptance of
documentation (including the DCS schedule), design submittals, issuance of NTP’s
and other Owner activities. Allow adequate duration for the Owner review activities
and as noted in other sections of the Contract, but never less than seven working days
unless Owner expressly approves otherwise.
4. In addition to identification of responsible organization, each activity shall have
codes identifying areas of work that coordinate with the above general sequencing
plan. Ensure that areas of work are planned and scheduled in the DCS in manageable
increments. Code such increments and assign an area code to each relevant activity.
5. Provide schedule activities for each of permits, notices, tests and inspections for all
pertinent activities and phases.
6. Structure schedule to reflect incremental completion of the project (e.g. by floor/by
area/ by systems/equipment). Include appropriate time for Contractor and Owner for
reviewing, listing, conducting, correcting and verification of incomplete and/or
deficient work (IDW), organized by project area.
7. Provide activities for key submittals, in coordination with the level of detail indicated
in the key items procurement report.
2.02
ACCEPTANCE OF DCS
A. Owner's acceptance of the Contractor's DCS is a condition precedent to any progress
payments to Contractor.
B. Owner's acceptance of proposed DCS signifies only that Owner's summary review of the
DCS leads Owner to believe that Contractor has met the general requirements of this
specification pertaining to DCS format and content. Acceptance by Owner of the DCS
does not relieve Contractor of any of its responsibility whatsoever for the accuracy or
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 36
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
feasibility of Contractor's plan for execution of the Work, or to perform the Work within
specified time constraints. Such Owner acceptance does not expressly or impliedly
warrant, acknowledge or admit the reasonableness of the activities, logic, durations,
manpower, cost or equipment loading of the Contractor's proposed or accepted Contract
Schedule.
C. Should Contractor fail to properly define any element of Work, activity or logic and
Owner review does not detect this omission or error, such omission or error, when
discovered by Contractor or Owner, shall be corrected by Contractor before the next
monthly schedule update and shall not be cause for delay of completion of the Work
within the specified time constraints. Contractor acknowledges that Owner is not required
or otherwise obligated to discover errors or omissions in Contractor's proposed Contract
Schedule.
2.03
FLOAT TIME
A. Float time is not for the exclusive benefit of either Contractor or Owner. Manage work
according to early start dates, by commencing activities on the early start date (calculated
by the latest approved Contract Schedule) or earlier if possible, unless constrained by an
Owner-approved resource limitation. Owner may reserve and apportion float time
according to the needs of the Project. Actual or projected Owner-caused delays that do
not exceed available float time shall not have any effect upon Contractor's adherence to
specified time constraints and shall not be a basis for any time extension or additional
compensation.
B. Contractor acknowledges that a) activity delays shall not automatically result in
adjustment of specified time constraints, b) a Change Order (i.e. modification or
amendment of the contract) or other Owner action or inaction may not affect existing
critical activities or cause non-critical activities to become critical, c) a Change Order or
delay may result in only consuming a part of the available total float that may exist within
an activity chain of the network, thereby not causing any effect on specified time
constraints.
C. Pursuant to the above float sharing requirements, use of float released by elimination of
float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logic
restraints, unreasonably extended activity durations, or imposed dates shall be distributed
by Owner to the benefit of Owner and Contractor.
D. In the event the Contractor wishes to complete the Work earlier than the time specified
therefor:
1. Continue to calculate float based on the Work completion date specified as of Contract
execution, by maintaining the specified Work completion date as a "finish-no-laterthan" constraint.
2. The completion time for the Work shall not be amended by Owner's approval of,
acceptance of or acquiescence to Contractor's proposed earlier completion date.
3. Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, be entitled to payment of any damages
or to receive additional compensation for indirect, general, administrative or other
forms of overhead costs, for the period between the time of earlier completion
proposed by Contractor and the completion time for the Work specified as of NTP.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 37
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
UPDATES
A. Update the Contract Schedule every two (2) weeks and in coordination with Contractor’s
requests for progress payments.
B. On a working day (designated data date) approximately five working days preceding time
designated for monthly payment, meet with Owner for the purpose of reviewing
Contractor's report of actual progress. Submit Contractor's up-to-date and accurate
progress data as of Data Date.
C. Submit computer reports and network graphics that reflect the progress of the Work.
Adjust the selection and sort sequence, format and content of reports as directed by
Owner.
D. Contractor acknowledges that updating the Contract Schedule to reflect actual progress
made as of the date of update is not a modification to the Contract Schedule’s Milestone
requirements.
E. Submit progress report indicating the activities (and portions of activities by percentage)
completed during the reporting period, the actual start dates for those activities currently
in progress, the actual finish dates for those activities which were completed since the last
update, and the progress along and deviations from the critical path in terms of days
ahead or days behind each individual Milestone date.
F. Submit a narrative report which shall include a description of the status of the schedule,
problem areas if any, current and anticipated delaying factors and their known and/or
forecast impact, and an explanation of corrective actions taken and planned.
G. Submit list of actual number of personnel (or man-hours) by discipline by working day
by activity actually engaged on the Work during the reporting period, with such total
stated separately as to on-site office (project work location), administrative management
personnel and on-site supervisory personnel. These man-hour reports shall directly
correlate to Contractor’s certified payroll presentations.
H. Submit two updated electronic copies of the network. The first copy shall be an updated
version of the Contract Schedule, excluding Contractor-proposed changes. The second
copy shall be an updated version of the Contract Schedule, including Contractorproposed changes. Submit with the second copy a list of the proposed modifications,
additions, deletions and changes in activity logic and/or durations to approved Contract
Schedule, including time-recovery steps and actions required by the "Responsibility for
Completion" provisions of this specification. Include a written justification for each such
proposal.
I.
If, as a result of the monthly update, the Owner gives the Contractor notice that the
Contract Schedule no longer represents the actual prosecution and progress of the Work,
submit a revision to the Contract Schedule, including proposed adjustments in activity
durations, logic changes, and resource usage or cost loading. Any negative float indicated
in Contractor’s proposed updates must be presented to Owner by Contractor with a bona
fide Contractor-authored plan for elimination of such negative float.
J.
Owner will respond in writing to each schedule update. Owner's response may include
questions and/or requests for revisions. Respond in writing within seven calendar days,
answering questions, and either agreeing with Owner's proposed revisions and submitting
a modified update, or setting forth justification why such revisions should not be
implemented. If Contractor's justification for not implementing the revision is acceptable,
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 38
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
in Owner's sole judgment, such revision will be waived. If Owner does not accept the
Contractor’s justification, incorporate the Owner-directed revisions into the Contract
Schedule.
3.02
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Contractor's submission and acceptance by Owner of monthly progress updates shall
precede Owner's processing of payment to Contractor, less 10% retainage. If Contractor’s
progress is satisfactory, Owner shall release retainage with the final payment to
Contractor. If, in the judgment of Owner, Contractor fails to provide full and complete
Contract Schedule update as specified herein, Contractor shall be deemed to have not
provided the required information upon which progress payments may be made.
3.03
REQUESTED TIME ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE (RTAS) NETWORKS
A. The updated Contract Schedule submitted by Contractor shall not indicate a completion
date later than the specified time constraints, subject to time extensions approved by
Owner. If Contractor believes it is entitled to a time extension, submit to Owner, within
the deadlines set out herein and (until approved by Owner) concurrent with each
contemporaneous monthly update, a separate schedule analysis entitled Requested Time
Adjustment Schedule ("RTAS"). Indicate, in said analysis, in addition to requirements of
the General Conditions, proposed adjustments in the Contract Schedule which, in the
opinion of Contractor, should be made due to owner-accountability changes, delays or
conditions occurring during the past month or previously, or which are expected or
contended by Contractor. Said analysis shall be time-scaled utilizing a computer
generated network. This paragraph shall not relieve Contractor of its obligation to
provide proper and timely separate written notice of impacts to schedule. Contractor
acknowledges that its preparation of RTASs is not extra work to the Contract and that,
therefore, preparation by Contractor of RTASs shall not be cause for Contractor to
receive any additional time for performance of the Work or to receive additional
compensation.
B. Subject to float sharing requirements defined herein, time extensions will be granted only
to the extent of equitable and mutually acceptable time adjustments to the activity or
activities affected by the Change Order(s), or where delay consumes the total (positive or
zero) float of a critical activity (or path) and extends Milestone dates, using the approved
update of the Owner-approved Contract Schedule that is current as of the issue of
Owner's written request for Contractor proposal connected with a potential Change Order
or other Owner-accountability potential schedule effect.
C. Weather Delays: All work days shall be considered fully available for Contractor to
perform the work indicated in all pertinent activities in the Contract Schedule, unless,
upon Contractor timely request, an authorized member of the Owner Representative team
(a) contemporaneously annotates Contractor’s daily report with an acknowledgement that
the day reported upon was unavailable to Contractor for excusable weather-related
causes, such as severe precipitation and/or the continuing immitigable effects thereof,
(b) identifies the specific activities by activity number so affected, and (c) identifies the
extent of such impact for each affected activity (i.e. percentage reduction of crew or
equipment effectiveness and/or progress). During time frames when the Work may
legitimately be affected by precipitation (e.g. open excavation), in coordination with
historical weather data at http://www.erh.noaa.gov, Contractor’s DCS shall indicate that a
minimum of 5 work days per month shall be unproductive due to weather on field
activities potentially so affected. Reduce the number of work days available in the CPM
work calendar during months and work phases where weather can impact job progress.
However, Contractor shall take all reasonable means to avoid and mitigate the impact of
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 39
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
precipitation on the progress of the Work (e.g. drain and pump work areas, before, during
and following precipitation). In the event that Contractor satisfies these requirements and
the critical path is affected by more than said 5 work days per month, Contractor may
submit an RTAS indicating such effect for the time lost beyond subject 5 work days.
D. Submit RTAS within twenty calendar days after the initiation of the thing(s) or event(s)
which Contractor contends may lead to a potential Owner-accountability delay in the
performance of the Work, or from the time of Owner's issuance of a written request for
Contractor proposal connected with a potential change order (or documents of like
effect), even if such issuance precedes notice to proceed for change order(s) concerned,
whichever is later. Other Owner-caused potential impacts of any category shall be
considered to have been initiated upon written initial Owner direction connected
therewith, including direction provided through duly minuted meetings.
E. Within 14 calendar days following submittal by Contractor to Owner of RTAS, in the
proper format and including all specified content, Owner will meet with Contractor to
review the submittal. Revise and resubmit RTAS within 3 working days of such meeting,
adjusting RTAS to consider issues raised by Owner in above meeting. Owner will
respond with written decision within 7 calendar days following Contractor resubmittal of
RTAS. Upon approval, if approved, a copy of the RTAS signed by Owner shall be
returned to Contractor and thereafter incorporated into the Contract via Change Order.
Incorporate the results of each approved RTAS in the update of the Contract Schedule
that immediately follows such approval.
F. Contractor waives its right to submit requests for time extension and to receive a time
extension or additional compensation unless it meets the above requirements for RTASs,
particularly the 20-day requirement. Contractor waives any claim for acceleration due to
refusal by Owner to grant time extensions should Contractor fail to comply with the
submission and justification requirements described herein for RTASs. Contractor's
submission of RTASs shall not constitute a basis for adjustment in specified time
constraints unless and until approved by Owner. Actively pursue timely completion of all
activities pending such approval.
3.05
RESPONSIBILITY FOR COMPLETION
Furnish sufficient forces, offices, materials, facilities, plant and equipment, to ensure the
prosecution of the Work in accordance with the most current approved Contract Schedule
update. Upon Owner's written notice that Contractor is behind schedule, as a result of
inexcusable causes, immediately remediate such time loss by increasing the hours of work,
the number of shifts, overtime operations and/or the amount of plant and equipment, without
additional cost to Owner. Contractor acknowledges that such remedial action by Contractor is
not compensable acceleration of the performance of the Work. The provisions of this
paragraph shall not be construed as prohibiting work on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays, if
the Contractor so elects and gives written notice to Owner two working days in advance of it.
END OF SECTION 013213
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013213 ‐ 40
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SCHEDULING
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide submittals described in the Section and as may be otherwise required to perform the
Work, in coordination with the Contract Time.
B. Control the timing and size of submittals to coordinate with the work schedules of Owner
representatives.
C. Contractor or Subcontractors may require submittals for coordination purposes even if not
required by Owner for review.
D. Product options and substitutions after execution of Contract: See Section 01 63 00.
E. Permits, licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, Certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records
established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon
performance of the Work.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Submittals: Shop drawings, product data, samples, project information, manufacturer’s data
or other such item required by this Section, other Sections or Owner direction to be submitted
by Contractor for the purpose of obtaining Owner approval thereon or other Owner action as
herein described.
B. Shop Drawing submittals are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared
for Work by Contractor or Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate
some portion of Work.
C. Product Data submittals are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,
instructions, brochures, diagrams, test data and other information furnished by Contractor to
illustrate material, product or system for some portion of Work.
D. Sample submittals are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or
workmanship and establish standards by which Work will be judged.
1. Samples also include job site mockups.
E. Project Information submittals are items pertaining to quality control and Owner information
which do not require review or response by Owner and are to be retained for project file only.
1. Examples:
a. Product performance and construction test reports.
b. Certifications.
c. Design calculations.
F. Contract Closeout Information submittals are items pertaining to quality control and Owner
information, which are required at Final Completion and Acceptance and do not require
review or response by Owner before commencement of construction.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 41
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
1. Examples:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Preoccupancy test reports.
Warranties.
Instruction, training, demonstration, and commissioning reports.
Record Documents.
G. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and information submittals do not amend the
requirements delineated in the Contract Documents.
1. Purpose of submittals is to demonstrate, for those portions of Work, for which submittals
are required, the way Contractor proposes to conform to information given and
requirements expressed in Contract Documents.
H. "First Listed" Manufacturers:
1. The manufacturer names (and model and/or series numbers, where applicable) which are
listed first in line in the provisions pertaining to products in the Specifications refer to the
specific equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or
catalog number which form the basis of the Architect’s design underlying the Contract
Documents, and shall be regarded as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be
construed as limiting competition.
I.
"Other Than First Listed" Manufacturers:
1. Subject to the limitations set out in Sections 01 60 00 and 01 63 00, the term "Other Than
First Listed" as used in the Specifications refers to equipment, material, articles or
patented processes that may provide the same functions and meet the same performance
standards but require different structural support or different utility hookups, as compared
to the first listed products. Other Than First Listed items are acceptable for performance
but the Contractor is responsible for the costs for any dimensional, operational, structural,
utility or other adjustments to make the products fit the Project. If the Contractor intends
to supply an "Other Than First Listed" product, the requirements of Sections 01 60 00
and 01 63 00 shall apply.
1.03 TRANSMITTAL - GENERAL
A. Submit items to Owner
B. Contractor is responsible for making submissions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit to Owner.
Number each submittal with a unique identification number as indicated below.
Transmittal to include items from one Specification Section only.
Transmit items with Owner furnished Submittal Transmittal Form.
C. Provide information required for complete review of each item in one submittal.
1. Do not highlight pertinent information with markings that turn opaque or do not reproduce on
black-and-white photocopy machines.
D. Do not submit partial submittals for any specification section.
E. Provide submittals sufficiently in advance of date required to allow Owner reasonable time for
review, and resubmission if necessary.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 42
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
1. Schedule submittals requiring Owner approval and Project Information during first quarter of
construction period.
a. Schedule submittals requiring Owner color selection within 60 days following Notice to
Proceed.
2. Allow minimum 3 work weeks for Owner review or re-review of all individual submittals.
3. Items not submitted in accordance with provisions of this Section will be returned, without
Owner action, for resubmission.
4. Items submitted but not required by Contract Documents may be returned without action,
marked “Reviewed Only, Not Approved” or the equivalent.
5. Submissions containing items not approved for use by Contract Documents will be rejected,
and Contractor shall immediately provide submittals on specified products.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Shop Drawing and Product Data submittals are required as called for by respective Specification
Section submittal paragraph(s), this Section or other elements of Contract Documents.
B. Identify drawings with Project name, date, name and address of Owner’s Representative, name
and address of Contractor, name and address of Subcontractor, name and address of supplier,
name of manufacturer, number and title of appropriate Specification Section and drawing number
and detail references, as appropriate.
C. Submit PDF documents by posting to project submittal portal site or submit one reproducible
transparency and six prints of each Shop Drawing until submittals concerned are approved by
Owner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
DO NOT SUBMIT PRINTS ALONE.
Submit drawings 24 in x 36 in or not larger than 36 in x 42 in.
Allow clear space, approximately 6 inches square, for stamping on right hand side.
Contractor shall receive only one reproducible return copy of approved submittals processed
by Owner.
D. Submit PDF documents by posting to project submittal portal site or submit six copies of Product
Data items such as equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, or standard catalog items, plus number
of copies required for Contractor use.
1. Indicate exact item or model and proposed options.
2. Include scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, wiring
diagrams, controls and other pertinent data in SI format.
3. 8.5in x 11in or 11in x 17in are maximum Product Data submittal copy sizes.
1.05 SAMPLES
A. Sample submittals are required as called for by submittal paragraphs in each Specification
Section.
B. Identify two copies of samples with manufacturer's name, item, use, type, Project designation,
Specification Section or drawing detail reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent
data.
C. Submit samples to Owner.
D. Owner may, at its option, retain samples for comparison purposes.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 43
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
E. Field mockups: Fabricate on site in accordance with Specification Section requiring them. Do not
order materials affected by mock-ups until Owner fully approves mock-ups.
1.06 PROJECT INFORMATION AND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT INFORMATION
A. Information submittals are required as called for by submittal paragraphs in each Specification
Section.
B. Submit one copy each of Project and Contract Closeout Information items unless method of
submittal is indicated elsewhere.
1. Include pertinent data.
2. 8.5in x 11in or 11in x 17in are maximum Project and Contract Closeout Information
submittal copy sizes.
C. Project Information:
1. Owner may review at its sole discretion project information for compliance with Contract
Documents only.
2. Review will not constitute a detailed check of submitted design calculations.
3. Appropriateness and accuracy of calculations is responsibility of Contractor (and Contractor's
professional engineer when such calculations are required to be professionally sealed).
4. When professional or other Certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or
equipment is required by Contract Documents, Owner shall be entitled to rely upon accuracy
and completeness of such calculations and Certifications.
D. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Owner may review at its sole discretion Contract Closeout Information for compliance with
Contract Documents only.
1.07 CONTRACTOR ACTION
A. Cause all pertinent parties in Contractor organization to review, approve, stamp and sign all
submittal items prior to submission to Owner.
B. Stamp (or electronic equivalent) provided by Contractor indicates that Contractor:
1. Has verified field dimensions and quantities.
2. Has verified field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data.
3. Has reviewed and coordinated submittal data with requirements of Work and Contract
Documents.
4. Certifies that submittals comply with Contract Documents.
C. Contractor shall cause its subcontractors’ signature and stamp (or electronic equivalent) on any
and all submittals to indicate that subcontractors:
1. Have verified field dimensions and quantities.
2. Have verified field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data.
3. Have reviewed and coordinated submittal data with requirements of Work and Contract
Documents.
4. Certify that the subject submittal(s) comply fully with all requirements of the Contract
Documents.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 44
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
5. Have verified that the subject submittal(s) are appropriate and adequate for the use and
function of the items, systems and elements documented in subject submittal(s).
D. Reproduce and distribute submittals:
1. Subcontractor/vendor.
2. Owner: 3 copies of "complies with Contract" or "complies with Contract, as noted"
submittals.
3. Other contractors, Subcontractors or vendors as may be required for coordination purposes.
E. Resubmit items stamped "revise and resubmit" or "does not comply with Contract" until approval
is received or submittal is returned by Owner indicating that no further Owner action is required.
1. Based on numbering scheme shown below, add letter suffix to previous transmittal number,
to indicate resubmission, for example 03 45 13A-1A.
2. Direct specific attention, in writing, on resubmitted submittals, to revisions other than those
requested by Owner on previous submittals.
F. Direct specific attention, in writing or on, Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to deviations
from Contract Documents.
1. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviation from requirements of Contract
Documents by Owner's review and/or approval of submittals, Shop Drawings, Product Data
and Samples unless Contractor has specifically informed Owner in writing of such deviation
at time of submission and Owner has given written approval to specific deviation. Such
deviations shall require a change order unless Owner considers them minor changes in Work
and subject deviations do not involve adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time.
G. Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,
Product Data or Samples by Owner approval thereof.
H. Contractor represents and warrants that all submittals shall be prepared by persons and entities
possessing expertise and experience in the trade for which the submittal is prepared and, if
required by Owner or applicable law, by a licensed professional engineer.
I.
Contractor is responsible for confirmation and correlation of dimensions at job site; for
information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction; and for
coordination of work of all trades.
J.
Completed Work shall strictly conform to approved samples or approved mock-up if applicable.
K. Do not start work which requires submittals, prior to return of submittals with Owner's stamp
indicating approval.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Information:
1. Schedule of submittals: Submit this list prior to first application for payment.
1.09 SCHEDULE
A. Within 30 days following Notice to Proceed, submit to the Owner a complete schedule of
required submittals, including submittals required by this Section, indicating proposed submittal
dates for items in format acceptable to Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 45
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
1. Show in subject schedule all submittals required by contract, including shop drawings,
product data, samples, spare parts data, project information, and Contract closeout
information.
B. Owner may withhold full or partial payment, at Owner's sole discretion, until satisfactory
schedule of submittals has been received.
C. Furnish all submittals to Owner, for entire Contract, within 90 days following Notice to Proceed,
except for Contract closeout information, training data, maintenance/ operations manuals, and
other submittals excluded via Owner's written consent. Furnish all maintenance, operations, and
training submittals and Contract closeout information 90 days preceding date indicated in the
latest approved Contract Schedule for completion of the Work, as indicated on the schedule for
the Work approved by Owner. Owner may withhold full or partial payment, at Owner's sole
discretion, should Contractor fail to deliver submittals as indicated in this paragraph.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES REVIEW
A. Owner review is only for conformance with design concept of Project and compliance with intent
of information given in Contract Documents.
B. Owner will stamp submittals indicating action taken.
1. Sample stamp (which Architect may vary to adopt to its current procedures):
Owner Submittal Action
[ ] A - COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT
[ ] B - COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT, AS NOTED
[ ] C - DOES NOT COMPLY WITH CONTRACT
[ ] D - REVISE AND RESUBMIT
[ ] E - NO ACTION REQUIRED
Action taken in accordance with the Contract Documents
BY_____________________DATE________SUBMITTAL NO.__________
C. Review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated
by Owner, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.
D. Approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which item is a
component.
1.11 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM
A. Coordinate with Owner, A/E and electronic project management control software regarding
specific format and procedures.
1.12 SPARE PARTS DATA
A. As soon as practicable after approval of the list of equipment, furnish spare parts data for each
different item of equipment listed. Include a complete list of parts and supplies with current unit
price and source of supply; a list of parts and supplies that are either normally furnished at no
extra cost with the purchase of the equipment, or specified hereinafter to be furnished as part of
the Contract and a list of additional items recommended by the manufacturer to assure efficient
operation. The foregoing shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under the
guarantee specified by the Contract.
1.13 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY SCHEDULE
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 46
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
A. For items having a lead time of more than 20 calendar days, within 60 calendar days after Notice
to Proceed, submit to the Owner for approval, a schedule indicated in the procurement plans
(including subcontractors’ procurements) for materials, plant and equipment. The submittal shall
be in the format prescribed by Owner and include as a minimum the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Description.
Date purchase order shall be or has been placed.
Promised shipping date.
Name of manufacturer or supplier.
Date delivery is expected.
Date material or equipment is required, according to current progress schedule or network.
B. Update the equipment delivery schedule at monthly intervals or as directed by the Owner. This
delivery schedule shall reflect any changes occurring since the last update. Submit copies of
purchase orders upon Owner request.
1.15 SUBCONTRACTORS AND PERSONNEL
A. Submit to the Owner a list of the key personnel of the Contractor and Subcontractors (including
addresses and telephone numbers) for use in the event of an emergency. As changes occur and
additional information becomes available, correct and change the information contained in
previous lists.
1.16 ELECTRONIC RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Within 14 calendar days after receipt of approval from Owner and the Architect on any submittal,
for equipment in Divisions 07, 10, 12, 13, 26 and 32, Contractor shall submit a final electronic
version of the submittal for Owner future asset management.
B. Final electronic submittals shall:
1. be originally authored in electronic media and not scanned versions with hand mark ups
unless specifically approved by the Owner.
2. be provided in Portable Document Format (*.pdf) with selectable text and graphics that are
readable. Generally the documents shall be merged into one bookmarked document up to 500
mb. Merged documents shall use hierarchical bookmarks to form a table of contents and
provide hyperlinks to the subject topic. For submittals larger than 500 mb, provide a
summary document in PDF or HTML format with relative hyperlinks to the associated
document files within the same directory or in directories subordinate to the summary
document.
3. provide all final ratings, parameters, specifications, options, etc., for all relevant specification
Divisions cited above. In the case where the Architect returns the submittal "Approved As
Noted, Resubmission Not Required" and includes mark-ups or comments that change the
originally submitted ratings, parameters, specifications, options, etc., the Contractor shall
correct the documents in the original electronic document prior to submitting the final
electronic documents.
4. highlight the specific rating, parameter, specification, option, etc., when the original
document includes multiple alternatives. For instance, when a range of performance
parameters are given, or various sizes are shown, or various options are listed, the applicable
item shall be indicated by highlight, circle, pointer, etc.
5. not necessarily include generalized direction from the Architect that does not relate to
ordering and purchasing the equipment. For instance, do not transfer notes like “coordinate
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 47
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
with xxx for final motor horsepower” into the electronic submittal. In that example only the
final coordinated sizes would be indicated.
C. Final Electronic Submittals shall be either posted to the project web site or provided on compact
disc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 013300
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013300 ‐ 48
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01 35 01 - LBE/MBE/WBE INCLUSION AND WORKFORCE DEVELOPMENT
REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.
Contract Requirements:
1.1
The project associated with this specification is within the East Baltimore Development Inc. (EBDI)
project area. Therefore, Contractor shall comply with the following inclusion requirements.
1.2
All records required to be maintained by Contractor under this specification are subject to ongoing
audit by the Owner and EBDI.
1.3
Contractor shall obligate its subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to this specification by means of
appropriate flow-down clause(s), and shall require said subcontractors and sub-subcontractors to
satisfy the requirements of this specification section, including timely providing documentation
required by this specification and as required by the Economic Inclusion Team (or duly appointed
designees).
1.4
The requirements of this Section are an essential part of the Contract, including the requirement that
Contractor fulfill its detailed Owner-approved Contractor-authored inclusion plan.
2.
Background/History:
2.1
In April 2002, the Agreement for Minority Inclusion for the East Baltimore Housing/Biotech Park
Development Project established a commitment to dramatically increase contracting and
procurement dollars spent with minority businesses in all aspects of the East Baltimore Project, as
well as spur greater involvement of minority businesses in identified growth sectors of the City’s
economy, including, but not limited to retail, technology, and real estate development; and to
dramatically increase the number, magnitude and success rate of minority businesses in Baltimore
City.
2.2
In addition, the Agreement establishes a commitment to utilize collective resources to provide
career-oriented employment opportunities for Baltimore residents, with qualified displaced residents
being given a preference for job training opportunities over other qualified applicants that are not
former residents of the EBDI project area.
2.3
To assist in the fulfillment of the above goals, Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this
specification in support of EBDI’s promotion of:
2.3.1
the involvement of Minority-Owned (MBE), Women-Owned (WBE), and Locally-Owned
Businesses (LBE) (collectively referred to herein as Targeted Business Enterprises); and
2.3.2
the training and employment of local residents, in the ongoing economic transformation of the
East Baltimore Revitalization Area.
2.4
This Economic Opportunity Plan and Procurement Policy (hereinafter referred to as “the Plan’’)
outlines the policies and protocols that have been developed to ensure the achievement of the goals
of EBDI’s Economic Opportunity Initiative and the aforementioned Agreement for Minority
Inclusion.
3.
Economic Inclusion Definitions
3.1
The following definitions apply to this specification:
3.1.1
Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) means a business enterprise that is owned, operated, and
controlled by one or more minority group members (African American, Hispanic American,
Asian American, or Native American), who have at least 51% ownership, and in which the
minority group members have operational and managerial control, interest in capital, and earnings
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 49
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
commensurate with their percentage of ownership. To qualify, an MBE enterprise shall be
certified by the City of Baltimore and/or by the State of Maryland (e.g. by MDOT) as an MBE.
3.1.2
Women’s Business Enterprise (WBE) means a business enterprise that is owned, operated, and
controlled by one or more women who have at least 51% ownership, and in which the women
have operational and managerial control, interest in capital, and earnings commensurate with their
percentage of ownership. To qualify, a WBE enterprise shall be certified by the City of Baltimore
as a WBE and/or by the State of Maryland (e.g. by MDOT) as a WBE/Female.
3.1.3
Local Business Enterprise (LBE) means a business enterprise whose principal office is physically
located in Baltimore City, subject to the three-level award priority system described below. Firms
that are primarily non-Baltimore with a local office in Baltimore, but with their principal offices
located elsewhere are not considered local firms. Contractor shall employ LBE’s to satisfy the
LBE Inclusion goals set out herein. To qualify, an LBE shall also be registered and in good
standing with the Maryland Department of Assessment and Taxation as a legal business entity,
and shall be subject to Baltimore City taxes. Local MBE and WBE’s may also qualify as LBEs.
EBDI reserves the right to evaluate any and all LBEs’ ability to satisfy financial, technical, or
other criteria before or after bid opening. Contractor shall invite the Economic Inclusion Team to
bid review meetings conducted by Contractor, in order to allow the team to verify the status of
candidate LBE firms under consideration by Contractor. Contractor is obligated to maintain
records necessary to demonstrate that it has marketed, bid and awarded subcontracted LBE work
in accordance with the following geographical priorities:
3.1.3.1
First Priority: LBE businesses located and having their primary headquarters in the 88 acres
of EBDI project area (bounded by Madison Street on the south, Broadway on the west,
Patterson Park Ave. on the east and the Amtrak railroad track on the north);
3.1.3.2
Second Priority: LBE businesses located and having their primary headquarters in the
following East Baltimore zip codes: 21202, 21205, 21206, 21213, 21214, 21218, 21224,
21231, 21237, 21251 and 21287;
3.1.3.3
Third Priority: Businesses located and headquartered elsewhere in Baltimore City.
3.1.4
Local Resident means a resident living in Baltimore City. Contractor is obligated to maintain
records demonstrating that it has utilized local residents, through EBDI, as the “first source” of its
hiring and has given priority (for research, marketing, notices, advertising and hiring) in the
following order:
3.1.4.1
First Priority: Residents residing in, relocated from or otherwise impacted by the EBDI
revitalization project area (bounded by Madison Street on the south, Broadway on the west,
Patterson Park Ave. on the east and the Amtrak railroad track on the north);
3.1.4.2
Second Priority: East Baltimore residents residing in the following zip codes: 21202, 21205,
21206, 21213, 21214, 21218, 21224, 21231, 21237, 21251 and 21287; and
3.1.4.3
Third Priority: Residents residing in the remaining 212 zip code areas of Baltimore City.
3.1.5
Workforce Development Pipeline is the mechanism developed by EBDI, via a partnership with
the Mayor’s Office of Employment Development (MOED), that provides:
3.1.5.1
the pathway through which Contractor shall hire new employees for performance of the
Work;
3.1.5.2
a pathway for East Baltimore residents to get assessed, obtain job readiness skills, industryspecific customized training, career coaching, job placement, and retention services; and
3.1.5.3
a pathway that assists businesses with meeting local hiring requirements in their contracts by
helping them to identify emerging job opportunities, develop customized training programs
for the jobs, and then identify appropriate residents to enroll in the customized training and
ultimately get placed in appropriate jobs.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 50
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
3.1.6
Contractor shall maintain the records necessary to demonstrate that it has conducted the research
and undertaken the activities necessary to use the Workforce Pipeline as its first source for
recruiting local residents for jobs.
3.1.7
Bidder is an entity who has submitted a proposal in response to a Request for Proposal (RFP) or
Request for Qualifications (RFQ) within the EDBI project area.
3.1.8
Contractor is an entity that is a party to a contract with EBDI or with another development entity
operating within the EBDI project area.
4.
Independent Third-Party Monitoring
4.1
In an effort to objectively report the outcomes of EBDI’s Economic Inclusion activities, the Owner
has employed the services of independent Third-Party Monitoring Contractor(s) to act as its
representative(s) on matters regarding the development, implementation and monitoring of this
Plan. Third-Party Monitoring Contractor(s) is/are managed by EBDI’s Senior Director of
Community and Human Services, or by another development entity operating within the EBDI
project area. The aforementioned parties along with EBDI’s Workforce Development Associate,
who is responsible for the day-to-day coordination of EBDI’s Senior Director of Community and
Human Services and the Governor’s Office of Minority Affairs are collectively referred to as the
“Economic Inclusion Team”. Contractor shall work with and cooperate fully with the efforts of the
Economic Inclusion Team.
4.2
Contractor shall timely fulfill the Economic Inclusion Team’s requests for information that the
Economic Inclusion Team requires to verify or validate Contractor’s compliance with the provisions
of this Section and the content of the Contractor-authored/Owner-approved inclusion plan that
supplements and provides additional detail regarding Contractor’s satisfaction of the goals, subject
matter and requirements in this Section.
5.
Non-Discrimination Policy
5.1
Contractor shall (a) ensure that it shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, religion, gender
or natural origin in the award and performance of its contract and/or any sub-contracts that may be
needed to perform the work or services hereunder, (b) ensure that it shall not discriminate on the
basis of race, color, religion, gender or natural origin in project with respect to all employment
practices, (c) comply with all applicable requirements of any federal, state or local law, ordinance or
regulation relating to affirmative action, equal opportunity and nondiscrimination in employment,
and (d) shall use its best practical efforts to meet all local goals relating thereto.
6.
Economic Inclusion Goals
6.1
See requirements for prime-level joint venturing below. If joint venturing satisfies the specified
requirements, it shall be credited toward the following goals.
6.2
Contractor shall comply with the following subcontracting goals. In addition to performing its own
independent marketing, business development and research, Contractor shall use the EBDI Local
Vendor Directory to identify local minority and women subcontractors, and the EBDI Workforce
Pipeline for identifying local residents for job opportunities.
6.3
Contracting Goals: Comply with the following subcontracting goals for subcontracts/prime-level
joint ventures:
6.3.1
Construction Contracts:
6.3.1.1
27% MBE + 8% WBE = 35% of total contract value;
6.3.1.2
20% LBE of total contract value
6.3.2
6.3.2.1
Design, Architecture, and Engineering-related contracts:
21% MBE + 13% WBE = 34% of total contract value
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 51
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
6.3.2.2
6.3.3
Professional/General Service Contracts:
6.3.3.1
6.4
20% LBE of total contract value
17% MBE + 9% WBE = 26% of total contract value
Workforce Inclusion Goals: Comply with the following workforce inclusion goals:
6.4.1
Commercial Construction Trades Work and Labor
6.4.1.1
Minimum Local Participation: Contractors performing commercial construction trades work
and labor shall ensure twenty-three percent (23%) of Total Labor Hours for skilled and
unskilled workers shall go to Local Residents as defined herein (Baltimore City residents
Third Priority); of which twelve percent (12%) of the labor hours shall go to East Baltimore
residents (Second Priority).
6.4.1.2
Minimum Local Hiring Level/Duration: Contractor shall fulfill its Owner-approved
commitment to hire a minimum number of local (per three-tier geographical priority system
set out herein) personnel that it (and its subcontractors at all levels) shall employ utilizing the
EBDI pipeline. The minimum quantity of local hires shall be 10 and Contractor shall provide
its best efforts to improve upon this goal. Each such hire shall be for a minimum of 2 months
and a project-wide average of no less than 3 months. In executing such new hires, Contractor
shall develop and obtain Owner approval for a Contractor-authored hiring plan that places a
priority on (a) hiring of local minorities and women, (b) hiring of same into skilled trades, (c)
formal apprenticeship of such new hires, (d) structured on-site and off-site training of such
new hires and (e) maximizing long-term retention of such new hires.
6.4.1.3
Verification: Contractor shall collect proof of Baltimore residency, based on bona fide State
of Maryland ID, and such residency shall match the residency shown in certified payrolls.
6.4.1.4
Demographics: Contractor shall collect and present information that will demonstrate that its
hiring of local residents aligns with the area demographics: 96% African-American, 2%
Hispanic and 2% Caucasian residing within the 11 Zip Codes.
6.4.1.5
Hiring Plan: In coordination with the above minimum local and new hiring levels/durations.
Contractor shall fulfill a Contractor-authored and Owner-approved hiring plan as described
below in this specification section.
6.4.2
Residential Construction:
6.4.2.1 Contractors performing residential construction trades work and labor shall ensure twenty percent
(20%) of the total work hours are performed by local minority and women residents.
7.
Implementation Protocols
7.1
Scope of Covered Projects/Contracts – The contracting goals referenced in this Plan shall apply to
all contracts valued at fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00) or greater with respect to deconstruction,
demolition, site preparation, construction projects, professional/general services, and/or any other
eligible contracted services. The workforce inclusion goals shall apply to any other construction
contracts and operating, food, and services contracts that the Economic Inclusion Team deems
appropriate.
7.2
Competitive Bidding and Non-Discrimination – Contractor is not required to engage Targeted
Business Enterprises that are not the lowest responsive and qualified bidders, or that otherwise are
not competitive with respect to quality, service, delivery time or price. However, any contractor that
proposes a deviation from the requirements of this specification shall maintain records that shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Economic Inclusion Team that the bidder has taken all
reasonable steps to avoid such deviation.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 52
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
7.3
Administration - The Owner and the Economic Inclusion Team will take the following actions to
ensure that Contracts shall be awarded and administered in accordance with the specified standards
and procedures:
7.3.1
Based on the scope of the project procured, advertisements for bids shall be posted on the EBDI
website and in minority-owned and non-minority-owned media no less than 14 days before bids
are due;
7.3.2
A written notification shall be sent to minority and women-oriented trade associations and
contractors’ associations about the availabilities of contracting opportunities no less than 10 days
before bids are due;
7.3.3
Contractor shall use the City’s and Maryland State’s directories of registered minority business
enterprises, women’s business enterprises, local business enterprises in the public domain; and
EBDI’s Local Vendor Directory to identify qualified M/W/LBEs for various projects;
7.3.4
Contractor shall provide sub-bidders, as needed, with information on Targeted Business
Enterprises, who are qualified to provide the services, materials, equipment or supplies required
for the project. The Economic Inclusion Team shall provide the electronic mail addresses of
Targeted Business Enterprises whenever applicable at the request of any Bidder;
7.3.5
Contractor shall evaluate all contracting opportunities in an effort to divide the total requirements
of a contract in a manner that will maximize opportunities for minority and women business
enterprises;
7.3.6
Contractor shall establish policies to make best practical efforts to (a) ensure that all contractors
submitting proper invoices are paid within 30 days upon receipt of such, and (b) make special
payment arrangements for selected L/M/W subcontractors when necessary to support
individualized cash flow needs; and
7.3.7
Ensure that all statistics and documentation required under this specification are submitted to the
EBDI Inclusion Team’s compliance and monitoring team on an appropriate periodic basis and as
requested.
8.
Achieving EBDI’s Economic Inclusion Goals
8.1
MBE/WBE/LBE Contracting – Contractor shall submit an Economic Inclusion Plan and Manpower
Projection Plan that outlines how it will achieve the contracting and local hiring goals for the entire
project. This may be a requirement of the initial solicitation. In an effort to maximize inclusion, the
bid documents may require the prime contractor to have their first and second tier sub-contractors
submit for review an Economic Inclusion Plan (EIP) and Manpower Projection Plan (MPP). (See
bid forms). Beyond these two tiers, Contractor shall explore inclusion at all levels of opportunity.
EBDI will collect and verify documentation to track inclusion at all levels of the project, and
Contractor is therefore responsible to ensure that EBDI is provided the appropriate documentation
in a timely and complete form.
8.2
If initial procurement is at a stage where details of the EIP and MPP are unknown, then as part of
Contractor’s response to the bid, Contractors shall convey their commitment to and experience in
maximizing MBE/WBE/LBE participation and local hiring and how they would apply those steps,
past successes/lessons learned and others on the project in East Baltimore. Prior to execution of the
Contractor’s contract, a detailed EIP and MPP will be required from the Contractor. This may be
required at the time, or within a defined period, of the submission of Contractor’s bid.
8.3
For projects and/or contracts that include multiple categories of contracts, such as construction,
architecture/engineering/design, and professional and/or general services, which have different
goals, the goal for each category will be monitored separately.
8.4
To achieve the MBE/WBE/LBE inclusion goals, prime contractors will get credit for work selfperformed by MBE/WBE/LBE subcontractors, PLUS any work that any such subcontractor may
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 53
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
subcontract to additional certified MBE/WBE and LBE firms. Neither Contractor nor its
subcontractors will get credit towards inclusion participation for any portion of their contracts or
subcontracts that is subcontracted to non-certified MBE/WBE and LBE firms. When Contractor and
its subcontractors subcontract with firms that satisfy both MBE and WBE qualifications, Contractor
and subcontractors can choose which category such qualifying subcontracts shall be counted
towards on a contract-by-contract basis; however, they can only be counted as either an MBE or a
WBE, not as both.
8.5
Local Minority and Female Resident Employment
8.5.1
8.6
The achievement of local resident workforce inclusion goals will be based on the actual number
of local, minority and female residents performing skilled and unskilled employee hours divided
by the total actual quantity of on-site skilled and unskilled employee hours worked. The hours
worked shall be verified by Contractor’s and subcontractors’ payrolls. Contractor shall organize
and structure its record-keeping to facilitate this information by categorizing by local, minority
and female workers on the project.
Best Practical Efforts To Achieve Inclusion Goals
8.6.1
8.7
Contractor shall use its best practical efforts to meet or exceed the inclusion goals specified
herein insofar as potential LBE, MBE and WBE subcontractors are competitive with respect to
quality, service, delivery time, and price. However, bidders shall adjust their procurement plans to
take into account possible lower capacity of available subcontractors, even though this may be
less convenient and arguably less efficient than the alternative of utilizing higher-capacity
subcontractors. As appropriate or needed, the Economic Inclusion Team may determine different
inclusion goals for a Covered Project other than what is listed above based on the City’s Disparity
Study, along with the diversity, depth of talent and entrepreneurial capabilities of the population
of the City of Baltimore. This will be determined on a project-by-project basis and will be
included in each RFP and respective Covered Contract.
Implementation of “Best Practical Effort” Standard To Achieve Contracting and Employment Goals
8.7.1
The requirements relative to monitoring best practical efforts of contractors and service providers
as to contracts shall include the following:
8.7.1.1
Documentation of Best Practical Efforts and Compliance
8.7.1.1.1
The following two components have been established for Projects to facilitate the inclusion of
MBE/WBE/LBE firms as contractors and minorities/females/local residents as site workforce
participants. In order to demonstrate their commitment and a specific and executable plan of
action, all Bidders shall submit with their bids:
8.7.1.1.1.1
An Economic Inclusion Plan (See bid form for template); and
8.7.1.1.1.2
A Manpower Projection Plan (See bid form for template).
8.7.1.2
Establishing Good Faith Best Practical Effort
8.7.1.2.1
If the Bidder’s Economic Inclusion Plan and Manpower Projection Plan does not meet or
exceed the established goals, the Contractor must prepare a Subcontracting/Vendor Plan
showing how it has made a good faith "best effort" to achieve the project goals. This plan
must include, but not be limited to, the following:
8.7.1.2.1.1
Written request for assistance to the Economic Inclusion Team a minimum of ten
business days prior to the bid due date;
8.7.1.2.1.2
Solicitation through newspapers, advertisements, job fairs, etc.;
8.7.1.2.1.3
Telephone logs;
8.7.1.2.1.4
Bid results and reasons why awards were made at variance with the specified goals;
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 54
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
8.7.1.2.1.5
Use of City/State-certified business firms via their directory;
8.7.1.2.1.6
Correspondence between bidder’s (and sub-bidders’, as applicable) firm(s) and any
MBE/WBE/LBE firms.
8.8
Good Faith Non-Compliance Finding
8.8.1
In cases where Owner and the Economic Inclusion Team has cause to believe that a Bidder or
Contractor, acting in good faith, has failed to comply with the provisions of the plan, Owner shall
attempt to resolve the noncompliance through conciliation and persuasion. In conciliation, the
Bidder or Contractor must satisfy Owner and the Team that it has its "Best Efforts" to achieve the
agreed upon participation goals. "Best Efforts" on the part of the Bidder or Contractor include:
8.8.1.1
Entering into a contractual relationship with the designated certified MBE/WBE/LBE in a
timely manner, and fulfilling all contractual requirements.
8.8.1.2
Notifying both the certified MBE/WBE/LBE Sub-Contractor and the Economic Inclusion
Team of any problem in a timely manner.
8.8.1.3
Requesting assistance from Economic Inclusion Team in resolving any problems with the
certified MBE/WBE/LBE Sub-Contractor.
8.8.1.4
Making every reasonable effort to assist the certified MBE/WBE/LBE Sub- Contractor in the
performance of its work.
8.9
Non-Compliance Investigation
8.9.1
In cases where the Economic Inclusion Team has cause to believe that any Bidder or Contractor
has failed to comply with the provisions of this Plan, the Economic Inclusion Team shall be
empowered to conduct an investigation. The steps of the Non-Compliance Investigation will
include:
8.9.1.1
Interviewing the Bidder or Contractor to determine what steps were taken to achieve
inclusion.
8.9.1.2
Reviewing the Bidder or Contractor’s Best and Good Faith Efforts (B&GFE) documentation.
8.9.1.3
Contacting and/or Interviewing the Bidder’s or Contractor’s sub-contractors listed in the
B&GFE documentation.
8.9.1.4
Notifying the development entity (that is bidding the contract involved) of the findings.
8.10 Non-Compliance Finding
8.10.1 After reviewing the Bidder’s or Contractor’s efforts to obtain the needed Targeted Business
Enterprises, if these efforts are found to be non-compliant with this Plan, the Economic Inclusion
Team will notify the Owner and the Owner will provide notice to the Contractor of the noncompliance finding and give the Contractor an opportunity to either rectify the matter or give
further justification for the non-compliance. Should the Contractor not be able to rectify or give
ample justification, the Economic Inclusion Team is authorized to recommend sanctions for each
violation of these procedures. Such sanctions may include, but are not limited to:
8.10.1.1
Declaring the Contractor’s proposal as non-responsive and deeming the Contractor as
ineligible to receive the award of the contract or any other future contracts.
8.10.1.2
Suspending the violating Bidder or Contractor from doing business with EBDI (or any other
development entity operating within the EBDI project area) for a set period of time.
8.10.1.3
Terminating the contract with the Contractor, as permitted by its terms, and all future
payments under the Contract. Decisions will be made collectively by the Contract Manager,
Economic Inclusion Team, CFO, CEO and/or other development entity that is bidding or has
awarded the contract involved.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 55
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
8.10.1.4
Pursuing and securing any relief which EBDI and/or the Economic Inclusion Team may
deem to be necessary, proper, and in the best interest of EBDI.
8.11 Waiver of Inclusion Participation
8.11.1 Owner recognizes that in certain limited circumstances, compliance with this Plan will not be
feasible, nor in the best interest of the Project. The following contracts may be exempted by
Owner:
8.11.1.1
A contract where the total dollar amount of the contract is less than fifty thousand dollars
($50,000.00);
8.11.1.2
Any public exigency or emergency contract for which the nature of the emergency will not
allow for a delay in a competitive solicitation.
8.11.2 Contractor shall make every effort to assure that Targeted Business Enterprises areas are included
in the solicitation and award of all contracts.
8.12 Joint Venture Requirements
8.12.1 Joint ventures (which shall include functionally equivalent formalized written teaming
agreements) between majority-owned Prime Contractors and MBE/WBE firms are encouraged.
When evaluating bids or proposals from Contractors, preference shall be given to respondents
that utilize joint ventures with MBE’s, WBE’s and/or LBE’s as part of the satisfaction of the
specified M/W/LBE goals. The value of work assigned to qualified M/W/LBE contractors at the
prime level shall be credited to the calculation of Contractor’s satisfaction of specified M/W/LBE
goals. Contractors utilizing joint ventures are still responsible to fully satisfy economic inclusion
subcontracting goals specified herein for the aggregated scope of Contractor’s contract.
8.12.2 Bidders intending to Joint Venture shall submit the Joint Venture Questionnaire (See bid form)
with their bids/proposals. In addition to completing the form included in the bid form, the Bidder
shall discuss specific MBE/WBE/LBE firms that it plans to partner with. With its bid/offer, if
Offeror has elected to create a co-prime, partnership, joint-venture or other like arrangement with
an MBE/WBE/LBE firm, Offeror shall provide, with its bid, a copy of the legally binding
contract outlining the agreement between the Offeror and its MBE/WBE joint venture partner(s).
This contract shall be fully executed by the parties involved and shall set out the obligations of
each party, the decision-making power of each entity, their roles in the execution of the Project
work, their equity participation levels, their division of work, costs and profits/losses (the latter
three expressed in dollar amounts) and any other documentation deemed necessary to prove that
the joint venture agreement is substantial and meaningful.
8.12.3 Joint Venture partnership(s) must meet the following criteria.
8.12.3.1
The MBE/WBE/LBE partner must be certified (prior to proposal submission) by the
governmental entities specified herein;
8.12.3.2
The MBE/WBE/LBE partner must be substantially involved in significant phases of the
contract including, but not limited to, the performance of a portion of the onsite work
(including general conditions) with its own work force, and the administrative responsibilities
such as bidding, planning, staffing and daily management;
8.12.3.3
The business arrangements must be customary (i.e., each partner shares in the risk and profits
of the joint venture commensurate with their respective ownership interests); and
8.12.3.4
If the certified MBE/WBE partner(s) is/are self-performing a portion of the work, this may be
credited towards the achievement of the Contractor’s inclusion goals; however, the joint
venture will still be required to meet the overall subcontracting goals.
8.13 Workforce Related Roles and Responsibilities of Contractor
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 56
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
8.13.1 The following protocols shall be followed by Bidders and Contractors regarding Workforce
Inclusion.
8.13.1.1
Hiring Plan Submittal: Within 20 days following notice to proceed for the Work, Contractor
shall submit a detailed trade by trade hiring plan for Owner’s review and approval. Subject
plan shall (a) show hiring by trade classification and sub-classification (journeyman,
apprentice and new hire/apprentice), (b) distribute each trade sub-classification over the
Contract Time, (b) satisfy the minimum new and local hiring levels specified herein, and (c)
include all field labor in the Work, spanning Contractor’s self-performed work and that of all
subcontractors at all tiers. The Hiring Plan shall outline the positions to be filled by current
employees and those that will be filled by new hires (Note: For the purposes of this
Agreement, the term new hires is defined as an individual representing a discrete new fulltime hire by the Contractor, who (except for entities within the designated 11 ZIP codes) was
not previously employed by the Contractor, its subsidiary, a joint-venture involving the
Contractor, or an agent thereof; and/or did not transfer to the Project site from another project
under the employment of any said entities). Contractor shall make its best efforts to fulfill
Owner-requested enhancements to the hiring plan. Contractor shall fulfill the Ownerapproved hiring plan and shall provide monthly updates to validate progress against such
approved plan. Contractor shall timely submit any proposed deviations to the hiring plan to
the Owner for review and approval.
8.13.1.2
Contractor shall appoint a GC Inclusion Manager who shall act as Contractor’s point of
contact with owner and EBDI regarding the work in this Section. Among other powers, this
Inclusion Manager shall (a) have decision-making authority for hiring employees, (b) will
manage the processes under this Section, and (c) shall work closely with the Economic
Inclusion Team;
8.13.1.3
Contractor shall use EBDI’s Workforce Pipeline as the first source for recruiting and hiring
local residents for any new job opportunities and, to the extent practical without impacting
productivity, give EBDI five business days to identify and refer candidates for the job before
using other sources to recruit locally (Note: For the purposes of this Agreement, the term first
source relates solely to using EBDI’s Workforce Development Pipeline as the first means to
identify and recruit qualified local residents for job opportunities stemming from the EBDI
project, thereby maximizing the ability for EBDI project-based and other East Baltimore
residents to get priority status for Project employment opportunities.)
8.13.1.4
Contractor shall comply with the established Standard Operating Procedures (See Attachment
A to this section) as well as comply with the following requirements, which include, but are
not limited to:
8.13.1.4.1 Contractor shall submit all new job requirements and postings with relevant qualifications
and skills to the Economic Inclusion Team;
8.13.1.4.2 Contractor shall maintain records as necessary to prove that it followed the three-tier priority
system for local hiring;
8.13.1.4.3 Contractor shall notify the Economic Inclusion Team when timeliness of hiring workers is
important and work together with the Team to develop an agreed upon plan of action;
8.13.1.4.4 Contractor shall submit on-going reports on the outcome of all interviews for EBDI-referred
candidates and their hiring status;
8.13.1.4.5 Within 20 days following Contract award, Contractor shall provide a Detailed Manpower
Projection Plan per sample at the end of this Section. During the course of the project,
Contractor shall provide monthly plan updates and shall provide written notice to Owner of
any deviations to its manpower projection plans, for any reason; and
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 57
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
8.13.1.4.6 Contractor shall refer all residents, who walk up seeking employment with them directly, to
EBDI to get them engaged in the Workforce Development Pipeline, if they qualify;
8.13.1.4.7 To the extent that, despite Contractor’s satisfaction of the above requirements to use the
EBDI Workforce Development Pipeline as its first source to hire local residents, this process
did not avail any (or sufficient) qualified candidates, Contractor may fulfill its goals by using
non-EBDI sources (including walk-ons to the Project residing in the designated 11 ZIP codes)
to hire local, minority and women as defined by this Agreement, but Contractor shall obtain
Owner’s express written concurrence before doing so;
8.13.1.4.8 In all hiring activities, Contractor shall follow the three-level geographical priority system
specified herein; and
8.13.1.4.9 Contractor shall support a key objective of the Project, which is to provide employment
opportunities to the residents of East Baltimore and support them in competing successfully
for new jobs generated by the Project. Contractor agrees to implement its own job retention
efforts and shall also assist EBDI in outreach and coordination efforts to ensure East
Baltimore residents who are hired pursuant to this agreement, stay engaged with the Pipeline
to promote job retention, additional skills training, and employment upgrades. These efforts
may include, but are not limited to, training during employment to position candidate for
subsequent re-employment, additional post-employment training (including skilled
apprenticeship training), Job Fairs and attendance at coordination meetings.
Award of Subcontracts:
By executing the Contract, Owner accepts and approves of the subcontractors and associated assignment of
scopes and subcontract values identified in Contractor’s proposal, as modified by discussions and
negotiations preceding execution of the Contract. The provisions under this heading set out requirements for
awards of subcontracts after execution of the Contract, as necessary to fulfill the requirements of the
Contract Specification Section pertaining to Inclusion. Offerors shall be guided by the below reporting
structures and content in the presentation of the Inclusion aspect of their proposals.
Subsequent to execution of the Contract, Contractor may not make any subcontractor award (for first-tier
and second-tier subcontracts $50,000 or over), or attempt to self-perform any work element potentially
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 58
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
allocable to a subcontractor, without demonstrating to Owner’s satisfaction that Contractor has made its
best effort, in accordance with the requirements and priorities set out in the Division 1 Inclusion
Specification Section, to make awards in accordance with said Section.
A subcontractor includes trade contractors and specialty contractors, and (in support of L/M/WBE
inclusion) also includes suppliers who provide only materials, equipment, or supplies directly to the
Contractor.
In addition to fulfilling LBE/MBE/WBE contracting commitments, with regard to awards made to
Contractor-named LBE/MBE/WBE co-primes and subcontractors, Contractor shall calculate, maintain and
monthly report upon the resulting percentage calculations of LBE/MBE/WBE inclusion.
The content of said reports form shall also be updated by Contractor at the completion of the Work at
Contract Close-out, reflecting Contractor’s final performance against the requirements of the Inclusion
Specification Section.
Said reports shall contain all subcontract awards in their listing and calculations, including those identified
in Contractor’s approved bid proposal.
Said Contractor reports may be submitted in hand-written form or may be submitted in spreadsheet form,
provided Contractor includes the following minimum content:
M/WBE Award Analysis:
Scope Awarded
Value of
Award
Sub Name, City, Ph. No.
(and MBE No., if applic.)
Pct of
Total
Contract
Status
(Mark: L/M,
L/W, M nonL, W non-L,
L non-M/W,
or nonL/non-M/W)
$
…..Full listing of M/WBE subcontractors….
Self-performed work,
excluding bid options.
NA
$
NA
Work not listed above,
excluding bid options.
NA
$
NA
Bid Option self-performed
work.
NA
$
NA
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 59
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
Scope Awarded
Value of
Award
Sub Name, City, Ph. No.
(and MBE No., if applic.)
Bid Option work
not listed above.
NA
$
NA
$
Pct of
Total
Contract
Status
(Mark: L/M,
L/W, M nonL, W non-L,
L non-M/W,
or nonL/non-M/W)
NA
Total Contract:
(Includes all bid options)
100%
NA
Breakout of Local and Non-Local Awards:
Types of Enterprises
Dollar Value of
Awards
Minority business enterprises (MBE) – LBE – Located in 85
acres defined in inclusion specification
$
Minority business enterprises (MBE) – LBE – Located in
eleven ZIP codes, but excluding above 85 acres.
$
Minority business enterprises (MBE) – LBE – Baltimore
City, excluding above eleven ZIP codes.
$
Woman-owned business enterprises (WBE) – LBE – Located
in 85 acres defined in inclusion specification
$
Woman-owned business enterprises (WBE) – LBE – Located
in eleven ZIP codes, but excluding above 85 acres.
$
Woman-owned business enterprises (WBE) – LBE –
Baltimore City, excluding above eleven ZIP codes.
$
Non M/W local (LBE) business enterprises – Located in 85
acres defined in inclusion specification
$
Non M/W local (LBE) business enterprises – Located in
eleven ZIP codes, but excluding above 85 acres.
$
Non M/W local (LBE) business enterprises – Baltimore
City, excluding above eleven ZIP codes.
$
Pct of
“Total Bid”
Total Local: $
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 60
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
Breakout of Non-Local M/WBE Awards:
Types of Enterprises
Dollar Value of Awards
Non-LBE Minority business enterprises (MBE)
$
Non-LBE Woman-owned business enterprises (WBE)
$
Total Non-Local:
Pct of
“Total Bid”
$
In the event any top-tier LBE/MBE/WBE sub-offeror proposes to self-perform less than 75% of the
labor scope of work in its subcontract, for each such proposed subcontractor, Contractor shall (a)
identify the subcontractor and its scope, (b) provide a written explanation of the reasoning for a lower
self-performance level, and (c) provide an alternate proposed minimum self-performance level that, if
approved by Owner, Contractor shall be obligated to fulfill.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 61
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
OFFEROR’S MANPOWER PROJECTION PLAN
The below manpower projection plan shall be monthly updated and submitted to Owner. The initial
iteration of the below plan shall be the version approved by Owner as of award and execution of the
Contract. The following shall be used by Owner for calculating Contractor’s satisfaction of the overall
minority/female/locally-based employment goals defined in the Division 1 Inclusion Specification
Section. This information shall be provided for the entire scope of work to be performed for the project.
Name of Contractor:
Name of Project:
Projected Number of Manhours for Project:
Projected Number of “local” employment manhours (23% of above, including 12% for East
Baltimore workers):________________________________________________________________
Projected Number of Minority Male Trades Workers:
Projected Number of Female Trades Workers:
Projected Number of Local Resident Trades Workers:
Projected Number of New Hires for Entire Project:
In addition to the foregoing manpower projection, Contractor shall monthly provide a “Detailed
Manpower Projection Plan” per sample in Division 1 Section on L/M/WBE Inclusion requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 62
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
ATTACHMENT A:
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES FOR EFFECTIVE COMPLIANCE
In an effort to facilitate communications between the Project Team (Developer and/or Sub-Developer,
and Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor) and the Economic Inclusion Team, the following Standard
Operating Procedures for Effective Compliance (SOP) have been established. Contractor shall comply
with and support these procedural requirements. These procedures outline the meetings and information
needed to report the inclusion activities as required by the Agreement for Minority Inclusion and the
EBDI Economic Opportunity Plan and Procurement Policy. Adherence to these Standard Operating
Procedures will allow the EBDI Inclusion Team to monitor the good faith efforts of the Project Team and
report the East Baltimore Project’s Economic Inclusion activities to the project’s stakeholders on a
monthly basis.
1) Contractor shall submit to the Economic Inclusion Team, via mail, email or fax, at least one week
prior to distribution, a copy of all bid packages (i.e., RFP/RFQ), which include the appropriate
inclusion language, due dates, and the anticipated list of firms that are proposed to receive the
solicitation. The Economic Inclusion team will review and may provide feedback as well as a list of
additional certified M/W/LBE firms which can be included in the bid solicitations.
2) Contractor shall inform the Economic Inclusion Team via mail, email or fax of all bid addenda and or
revisions.
3) Before awards of subcontracts may be confirmed, Contractor shall set up a meeting between the
Inclusion Team and prospective first and second tier subcontractors(s) to discuss Contractor’s
proposed approach to satisfying the specified inclusion goals. The EBDI Inclusion Team will verify
the certification status of the firms that the Contractor proposes to use to achieve the specified
inclusion goals.
4) Contractor shall provide to the Economic Inclusion Team on a rolling basis, within fifteen days of
execution: One copy of all signed subcontracts, including installation-type contracts for all
MBE/WBE/LBE and non-MBE/WBE/LBE firms. If the Contractor is an MBE/WBE/LBE firm, and
subcontracts to a non-MBE/WBE/LBE firm, the contract amount of the non-MBE/WBE/LBE firm
will not be counted toward Contractor’s satisfaction of the specified inclusion requirements.
However, if said MBE/WBE/LBE Contractor uses a non-MBE/WBE/LBE supplier, the supplier’s
contract amount will not be deducted from the Contractor’s contract dollar amount; and Contractor
shall provide two copies to the Economic Inclusion Team of all signed Purchase Orders with
MBE/WBE/LBE suppliers, fabricators and contractors for calculation of Contractor’s satisfaction of
the specified economic inclusion goals.
5) On a monthly basis, or together with the submission of invoices for payment, Contractor shall provide
reports and/or documentation related to all contract changes, revisions, and payments to date, along
with signed lien waivers and/or relevant affidavits or cancelled checks documenting payment to all
firms.
6) To help fulfill workforce inclusion goals, and in coordination with the Section pertaining to prevailing
wages, Contractor shall furnish to Owner by the 5th of each month during the contract term, certified
payroll records for all employees working on the project site. These certified payrolls and the contents
shall be submitted and stored in a controlled and confidential manner. The Certified Payroll
documentation shall include the following:
Name of Contractor and Indication of whether Contractor is the Prime or Subcontractor; Name of
Project; Full name of Employee, Employee Social Security number; Complete Address of Employee
(including city, state and zip code); Employee’s Trade classification (e.g., laborer, carpenter,
apprentice, electrician, plumber, and foreman); Employee’s Gender and Race; Number of hours
worked by Employee; Employee’s Employment Status (Full-time or Part-time, Temporary or
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 63
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
Permanent); All Employee withholding deductions (e.g., laborer, local, state, FICA, etc.), Employee’s
Rate of pay, Gross pay, and Net pay.
END OF SECTION 013501
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013501 ‐ 64
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
LBE/MBE/WBE INCL. AND WORKFORCE DEVEL. REQ.
SECTION 013513 - PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION - GENERAL
A. Work included:
1. Coordinate with other on-site operations:
a. Coordinate site use with the on-going Owner site operations to ensure no disruption of Owner
campus activities. Prior to the commencement of Work, the Contractor shall attend a meeting
with the Owner and other Owner representatives to coordinate Contractor's Work with Owner
operations, including timing of Work, control of Contractor vehicles, noise and vibration
control, security requirements, temporary utility requirements, emergency and safety
procedures, dust control, and location of erosion control structures. Contractor shall perform
the Work in accordance with direction received by the Owner at subject meeting, as indicated
in Owner-issued minutes of meeting.
2. Cleanup and dust control:
a. Provide clean-up and dust control. Use water to protect all on-site and potentially affected
off-site operations from construction dust generated from performing the Work and from use
of on and off-site roads. The Contractor shall ensure protection from dust and worker trespass
of Owner campus areas outside of the Work area and all neighboring properties during
construction.
b. Continuously clean on-site roads and affected off-site roads. The Contractor's use of roads in
the vicinity of the Project shall not adversely impact on or off-site operations and facilities.
Wet all loads of soils imported to or exported from the Work area at the source and cover
with a tarpaulin to minimize the amount of dust coming off the load as it travels to the
unloading location.
c. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and material required and shall carry out
effective measures wherever and as often as necessary to prevent its operation from
producing dust in amounts damaging to property, vegetation, or causing a nuisance to persons
or property in the vicinity of the Work. The Contractor shall be accountable for any and all
damage resulting from any dust originating from its operations. Continue dust control
measures until Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work.
3. Existing structures and devices on Project site:
a. The approximate location of existing on-site structures and devices within the vicinity of the
Work are Indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall establish their exact location and
shall protect the existing on-site structures and devices during construction.
4. Erosion control:
a. Provide temporary erosion control structures within the limits of work Indicated. Erosion
control measures shall be maintained by Contractor throughout the duration of the Work.
b. Place sandbags or other approved means as required to eliminate storm water runoff damage
to slopes, ditches, pads or any other grading improvements within the boundary of clearing
and grubbing. The sandbags shall remain in place or be relocated as construction progresses.
c. Contractor's erosion control shall ensure that all runoff water drains away from the Project
but does not flood adjacent property. In the event that the circumstances during construction
change the erosion control design, a revised water control plan shall be promptly submitted
by Contractor to the Owner. Implement Owner-approved plan.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013513 ‐ 65
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT PROCEDURES
5. Scrap building materials disposal:
a. In order to reduce disposal volumes of clean scrap wood-based building materials taken to
landfill dump, segregate such materials and dispose of the materials using one or a
combination of
(1) arrange for recycle of materials or;
(2) sell to companies that purchase wood for disposal in biomass-to-energy facilities.
b. Store recyclable waste in separate clearly marked containers. Arrange and pay for collection
by a licensed recycling contractor. Recyclable items include wood, glass, aluminum, steel,
gypsum, paper, cardboard and plastics.
c. Segregate remaining construction debris (that Contractor cannot feasibly recycle or reuse in
some way) and Contractor shall give such materials, if feasible, to companies which recycle
inert materials.
6. Owner-furnished forms:
a. Use forms provided by the Owner for communications and recording functions such as
Request for Information, Contractor's Daily Report and Submittal Transmittal Form. Owner
will provide Contractor with these forms to be copied and used by the Contractor. Contractor
shall follow Owner prescribed procedure for use of such forms, including indication of labor
codes on Contractor's Daily Reports which coordinate with codes used in Contract Schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 013513
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013513 ‐ 66
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT PROCEDURES
SECTION 013526 - HEALTH AND SAFETY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
a. Refer to references to health and safety standards published in 41 CFR Part 50-204 which
require Contractor compliance with standards such as, but not limited to, the U.S. Department
of Labor 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926 OSHA General Industry Standards and Regulations,
and applicable local codes and consensus standards.
2.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
a.
Compliance with Regulations: Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations, the
most stringent shall apply. Contamination or pollution of any natural (air, land, water) or
cultural (historical and archaeological sites) resources is prohibited. Disposal of surplus or
excess materials shall comply with Federal, State and local regulations and guidelines.
b.
Warnings: Warning signs shall be continuously and conspicuously placed to provide adequate
warning of construction hazards to workers and the public.
c.
Training: The Contractor shall provide documentation to the Owner that its employees have
received the necessary training such as, but not limited to, OSHA required safety and health
training, medical surveillance programs, personal protective and safety equipment, individual
health protection measures, and manufacturer's product and material safety data sheets (MSDS)
required for the work described by the Contract Documents. The training shall include, but not
be limited to the following elements:
d.
The nature of the environment of the work area and adjacent areas.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Location of first aid stations.
Location of telephones and emergency numbers.
Program personnel and the area's protocol.
Procedure to report unsafe conditions.
Requirements to maintain clean and safe work area.
Allowable work conditions and schedule.
Observation of Owner physical security policies and procedures.

In accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.147 (Control of Hazardous Energy/Lockout
& Tagout), Owner and the Contractor will inform each other of respective lockout or
tagout procedures.
e.
The Contractor shall ensure compliance with 29 CFR 1926.21(b)(6)(i)-(ii) Safety Training and
Education for employees entering confined spaces; 29 CFR 1926.35 Employee Emergency
Action Plans; and 29 CFR 1926 SubPart V, Power Transmission and Distribution, which
outlines the standards for construction of electric transmission and distribution lines and
equipment. Particular attention shall be paid to 29 CFR 1926.956 Underground Lines, which
includes the requirements for confined space entry.
f.
Comprehensive Plan: The Contractor shall provide to the Owner a written comprehensive
health and safety plan for the specific work under this contract. This plan shall include site
specific measures for occupational safety and health for all Contractor employees. The plan
shall cover all aspects of on-site construction operations and activities associated with work of
this contract. The plan shall comply with all applicable environmental, health and safety
regulations and any project specific requirements specified by the Owner. This plan shall be
provided to the Owner within 10 days of the Notice to Proceed.
g.
Meetings: The Contractor shall hold weekly safety meetings with all employees. These
meetings shall include environmental, safety and health issues related to the Work. Written
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013526 ‐ 67
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
HEALTH AND SAFETY
reports shall be provided to the Owner on the contents of each meeting, the attendees and a
report of any safety inspections made that week by the Contractor.
h.
Fire Prevention and Protection: The Contractor shall execute the fire prevention and protection
plan submitted as part of the Comprehensive Plan. The following are elements of the plan,
although the plan shall not be limited to the following:
1.
Housekeeping. Good housekeeping, with provision for prompt removal and disposal of
accumulations of combustible scrap and debris, shall be maintained in all areas of the
jobsite. Approved self-closing metal containers shall be used for disposal of waste
saturated with combustible and flammable liquids.
2.
Codes and Regulations. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements published in
the current revisions of the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, and
the National Fire Protection Association standards.
3.
Fires. Fires and open flame devices shall not be left unattended unless protected with
automatic temperature control and shutoff devices.
4.
Cleaning and Degreasing. Gasoline and liquids with a flash point below 38 degrees C
shall not be used for cleaning and degreasing.
5.
Fire Extinguisher. Distinctly marked fire extinguisher rated a:b:c or greater shall be
suitably placed at locations and intervals as required by codes governing this work.
i.
Hazardous Substances: Prior to bringing hazardous substances, as defined in 29 CFR
1910.1200, onto the project site, all Contractor employees involved shall be advised of material
safety data sheet (MSDS) information and a copy of each hazardous substance's MSDS shall be
provided to the Owner, prior to delivery of hazardous substance.
j.
Permit Related Confined Spaces: All electrical manholes and transformer vaults, including
tunnels are classified as confined spaces requiring permits for entry. The Contractor shall fully
understand and comply with all Owner regulations with regard to Permit Related Confined
Spaces.
k.
Emergency Numbers: Emergency telephone numbers and reporting instructions for ambulance,
physician, hospital, fire, and police shall be conspicuously posted at the project site by the
Contractor.
l.
Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and liability for
compliance with all applicable regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel
during the execution of work, and shall hold the Government harmless for any action or lack of
action by the Contractor or by any of the Contractor's employees or subcontractors, which
results in illness, injury or death.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.
PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT: Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor is responsible for
providing all necessary safety and personal protective equipment needed by its employees. This
equipment shall meet appropriate OSHA, NIOSH and ANSI approval requirements and shall be in
good working order.
a. The Contractor shall confirm in writing, prior to commencement of the work, that its employees
have received appropriate training on the use and maintenance of safety and personal protective
equipment prior to its use. Failure to correctly use appropriate safety equipment is a violation
of the contract and may result in default of the contract.
2.
PROTECTION
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013526 ‐ 68
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
HEALTH AND SAFETY
a.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building
occupants, or damage to property of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or
building occupants shall include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a subcontractor
of this project.
b.
No corridor, aisle, stairway, door, or exit shall be obstructed or used in such a manner as to
encroach upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by the public or building occupants, or to
present unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or building occupants.

c.
Contractor ladders or other similar equipment necessary to perform the work shall
not be left unattended at the work site.
Powder actuated devices shall not be used in occupied buildings without prior written approval
from the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
1.
EXAMINATION
a. Contractor shall examine work space prior to commencement of Work. Report any condition
that may potentially affect proper execution of Work to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 013526
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013526 ‐ 69
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013526 ‐ 70
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
HEALTH AND SAFETY
SECTION 013553 - SECURITY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Security program.
B. Entry control.
C. Personnel identification.
D. Guard service.
E. Miscellaneous restrictions.
1.02 SECURITY PROGRAM
A. Protect Work from theft, vandalism and unauthorized entry.
B. Initiate program at job mobilization.
C. Maintain program throughout construction period until Owner occupancy.
1.03 ENTRY CONTROL
A. Restrict entrance of persons and vehicles into Project site.
B. Allow entrance only to authorized persons with proper identification.
C. Maintain log of workers and visitors, make available to Owner on request.
D. Coordinate access of Owner's personnel to site in coordination with Owner's security forces.
1.04 PERSONNEL IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification card to each person authorized to enter premises, showing: Personal
photograph, name and employer.
B. Maintain a list of accredited persons. Submit copy to Owner on request.
1.05 SECURITY SERVICE
A. Owner shall not provide any security services on the Project site.
B. At Contractor’s discretion, employ uniformed patrol service to provide surveillance of site at
appropriate times, including during all non-working hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used.)
PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used.)
END OF SECTION 013553
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013553 ‐ 71
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SECURITY
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
013553 ‐ 72
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SECURITY
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specification language.
B. Definitions, other than those in the General Conditions.
C. Industry Standards.
D. Schedule of References.
1.02 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE
A. Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents may be abbreviated,
streamlined, and in the imperative mood. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as
appropriate to the context of Contract Documents. Words that are implied, but not stated, shall
be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural, and plural
words interpreted as singular, where applicable as the context of Contract Documents indicates.
B. At certain locations in the text, more specific language is used for clarity to describe
responsibilities of various parties.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
“Accessible”: Work for which access method is provided.
B.
“A/E”: Architect/Engineer.
C.
“Addendum”: A revision or clarification to Forms, Conditions, Specifications and Drawings,
made prior to execution of Contract. This term is used only when the “ISSUE METHOD” of
tracking the release of documents is not used.
D.
“Application of This Section”: A phrase to alert the reader that contents Section is applicable
to other Sections.
E.
“Approved”, “Acceptable”, “Sufficient”, “Necessary”, “Proper” or similar expressions:
Means approved, acceptable, sufficient, necessary or proper, in the judgment of A/E or O/R.
F.
“Any”: Means whenever more than one item would be applicable or required to complete
work in accordance with Contract Documents.
G.
“As Directed”: Means as directed by A/E or O/R. This term is not applicable to methods and
means of construction.
H.
“As Indicated”, “As Shown”, “As Specified”: Means as indicated, shown or specified in
Contract Documents.
I.
“As Reviewed”, “Subject to Review” or similar expressions: Means as reviewed by A/E.
J.
“As Selected” or similar expressions: Means as selected by the A/E.
K.
“Bulletin”: A request for a Change Order Proposal after execution of Contract. Bulletins are
not instructions to execute proposed changes, nor to stop work in progress. If Change Order
Proposal is acceptable to Owner, a Change Order will be issued under terms of the General
Conditions. This term is used only when the “ISSUE METHOD” of tracking the release of
documents is not used.
L.
“Concealed”: Not exposed to view in finished work.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014200 ‐ 73
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINTIONS
M.
“Contract Limit Lines”: Lines, if shown on Drawings, surrounding the work, beyond which
no work is required unless shown or specified otherwise. Coordinate conditions outside of
contract limit lines with work shown in Contract Documents.
N.
“C/M”: Construction Manager.
O.
“Coordination” or “Cooperation”: Notwithstanding other definitions or usage in the Contract
Documents, coordination or cooperation means active participation with other parties to
ensure proper fit and function of the work, including but not limited to providing information
needed by others; modifying own work; modifying service connections; working out of
sequence.
P.
“Exposed”: Exposed to view in finished Work.
Q.
“Exterior”: Exposed to building exterior atmosphere.
R.
“Furnish”: Supply and deliver to Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation and similar operations, but not install the work. Installation may be:
1. Not included in the Contract, or;
2. Specified elsewhere under Part 3 of the Section.
S.
“Finished Space”: Corridors, rooms, closets, stairways, and other spaces not defined as
unfinished spaces.
T.
“Furnish and Install”, “Include” and similar expressions: Means to “Provide”.
U.
“GC”: General Contractor
V.
“Indicated”: Refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules in the Contract
Documents. Terms such “as shown”, “as noted”, “as scheduled” and “as specified” are used
to assist in locating the reference. There is no limitation on location.
W.
"Inspection": Wherever the word “inspection” occurs relating to the Architect's (also referred
to as A/E) performance or relating to such action being performed by and/or including the
Architect, the Architect will not participate in inspections but will make on-site observations
and evaluations as customarily performed by an Architect.
X.
“Install”: Unloading, unpacking, assembly, erecting, applying, placing, working to
dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, but not furnishing
the work. Furnishing may:
1. Not be included in the Contract, or;
2. Specified elsewhere under Part 2 of the Section.
Y.
“Installer”: Contractor or an entity engaged by Contractor either as an employee,
subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity,
including design, fabrication, installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
Installers are required to be experienced in the work required.
1. “Experienced”: Means having a minimum of three previous projects similar in size and
scope to the Project, being familiar with special requirements indicated, and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. “Trades”: Using terms such as “carpentry” is not intended to imply that certain
construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a
corresponding generic name, such as “carpenter”. It also does not imply that
requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic
name. “Trades” also means workers having special skills, or firms that hire them, as
applicable.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014200 ‐ 74
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINTIONS
3. “Assigning Specialists”: Certain Sections require that specific construction activities be
performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists
must be engaged for those activities. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict
with enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing work. It is also not
intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar
conventions.
Z.
“Issue Method”: A system of recording and tracking drawings and specifications as they are
released for bidding and construction. Documents are issued in a sequential manner as the
Project reaches pre-determined stages. The issues may coincide with bidding schedules, but
not necessarily so, especially when re-issuing is required due to revisions or up-dates in
design.
AA. “NIC”: Not in Contract.
BB. “O/R”: Owner’s Representative.
CC. “Or Equal”, “Similar To”, or similar expressions:
“similarity” rests with A/E and Owner.
Means judgment of “equality” or
DD. “Provide”: Furnish and install work under provisions set forth in the Conditions of the
Contract. Where neither “furnish”, “install”, nor “provide” is stated, the term “provide” is
intended.
EE. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, that control performance of work.
FF.
“Related Sections”: A phrase to assist in finding provisions on other work which is directly
related to subject Section.”
GG. “Replace”, “Restore”, “Renew”, “Reconstruct” and similar expressions: Means to “Provide”,
using materials, applicable to work involved.
HH. “Section Includes”: A phrase to briefly describe contents of the Section. The phrase does not
scope work or show all items, nor does it imply trade responsibility. Its’ purpose is to quickly
assess the reader as to Section content.
II.
“Special Warranty”: A warranty, in excess of that required by the General Conditions, either
by length of time or for other conditions. Special Warranties are described in individual
Specification Sections.
JJ.
“Submit”, “Submit for Review”, or similar expressions: Means party making submittal is
Contractor and party receiving submittal is the A/E and Owner.
KK.
“Work”: The term “work”, whether capitalized or not, means the same as defined in the
General Conditions.
1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards,
follow requirements of the specified standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by code.
B.
Date of standard is that in effect as of Bid date, or date of Construction Contract Agreement
when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified.
C.
Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy at Project
Site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Acceptance.
D.
If specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
A/E before proceeding.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014200 ‐ 75
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINTIONS
E.
Contractual relationship of parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract
Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.05 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES
A.
General: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized industry name of the standards and regulations that
Contractor shall comply with.
END OF SECTION 014200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014200 ‐ 76
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINTIONS
SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
SUMMARY
1. Contractor shall provide and pay for services of independent Testing and Inspection Agency(ies).
Subject Agencies shall perform testing and inspection of construction materials and procedures for
conformity with the Contract Documents for the following, to the extent they are applicable to
Project:
(a) Earthwork, including inspection of subgrades by geotechnical engineer.
(b) Concrete work.
(c) Structural and miscellaneous steel
(d) Baseplate grout
(e) Unit masonry
(f) Precast panel systems
(g) Code - required special inspections
(h) Other work specified herein.
2. Contractor shall pay for retesting required due to failed tests.
3. Coordinate the work under this Section with pertinent requirements under Specifications.
4. Provide access to the Work for Testing and Inspection Agencies employed by Owner by ceasing work
in areas where tests and inspections are required, providing samples for testing, providing means of
protecting and transporting samples on the Project site and furnishing safety equipment and ladders,
scaffolding and lighting.
5. Wherever required by the Contract Documents and as directed by the Owner, submit documents
prepared by Contractor under this Section to Owner for approval.
6. Allow and assist Owner and its Testing and Inspection Agencies to continuously inspect the Work,
including any and all items of material and equipment, at all stages of the development and
fabrication, both on and off the Project site.
SUBMITTALS
1. Testing and Inspection Agency shall submit Certified written report of each test, inspection or similar
service to Contractor (one copy) and the Owner.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each test inspection or similar service shall include:
(a) Date of issue
(b) Project title and number
(c) Name, address and telephone number of Testing and Inspection Agency
(d) Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections
(e) Names of individuals making inspection or test
(f) Designation of the work and test method
(g) Identification of product and Specification Section
(h) Complete inspection or test data
(i)
Test results and an interpretations of test results
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 77
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
(j)
Ambient conditions at time of sample-taking and testing
(k) Professional recommendation as to whether inspected or tested work complies with Contract
Document requirements
(l)
Name and signature of laboratory inspector
(m) Recommendations on retesting
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Testing and Inspection Agency will satisfy the following requirements:
(a) Testing and inspection agency shall be authorized by the State of Maryland, and shall employ a
full time registered Professional Engineer, licensed in that State, to review services.
(b) Certifications are to be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of
Maryland and knowledgeable in the engineering discipline associated with the inspection, test
and other service or work for which the certification pertains.
(c) Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to
either National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST) Standards or accepted values of
natural physical constants.
(d) Comply with the following standards, as applicable to the activity involved, in addition to
standards specified in other Sections:
(i)
ASTM C802 - Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Test Program to Determine the
Precision of Test Methods for Construction Materials.
(ii)
ASTM C1021 - Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants.
(iii) ASTM C1077 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
(iv) ASTM D3740 - Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing
and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
(v)
ASTM D4561 - Practice for Quality Control Systems for Inspection and Testing Agency
for Bituminous Paving Materials.
(vi) ASTM E329 - Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of
Materials Used in Construction.
(vii) ASTM E543 - Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.
(viii) ASTM E2174 – Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops.
(ix) Meet requirements of American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended
Requirements of Independent Laboratory Qualification", latest edition and satisfying the
inspection criteria of Materials Reference Laboratory of National Institute of Standards
and Technology.
(x)
When performing work in connection with concrete, steel, and bituminous materials,
comply with ASTM E329 and ASTM D3666.
(xi) When engaged in the testing and inspection of soils and rock or performing nondestructive testing, comply with ASTM D3740 and ASTM E543, respectively.
(xii) Testing laboratories testing and inspecting masonry shall meet requirements of ASTMC1093.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 78
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
(xiii) Testing laboratories performing work not in connection with concrete, steel, bituminous
materials, soils and non-destructive testing shall comply with ASTM E548.
(e) Concrete testing and inspection personnel shall be ACI-certified as Concrete Field Testing
Technician - Grade 1.
TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY RESPONSIBILITIES
1. Testing and Inspection Agency shall cooperate with the Owner and the Contractor in performance of
its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests.
2. Testing and Inspection Agency shall notify the Owner and the Contractor promptly of irregularities or
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Testing and Inspection Agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of
the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
4. Testing and Inspection Agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
1. The Contractor shall plan and coordinate with agencies performing tests, inspections and similar
services and provide auxiliary services as requested. Notify Testing and Inspection Agency
sufficiently in advance (minimum two working days) of operations to permit assignment of testing
personnel. Provide auxiliary services including:
(a)
Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to
facilitate tests and inspections.
(b)
Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and submit
to Testing and Inspection Agency or assist Testing and Inspection Agency in taking samples.
(c)
Providing Testing and Inspection Agency with preliminary design mix proposed for use for
materials mixes that require control by Testing and Inspection Agency.
(d)
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site.
(e)
Furnish Testing and Inspection Agency with mill tests showing heat number and corresponding
mill certificates for reinforcing steel and structural steel.
(f)
Furnish Testing and Inspection Agency with cement mill test reports.
(g)
Remove and replace work which is rejected as result of tests performed that indicate failure to
conform to requirements of Contract Documents.
COORDINATION
1. The Contractor shall coordinate sequence of construction operations with Testing and Inspection
Agency to accommodate required testing and inspection services with no effect on the Contract Time.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
EARTHWORK
1. Owner shall employ and pay for professional geotechnical engineer licensed in the State of Maryland
and Testing and Inspection Agency to perform for the following, and Contractor shall comply with
their recommendations:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 79
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
a. Obtain samples of soil proposed for use as fill and perform the following tests:
i. Test for suitability including gradation. Advise the Owner and the Contractor
whether soil is suitable for proposed use.
ii. If soil is found to be suitable, establish optimum moisture/density relationship in
accordance with ASTM D1557. Use results to control fill placement and
compaction operations.
b. Inspect subgrade preparation and proofrolling operations. Review and recommend
proofrolling equipment. Determine soft areas and advise Contractor to undercut and
replace with structural fill.
c. Inspect footing subgrades prior to placement of concrete and verify that allowable soil
bearing capacity meets that required or recommended by Owner-furnished geotechnical
report. Advise Owner and the Contractor when footing bottoms need to be reworked or
lowered to meet specified bearing capacity.
d. Inspect fill, backfill and compaction operations. Perform field density tests according to
ASTM D1556 or D2922 on each lift of compacted fill at locations adequate to evaluate
degree of compaction but not less than 1 test per 900 square feet of building and
pavement area with a maximum spacing of 30 feet between test locations and minimum
of 1 test per lift.
e. Notify the Contractor and Owner immediately of test results. When test results fall
below specified density, advise the Contractor to rework area and retest until specified
density is obtained.
CONCRETE:
1. Testing and Inspection Agency will perform and report to Owner on the following:
1.
Concrete Quality Control:
a. Inspect concrete placement, vibration and curing.
b. Slump, cylinder and other tests as specified below. Perform tests more frequently than
specified as necessary to control quality.
c. Obtain samples of aggregates that the Contractor proposes to use and test for compliance
with the Specifications.
d. Review the Contractor's proposed mix designs. Submit to Contractor and to Owner for
review and approval.
e. Attend Preconstruction Conference as described in SECTION - CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
f.
Inspect and test concrete materials during the Work for compliance with the Specifications
and approved mix designs.
g. Review consistency of the mix design for each concrete placement.
2. Concrete Tests
a. Sample concrete in accordance with ASTM C172 at the rate of 1 sample per 50 cubic
yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed each day. Record placement location of each
sample.
b.
Test each sample as follows:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 80
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
Slump test in accordance with ASTM C143
For air-entrained mixes, air content test in accordance with ASTM C173
For lightweight concrete, unit weight test in accordance with ASTM C13.
Measure concrete temperature
Submit test results on a weekly basis
c.
From each sample, make and cure 6 test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C31.
Compression test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39 as follows:
1) Test 2 cylinders at 7 days.
2) Test 2 cylinders at 28 days.
3) Hold 2 cylinders in reserve in the event additional testing is determined necessary by
the Owner.
d.
Prepare and maintain a continuous up-to-date log of concrete strength test results in both
graphical and tabulated form for each type of concrete used. A strength test shall be the
average strength of two cylinders made from same sample of concrete and tested at 28
days. Submit updated copy of log to the Owner on a weekly basis. Each submittal shall
state current average strength and standard deviation.
e.
Cement Mill Test Reports
(1) Obtain mill test reports from the Contractor for cement used in each concrete
placement sampled.
(2) Review cement mill test reports and attach them to sample test result submittals.
Submit to Owner for record.
(i) Not order concrete until Contractor has given Owner an opportunity to review the
proposed concrete placement area. Provide Owner a minimum of 2 hours review
time, and allow Contractor deficiency correction time before any concrete is
delivered to site. Contractor shall make its best effort to complete the foregoing
activities the day before each concrete placement. Owner is entitled to prevent
Contractor from placing any concrete until Owner is satisfied that all deficiencies
are corrected. Contractor’s failure to follow these time and procedure requirements
may result in Owner rejecting loads of concrete delivered to site and Contractor
paying therefor.
3. Concrete Batch Plant Inspection by Testing Agency
a.
Provide qualified inspector and apparatus to inspect weighing and batching of concrete at
batch plant. Inspect batch plant on first day that each different mix is used on the Project
and at least once more on a random basis.
b.
Check whether materials being used are in accordance with approved mix designs.
c.
Measure moisture content of aggregate stockpiles and check whether batch weights are
being adjusted to compensate for variations in moisture content.
d.
Submit promptly to Owner certification of weights used in loads of accepted concrete
batched during plant inspection.
4. Additional Tests:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 81
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
a. Testing and Inspection Agency shall make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been
attained in structure, as directed by the Owner. Agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, or by other
methods as directed. The Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other
additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is discovered.
BASEPLATE GROUT
To the extent applicable to Project, Testing and Inspection Agency will perform the following:
1.
Inspect installation of baseplate grout.
2.
For every five baseplates grouted, grout strength shall be tested with set of cubes as follows:
a. Set of cubes shall consist of three cubes to be tested at seven days and three cubes to be
tested at 28 days. Test cubes shall be made and tested in accordance with ASTM C109
with exception that grout should be restrained from expansion by top plate.
SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
The following Sections provide guidance regarding the minimum quantity of testing and inspection
under this Section. In the event the detailed technical specifications or other Contract requirements
require more testing and inspection or more stringent testing and inspection, Contractor shall submit
its work to such tests and inspection.
1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete.
3. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing.
4. Section 05 54 00 – Cold Formed Metal Framing.
5. Section 05 73 13 – Glazed Decorative Metal Railings.
6. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants
7. Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductor and Cables.
8. Section 26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems.
9. Section 26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices.
10. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving.
11. Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving.
12. Section 32 13 16 – Decorative Concrete Paving.
13. Section 32 84 00 – Planting Irrigation.
14. Section 32 91 15 – Soil Preparation.
15. Section 33 05 10 – Utility Structures.
END OF SECTION 014500
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
014500 ‐ 82
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 015200 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, TEMPORARY CONTROLS AND UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION
A. Provide all heating during construction period as required to perform Work and in accordance
with good practice and/or manufacturer’s recommendations/requirements.
B. Pay for all energy used for temporary heat.
C. Extend warranty or guarantee period on permanent systems used during construction period to
commence on date of Final Completion and Acceptance.
D. Use heating devices complying with codes and ordinances. Configuration of combustion-based
heating systems and devices require Owner approval. Obtain permit from Owner before
installation.
1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, TELEPHONES AND DATA SERVICES
A. Make arrangements for and Install all equipment, poles, meter, wiring, switches, outlets, etc., 3
phase power and necessary step down transformers for power for all lighting and power
requirements for construction purposes.
1. Permanent power distribution system may be used once it is installed.
2. Remove all temporary electrical equipment, when no longer needed.
3. Immediately preceding Final Completion and Acceptance, remove and replace all damaged
parts of permanent systems.
B. Temporary electrical power, including power generation, will be paid by Contractor.
C. Extend warranty or guarantee period on permanent systems used during construction period so
they commence on date of Final Completion and Acceptance.
D. Provide extension cords.
E. Provide any additional electrical power required for Contractor's operations, exceeding available
power.
F. Contractor to submit after hours lighting plan to Owner for approval. Minimize glare to occupants
of surrounding buildings and vehicles.
G. Provide temporary electrical systems which meet Owner approval.
H. Provide all temporary telephone and data communications services necessary to perform the
Work.
I.
TEMPORARY LIGHTING
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 83
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
1.
Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations, when natural light is not
adequate for work, to achieve a minimum lighting level of 25 foot-candles on walking and
working surfaces.
2.
Provide and maintain lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security
purposes.
3.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,
pigtails and lamps, as required.
4.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
5.
Permanent lighting may be utilized during construction.
1.04 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Make all arrangements, Install equipment, backflow preventers, piping, and outlets for an
adequate supply of clean water for construction purposes.
1. Existing water line may be used for temporary service.
B. Pay for all domestic system water used by Contractor.
C. Furnish drinking water and cups for all those connected with the Work.
1.05 TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. Provide temporary toilet facilities for use of all workmen in a location approved by Owner.
B. Maintain in clean, sanitary condition.
C. Provide adequate supplies of toilet paper, cleaning and other required items.
D. Do not use new or existing toilet facilities without Owner's written consent.
1.07 TEMPORARY OFFICES AND ENCLOSURES/PARTITIONS
A. Temporary Offices
1.
Contractor shall locate its offices in temporary office trailers in area(s) indicated on the
Drawings or selected by Owner. Provide proper skirting on and shielding of such trailers in
order to make them generally presentable to public view.
2. Contractor shall ensure that its personnel maintain and continuously clean all areas in and
around the new building that may be affected by Contractor’s use of the building.
3. Contractor shall have a conference room in its offices of sufficient size to comfortably sit 20
people and shall provide sufficient plastic folding chairs and table surface to support same.
a. Remove trailer facilities when requested by Owner or upon Acceptance, whichever is
earlier.
1.08 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND STAGING AREAS
A. Prior to start of Work, Contractor shall meet with all Subcontractors to arrange and prepare plot
plan defining staging, storage, field office and traffic areas.
1. Obtain Owner's approval of plan.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 84
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
2. Except as specifically provided, working and storing outside the areas designated on civil
plans will not be permitted.
3. Arrange and locate temporary structures and storage to avoid interfering with construction
and ongoing pedestrian access, vehicle activities/access including public transportation and
ongoing building operations at facilities surrounding Project Site.
1.09 TEMPORARY FENCES AND BARRICADES
A. Provide and maintain all necessary temporary fences, barricades, trench and hole covers, warning
lights, signage, way-finding and all other safety devices necessary to prevent injury to persons
and damage to property.
1. Provide, retain ownership of and remove when no longer required, or as directed by the
Owner, a construction fence following the contract limit lines. The fence shall be
approximately 6 feet high and supported by 2.5 inch diameter pipe posts anchored in ground
not more than 8 feet on center. Fence shall be galvanized wire mesh subject to approval by
the Owner.
2. The purpose of this fence is to define the approximately limits of new construction for the
Work in this Contract. Provide signage for safety and control of fenced areas. Obtain
approval of the layout and any necessary permits and/or City approval prior to installation.
3. Variations in location of the fence as Indicated will be considered where construction fence
can also serve as a protection for trees and shrubs which are to remain, as described
elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
4. Provide all facilities for high winds.
1.10 PROJECT SIGNS
A. Limit signs located on site to Contractor, Owner's, and the Project Sign.
1. Post no other signs on site except those required by law and those approved by Owner.
2. Immediately preceding Final Completion and Acceptance, or sooner if directed, remove
Project signs.
B. Provide two (2) Project Signs.
1. Size: 6 feet x 8 feet each
2. Material: Metal or wood frame, with ¾ inch thick MDO exterior grade plywood surface,
reinforced at back edge.
3. Support on 4 inch x 6 inch treated wood posts, properly braced, set in concrete and with
bottom of sign approximately 8 feet above grade.
a. Paint all surfaces of sign and frame with two coats of exterior paint and have
professionally lettered thereon following information:
b. Name of Project.
c. Names, logos and phone numbers of up to eight additional entities designated by
Owner.
d. Contractor name.
4. Design and layout of sign shall be approved by Owner before fabrication or painting.
5. Contractor’s listing of subcontractors shall appear on a separate sign provided by Contractor.
C. Locate signs on site where directed by Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 85
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
1.11 TEMPORARY ACCESS ROADS
A. Provide access as required to accomplish the Work.
B. When this access is no longer required, restore site to its original condition.
C. Clean up all debris, materials, etc., that fall from vehicles en route to and from site.
D. Do not block access to existing facilities and ongoing operations.
1.12 TRAFFIC CONTROL
A. Provide any traffic control to effect safe and smooth operations for Owner or potentially affected
entities in vicinity of Project. Follow standards published by local transportation authorities.
Obtain Owner approval.
1.13 PARKING
A. Personnel performing the Work shall not park in any Owner parking lot without prior express
consent of Owner.
B. Contractor acknowledges that any personnel violating this requirement, do so at their own risk.
Make personnel aware that their vehicles may be towed at their own expense.
C. Prohibit parking in residential and other areas in immediate vicinity of Project Site.
D. Contractor to keep all personnel, vehicles and operations on Project site within designated limits.
E. Direct personnel performing the Work to use access to site designated by Owner.
F. Provide parking and transportation for Contractor personnel off the Project site if designated on
campus parking areas are inadequate for Contractor needs.
1.14 PUBLIC RELEASE OF INFORMATION
A. The Contractor shall not publicly release information, photographs, or other documents
concerning any aspect of the materials or services relating to Contract without the prior written
approval of the Owner.
1.15 OWNER SITE REGULATIONS
A. Ensure Contractor employees and Subcontractors become familiar with and obey all Owner site
regulations, including traffic, and security regulations. All personnel employed on the site shall
keep within the limits of the Work (and avenues of ingress and egress), and shall not enter any
restricted areas unless required to do so and are cleared for such entry. The Contractor's vehicles
and equipment shall be conspicuously marked for identification.
1.16 SECURITY AND PROJECT WORK HOURS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 86
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
A. The Contractor(s) may be on the Owner grounds only between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 6:30
p.m., Monday through Friday, on normal work days. Should the Contractor desire to work at
times other than those specified above, the dates and hours must be scheduled at least seven
working days in advance and approved in writing by the Owner.
1. The Contractor shall provide readily visible identification for all employees who will be
accessing the site.
1.17 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A. Disposal of refuse: An approved recycling plan shall be submitted and approved by Owner prior
to disposal of any refuse. Remove all refuse associated with Work. Dispose refuse in accordance
with the requirements of the local jurisdiction and recycling plan, and the Project LEED
requirements. Continuously maintain LEED-required records and submit to Owner.
C. Trucking:
1. Load all trucks leaving the site with loose debris in a matter that will prevent dropping of
materials on streets. Provide automated high-pressure recirculating water truck and truck
wheel wash station at exit from site, to ensure full removal of mud and debris from underside
and exterior of Contractor vehicles leaving the project site. Fasten suitable tarpaulins over the
load before they enter surrounding paved streets. Trucks transporting earthen materials to and
from the site shall be covered.
D. Construction site maintenance:
1. Store all supplies and equipment on Project site so as to preclude mechanical and climatic
damage. Maintain site in a neat and orderly manner.
2. Maintain any temporary structures in good repair and visually pleasant.
E. Noise control: Comply with all applicable local laws, ordinances, and regulations relative to noise
control, and with directions of authorities having jurisdiction. Execute Work in a manner which
minimizes air-borne and ground borne noise and vibrations. Adjust operations to coordinate
noisy operation with adjacent activities and residents. Equipment to be employed on this site shall
not produce a noise level exceeding the following limits in dB(C) at a distance of 50 feet from the
equipment under test.
Equipment:
Materials Handling
Concrete pump 82
Crane ................ 83
Derrick ............ 88
Stationary Pumps
Generators ....... 78
Compressors .... 81
Impact
Jack hammers .. 88
Pneumatic tools
Other (20)Saws
Vibrators ......... 76
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
76
86
78
015200 ‐ 87
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
F. Dust control/street cleaning:
1. Provide appropriate dust control/street cleaning operations for all paved and unpaved areas
utilized during construction operations to the satisfaction of the Owner. Dust control shall be
obtained by wetting or other approved methods. Street cleaning method shall be approved by
Owner. Provide non-dust-producing continuous mechanical road cleaning when Owner
directs.
1.18 FIRE PREVENTION AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with all fire prevention recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) Regulations which are hereby incorporated herein by reference. A written fire permit
shall be obtained from the Owner for use of open flame devices, such as blow torches, portable
furnaces, tar kettles or gas and electric welding and cutting equipment in or within fifteen feet of
buildings. The Contractor shall be liable for any fire loss to Owner property attributable to
negligence on the part of the Contractor or Subcontractor, included in part, failure to comply with
fire prevention measures prescribed by terms of this Contract. Gasoline-driven equipment will not
be allowed within any buildings or enclosed improvements.
B. Fire hydrant service to the construction area must be maintained and/or provided by the
Contractor. Test fire hydrants and arrange to have test witnessed by local Fire Authority.
Installation shall be in accordance with the mechanical Specifications.
C. Develop and maintain fire protection plan.
1.19 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. Immediately preceding Final Completion and Acceptance, or sooner if directed by Owner,
remove all temporary facilities, and return all improvements on or about site and adjacent
property which are not Indicated to be altered, removed or otherwise changed to condition which
existed previous to starting Work.
1.20 OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH
A. Contractor acknowledges that Owner may conduct periodic safety and health inspections to
assure that Owner and its consultants' and separate contractors’ employees/property are not at risk
of injury/damage from Contractor operations, and to avoid the risk of OSHA Citations under the
OSHA multiemployer worksite provisions. Correct any infractions discovered by Owner.
B. Prework Safety Meeting: Arrange for representatives of the Contractor to meet with the Owner
prior to the start of Work for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's safety and health
programs and discussing implementation of all safety and health provisions pertinent to the Work.
Be prepared to discuss, in detail, the measures Contractor intends to take in order to control any
unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated with the Work. If directed by the Owner, this meeting
may be held in conjunction with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to start of
Work. The level of detail for the safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the Work and the
potential inherent hazards. Ensure Contractor's principal on-site representatives, general
superintendent, and safety representatives attend this meeting.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 88
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
C. Special Emphasis Standards: While Contractor acknowledges that it is responsible for compliance
with all applicable OSHA Safety and Health Standards, Contractor shall place special emphasis
upon ensuring that the following provisions are satisfied in execution of the Work:
1. Fall Protection: Implement fall protection measures via use of suitable guardrails/barricades;
safety belts/ harnesses/lanyards/lifelines; safety nets; or other approved means. Focus
particular emphasis on the requirements stipulated in Subpart L (Scaffolding), Subpart M
(Floor and Wall Openings), Subpart R (Steel Erection) and Subpart X (Stairways and
Ladders) of 29CFR1926 (Safety and Health Standards for Construction).
2. Excavations and Trenching: With regard to excavations (including trenches), the soil at the
Owner site shall be considered previously excavated and therefore unstable. Accordingly,
ensure that persons entering excavations 4 feet or more deep are protected from cave-ins by
an adequate protective system designed in accordance with the requirements of
29CFR1926.652(b) or (c). Implement all other applicable requirements for excavations as
contained in Subpart P (Excavations) of 29CFR1926 and any amendments and addenda
thereto.
3. Confined Spaces: Ensure that entry into permit-required confined spaces is in accordance
with the requirements stipulated in the OSHA Permit-Required Confined Space Standard
(29CFR1910.146). Properly satisfy all confined space entry requirements including personnel
training, documented entry permit system, atmospheric testing/monitoring, forced ventilation,
personal protective equipment, and emergency procedures/equipment.
4. Hazard Communication: Ensure that all hazardous materials utilized by Contractor in
performance of the Work are managed by Contractor’s forces in a manner that will fully
prevent short-term or long-term contamination of the Project site. As applicable (i.e., when
chemicals are used on-site by the Contractor), develop, implement and maintain at the
workplace a written hazard communication program meeting the requirements of
29CFR1926.59 (for construction contracts) or 29CFR1910.1200 (for other than construction
contracts). Ensure that each container of hazardous chemicals at the worksite is labeled,
tagged or otherwise marked with the identity of the hazardous chemical(s) contained therein
and that such markings indicate hazard warnings appropriate for employee protection.
Provide employees with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work area
at the time of initial assignment and whenever a new hazardous chemical is introduced into
their work area. Also provide employees with information on any operations in their work
area where hazardous chemicals are present; and the location and availability of the written
hazard communication program, including the required lists of hazardous chemicals, and
material safety data sheets (MSDS) required by the standard.
5. Control of Hazardous Energy (Lockout/Tagout): In accordance with the provisions of OSHA
standards 29CFR1910.147 and 29CFR1926.417, establish and implement a program
consisting of energy control procedures, employee training and periodic inspections to ensure
that before any employee performs any servicing or maintenance on electrical
circuits/equipment, machines or other equipment/systems where the unexpected energizing,
start up or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the
circuit/machine/equipment/ system shall be isolated from the energy source and rendered
inoperative.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 89
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
6. Electrical Installation and Work Practices: Comply with all applicable installation safety
requirements, safety-related maintenance and environmental considerations, and safety
requirements for special equipment as contained in Subpart K (Electrical) of 29CFR1926.
7. Personal Protective and Life Saving Equipment: In accordance with the provisions of Subpart
E (Personal Protective and Life Saving Equipment) of 29CFR1926, ensure that protective
equipment (including personal protective equipment for eyes, head, face, head and
extremities; protective clothing; respiratory devices; and protective shields and barriers) is
provided, used and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition by all personnel in and
around the area of the Work, whenever it is necessary by reason of hazards of process or
environment, chemical hazards, radiological hazards, or mechanical irritants encountered in a
manner capable of causing injury or impairment in the function of the body through
absorption, inhalation or physical contact.
8. Tools-Hand and Power: Ensure compliance with all applicable safety requirements for tools
(hand and power) as outlined in Subpart I (Tools-Hand and Power) of 29CFR1926.
9. Welding and Cutting: Ensure compliance with all applicable safety requirements pertaining to
welding and cutting operations as outlined in Subpart J (Welding and Cutting) of
29CFR1926.
10. Motor vehicles and Mechanized Equipment: Ensure compliance with the safety requirements
pertaining to motor vehicles and mechanized equipment (materials handling equipment) as
contained in Subpart O (Motor Vehicles, Mechanized Equipment, and Marine Operations) of
29CFR1926.
11. General Site Safety Requirements: For the protection of Owner employees, other entities’
employees and the general public, observe the following general worksite safety
requirements:
a. Precautions: Take all necessary precautions to prevent injury to the public, building
occupants, and damage to property of others. For the purposes of this Contract, the public
or building occupants shall include all persons not employed by the Contractor or a
Subcontractor engaged in the Work.
b. Housekeeping: Ensure that form and scrap lumber with protruding nails/fasteners and all
other debris shall be kept clear from all work areas. Remove combustible scrap and
debris at regular intervals. Provide containers for collection and separation of all refuse.
Provide covers on containers used for flammable or harmful substances. Dispose of
wastes at frequent intervals.
c. Storage: Prohibit and prevent storing, positioning, and use of equipment, tools, materials,
scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present a hazard to the public or building
occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other hazardous qualities is prohibited.
d. Obstructions: Prohibit and prevent obstruction or use of any corridor, aisle, stairway,
door, or exit, which results in encroachment upon routes of ingress or egress utilized by
the public or building occupant, or presents unsafe or unhealthy condition to the public or
building occupants.
e. Radiation Safety: Obtain Owner's written advance approval to bring any radioactive
materials onto the Project site.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 90
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
f.
Work Area Restrictions: Do not perform work in any area occupied by the public or
Owner employees unless specifically permitted by the Contract or the Owner, and unless
adequate steps are taken for the protection of the public or Owner employees.
g. Fences and Barricades: Wherever practicable, fence, barricade, or otherwise block off the
work area from the public or building occupants to prevent unauthorized entry into the
area of the Work.
h. Alternate Precautions: When the nature of the work prevents isolation of the work area
and the public or building occupants may be in or pass through, under, or over the work
area, implement alternate precautions such as the posting of signs, the use of signal
persons, the erection of barricades, or similar protection around particularly hazardous
operations.
i.
Public Thoroughfare: When work is to be performed over a public thoroughfare, such as
a sidewalk, road, lobby, or corridor, close the thoroughfare, if possible, or take other
precautions such as the installation of screens or barricades. Obtain appropriate permits
from authorities.
j.
Removal of Fences and Barricades: Remove fences and barricades upon completion of
the Work, in accordance with local ordinances and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
1.21 SETTING OUT AND SURVEYING
A. Contractor is responsible to perform all necessary setting out and surveying Work required to
perform the Work in Contract.
B. There are survey monuments on the Project site for Contractor's use. All points indicated on
Drawings may not be intact for use and shall be verified by Contractor.
C. Contractor shall coordinate its layout requirements with other persons and organizations on the
Project site as required to support their respective schedules and an organized work flow.
1.22 SALVAGE
A. Contractor acknowledges that the Owner does not assume responsibility or accountability for any
loss or damage to material or structures on the site, salvage value of which the Contractor may
have reflected in its bid.
1.23 INTERRUPTION TO OPERATIONS AND SERVICES
A. Schedule Work as to cause the least amount of interference with Project site operations. Work
schedules shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Request permission in writing to
interrupt any road and/or utility service, a minimum of fourteen calendar days prior to the desired
date of interruption. Schedule all electrical interruptions on weekends.
B. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the connection, before interrupting existing
service.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 91
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
C. Outages and closures: Do not close or partially block any roads or cause utility outages
(electrical, water, gas, sewer, telephone, fire alarm and signal systems) without the written
authorization of the Owner. Request authorization in writing not less than fourteen days in
advance and not before all material necessary for the Work to be done during the road blockage
or utility outage. The request for authorization shall include in writing the following information:
Contractor's name, Contract number, Project title, description and drawings of roads and utilities
to be shut down, times, dates and reasons for shut downs, and any pertinent suggestions or
comments. Minimize all outages and closures and do not exceed the authorized outage durations.
Provide cautionary and directional signs as needed. Work which necessitates an outage affecting
the areas beyond the Work site shall be performed by Contractor on Saturday, Sunday or after
normal working hours. Use locally prevailing transportation authority standards for any traffic
diversions.
1.24 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Leave undisturbed as much of the site as practical.
1. Land disturbed but not designated for disturbance on the Drawings or by the Owner shall be
restored to its original condition at Contractor's cost.
2. Leave root zones of trees undisturbed.
B. Provide warranty and/or guarantee of specified duration and terms on permanent items and
systems used during construction, commencing on date of Final Completion and Acceptance, for
specified duration(s).
1.25 CONCRETE WASTE AREA
A. Designate an area where surplus mortar and concrete will be placed, including clean-out from
ready-mix trucks. Configure area such that such surplus materials are not displaced by weather.
Do not allow concrete delivery trucks or personnel engaged in the work to place any such waste
concrete or mortar materials in any location but the single approved location. Remove all surplus
concrete and mortar from the Project site before final completion.
1.26 SAFETY EQUIPMENT FOR OWNER PERSONNEL
A. Provide safety equipment and devices needed by Owner personnel to inspect the Work.
1.27 COPIES OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. One set of full-sized Drawings, and Drawings in AutoCAD format, with exceptions noted in
Division Section on submittals, will be furnished to the Contractor without charge. Contractor
shall change existing information and add new record and as-built information to AutoCAD files
on a different CAD level, in a manner that will highlight such changes. Contractor shall prepare
new documents using CAD conventions in AutoCAD files furnished by Owner.
B. Submit prints and a copy of the CAD files to Owner for review and approval before Final
Completion and Acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 92
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 015200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 93
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015200 ‐ 94
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CONST. FACILITIES, TEMP. CONTROLS AND UTIL.
SECTION 015720 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Dust control.
B. Soil erosion and sediment control.
C. Noise control.
D. Pest and rodent control.
E. Pollution control.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for temporary water control.
1.03
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with:
A. Baltimore City Department of Public Works Regulations
B. Maryland Erosion and Sediment Control Regulations
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
DUST CONTROL
A. Dust Control: See approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
2.02
SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
A. Temporary Grass Seed: See approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
B. Mulch: See approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
C. Pulverized Limestone: Packaged material containing minimum 80 percent total carbonates,
100 percent passing a No. 1 mesh sleeve.
D. Soil Erosion Control Berm: See approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
E. Soil Erosion Control Fence (Silt Fence): See approved Erosion and Sediment Control
drawings.
F. Tree Protection Fence: See approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
GENERAL
A. In means and methods of construction, and in coordination and control of Work, establish
and enforce ecological preservation standards which will avoid pollution of atmosphere,
vegetation, streams and other waterways.
B. Notify regulatory agencies, in accordance with their requirements.
C. Maintain temporary controls until permanent Work is established and assumes this
function.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015720 ‐ 95
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
3.02
DUST CONTROL
A. Minimize raising dust from construction operations.
B. Spray apply dust control adhesives as required to provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.
C. Reapply adhesives as required.
3.03
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings.
B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
D. Sequence of Construction: Follow construction sequence shown to effect erosion control,
and include these dates in construction schedule. Dates shown are included to set sequence
and relative time frames. Revise dates in progress schedule to reflect actual start date of
construction.
E. Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills,
from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.
F. Install soil erosion control measures to capture and filter surface water during construction.
G. During pipe laying, prevent silt from entering piping systems by temporary closures of pipe
ends, or other means best suited to conditions.
H. Control rate of water runoff per approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings so rate
of flow is retarded and silting will be minimized.
I.
Stabilize disturbed earth per approved Erosion and Sediment Control drawings or as
directed by City of Baltimore Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector.
J.
Provide means of removing sediment from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
K. Control paths of construction and delivery vehicles. Stay on existing pavement or newly
installed pavement bases, or provide temporary paving with crushed stone.
L. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly
apply corrective measures.
3.04
NOISE CONTROL
A. Provide mufflers on combustion engine equipment. Blasting shall not be permitted.
B. Construction hours shall comply with requirements of regulatory agencies.
3.05
PEST AND RODENT CONTROL
A. Control influx and spreading of vermin. Employ the services of a State approved
extermination firm until Date of Acceptance.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015720 ‐ 96
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
3.06
POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Provide methods, means and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances and pollutants produced by
construction operations.
B. Comply with applicable code for off-site disposal of debris. Burning debris on or off site is
not permitted.
END OF SECTION 015720
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015720 ‐ 97
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
015720 ‐ 98
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
SECTION 016000 - SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 PRODUCT SELECTION - GENERAL
A. Certain types of products are described in Project Manual by means of trade names, catalog numbers
and/or manufacturer's names. This is not intended to exclude from consideration other products which
may be capable of accomplishing purpose Indicated.
B. Other types of products may be considered acceptable to Owner in place of those specified.
C. Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a product which complies
with specified item.
1. See Section 01 33 00 for definition of First Listed and Other Than First Listed manufacturers.
D. No substitution permitted after execution of Contract, except as allowed in Section 01 63 00.
1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
A. Only written requests with complete data for evaluation will be considered.
1. Request must be received by 15 calendar days prior to bid;
2. Requests received late will not be considered.
3. Submit evaluation data with copy of attached form.
B. In making request for substitution, Contractor represents that it and all pertinent entities in Contractor
project organization:
1. Have personally investigated proposed product or method, and have determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform intended function.
2. Will provide same warranty for substitute item as for product or method specified.
3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building modifications
if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects.
4. Waive all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution which subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will pay all costs caused by substitution.
6. Acknowledge acceptance of these provisions in request.
C. For bidding purposes; base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified or approved by
addenda.
D. Addenda listing approved substitutions will be published.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016000 ‐ 99
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING
E. No verbal or written approvals other than by Addenda will be valid.
F. See specific Specification Sections for other requirements for substitutions.
G. Submit to Owner for approval.
1.03 SUBSTITUTION PRIOR TO BIDDING REQUEST
A. Contractor, as offeror, shall cause supplier to submit complete data substantiating compliance of
proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
B. For products:
1. Product identification, including manufacturer's name.
2. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be
considered:
a. Product description.
b. Performance and test data.
c. Reference standards.
d. Difference in power demand, air quantities, etc.
e. Dimensional differences from specified unit.
3. Full size samples if requested.
4. Owner reserves right to retain sample until physical units are installed on Project for comparison
purposes.
5. Requester pay all costs of furnishing and return of samples.
6. Owner is not responsible for loss of, or damage to, samples.
7. Name and address of at least 5 similar projects and name of Owner's Representative Owner can
contact; to discuss product, installation, and field performance data.
C. For construction methods:
1. Detailed description of proposed method.
2. Illustrate with drawings.
D. Itemized comparison of proposed substitute to specified item.
E. Relation to separate contracts, if applicable.
1.04 REJECTION OF SUBSTITUTIONS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016000 ‐ 100
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING
A. Substitutions will not be considered if:
1. They are not submitted in accordance with this Section.
2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents, or building spaces.
3. Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for which request is submitted.
4. Request form is not properly executed.
5. Acceptance of manufacturer only will not be made. Submit information regarding specific model
number and other pertinent performance information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 016000 (Form Follows)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016000 ‐ 101
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS PRIOR TO BIDDING
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (BID PERIOD)
PROJECT: ____________________________________________________________
TO: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE
FROM: _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
ABOVE FIRM HEREBY REQUESTS ACCEPTANCE OF FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS
AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROVISIONS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM:
Substitution request for: __________________________________________________
Specification Section Number: _____________________________________________
Article(s)/Paragraph(s): __________________________________________________
SUPPORTING DATA:
Product Data for proposed substitution in accordance with requirements of Section 01 33 00.
Sample is attached: Yes ___ No ___
Sample will be sent if requested: Yes ___ No ___
QUALITY COMPARISON:
SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
Name, brand: __________________________________________________________
Catalog No.: ___________________________________________________________
Manufacturer: __________________________________________________________
Variations: ____________________________________________________________
Maintenance Service Available: Yes ___ No ___
If yes, location: _________________________________________________________
Spare Parts Source: _____________________________________________________
List minimum of 5 previous installations giving data regarding projects on which proposed substitution
was used:
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: Yes __ No __
(If yes, explain) ___________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or Mechanical and Electrical Work:
Yes ___ No ___
(If yes, explain) ___________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
STATEMENT OF
REQUIREMENTS:
CONFORMANCE
OF
PROPOSED
SUBSTITUTION
TO
CONTRACT
I/we:

have personally investigated the proposed substitution.

Have verified that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above;

will provide same warranty as specified;

have included complete cost data and implications of substitution;

will pay redesign and special inspection costs caused by use of this product;

will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by substitution;

will coordinate incorporation of proposed substitution in Work;

will modify other parts of Work as may be needed, to make all parts of Work complete and
functioning;

waive future claims for added cost to Contractor or delay caused by substitution.
Comments:
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________
Firm:
______________________________________________________________________
Date:
______________________________________________________________________
By:
______________________________________________________________________
Position:
______________________________________________________________________
END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
SECTION 016001 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic product requirements.
B. Product identification.
C. Transportation and handling.
D. Storage and protection.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 63 00 - Product Options and Substitutions.
1.03
BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. The term “products” means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures and
systems forming the Work. The term does not include machinery and equipment used for
preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include
existing materials or components required for reuse.
B. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
C. Products Containing Asbestos: No product containing asbestos in any form may be used
on this Project without specific written consent of Owner.
D. Showing or specifying of any product does not constitute a warranty that such product is
deemed not to contain asbestos.
1. So that alternative asbestos-free products may be submitted, Owner and A/E shall be
notified if any new material or product shown or specified contains asbestos.
2. Owner reserves right to conduct laboratory tests on any product at any time to
determine its content. Such tests will be at Owner's expense.
3. If a new product which has been installed is found to have asbestos content and such
product has been installed without specific written consent of Owner, provide for
complete removal of such product and its replacement with an alternative asbestos free
product.
4. In event Owner requires removal and replacement of new products containing asbestos,
refund all costs, including cost of testing to Owner. No costs for delay and no
extension in contract time will be allowed by Owner.
E. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by the Contract Documents.
F. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
1.04
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
A. Packaging: Deliver products to site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016001 ‐ 107
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PRODUCT REQUIRMENTS
1. Label products with name of material, manufacturer, stock number, and other
applicable identifying information such as ASTM designation, size, quantity, color, and
shelf life.
2. Attach or enclose instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, installing,
testing, and adjusting (as applicable).
1.05
TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct and products are undamaged.
C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement or damage.
1.06
STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
B. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.
C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation.
F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing
among materials and with foreign matter.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION 016001
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016001 ‐ 108
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PRODUCT REQUIRMENTS
SECTION 016300 - SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 PRODUCT SELECTION - GENERAL
A. Certain types of products are described in Project Manual by means of trade names, catalog numbers
and/or manufacturer's names. This is not intended to exclude from consideration other products which
may be capable of accomplishing purpose Indicated.
B. Other types of products may be considered acceptable to Owner in place of those specified.
C. Listing of a manufacturer implies acceptance of them only as supplier of a product which complies
with specified item.
1. See Section 01 33 00 for definition of “First Listed” and “Other Than First Listed” manufacturers.
D. Owner reserves right to require substitutions to comply colorwise and patternwise with "First-Listed"
specified items.
E. No substitution permitted after execution of Contract, except as allowed by Change Order.
1.02 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS
A. For products specified only by reference standards, use any product meeting standards.
B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, use any product or manufacturer
named in the Contract Documents.
C. For products specified by naming one manufacturer and product and several optional manufacturers
or products, select any named product and manufacturer which meets all Specification criteria.
1. Contract Documents are based on use of "First-Listed" specified manufacturer.
2. By using an optional manufacturer or product, Contractor represents that Contractor will be
responsible for all adjustments to fit product to the Work and for providing all additional Work,
equipment, and services required by use of product, including work by separate contractors or
individuals, at no additional cost.
1.03 SUBSTITUTION AFTER EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
A. No substitution will be considered after execution of Contract except for non-availability of specified
item due to:
1. Strikes.
2. Lockouts.
3. Bankruptcy.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016300 ‐ 109
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION
4. Discontinuance of production.
5. Proven shortage.
6. Similar occurrences.
B. Pay all costs, including Owner-incurred costs, associated with substitutions or revisions made
necessary by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or to ease construction progress or Work and which
are in interest of Contractor. Owner may reject any such requests for substitutions and this shall not
affect Contract price or Contract Time.
C. Notify Owner, in writing, with substantiating data as soon as non-availability becomes apparent.
D. Notify in time to avoid delay in construction.
E. Provide submittal data for substitutions in accordance with Contract Documents.
1.04 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
A. Only written requests with complete data for evaluation will be considered.
1. Submit evaluation data with copy of attached form.
B. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, Contractor represents that
it and all pertinent entities in the Contractor organization:
1. Have personally investigated proposed product or method, and have determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform intended function.
2. Will provide same warranty for substitute item as for product or method specified.
3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include design and building
modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in
all respects.
4. Waive all claims for additional costs or time related to substitution which subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will pay all Owner's redesign cost and other costs caused by substitution.
6. Acknowledge acceptance of these provisions in request.
C. Sign request in space provided on form acknowledging acceptance of its terms.
D. No approvals other than by Change Order will be valid.
E. Submit substitution request form and all required information to Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016300 ‐ 110
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION
1.05 SUBSTITUTION DATA
A. Submit complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.
B. For products:
1. Product identification, including manufacturer's name.
2. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be
considered:
a. Product description.
b. Performance and test data.
c. Reference standards.
d. Difference in power demand, air quantities, etc.
e. Dimensional differences from specified unit.
3. Full size samples if requested.
4. Owner reserves right to retain sample until physical units are installed on Project for comparison
purposes.
5. Requester pay all costs of furnishing and return of samples.
6. Owner is not responsible for loss of, or damage to, samples.
7. Name and address of at least 5 similar projects and name of Owner's representative for each
project that Owner can contact; to discuss product, installation, and field performance data.
C. For construction methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detailed description of proposed method.
Illustrate with drawings.
Itemized comparison of proposed substitute to specified item.
Data relating to potential changes in construction schedule, with Contractor warranty that
Contract Time shall not be affected.
5. Relation to separate contracts.
1.06 REJECTION OF SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions will not be considered if:
1. They are not submitted in accordance with this Section.
2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents, or building spaces.
3. Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for which request is submitted.
4. Request form is not properly executed.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016300 ‐ 111
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION
5. Acceptance of manufacturer, supplier, Subcontractor or other entity within Contractor
organization is not properly furnished by Contractor.
B. Owner may reject any or all substitutions requests for any reason or no reason, and such rejection
shall not be cause for modification of either Contract Price or Contract Time.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION 016300 (Form Follows)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016300 ‐ 112
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT EXECUTION
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (POST AWARD)
PROJECT: _______________________________________________________
TO: OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE
FROM: _______________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
ABOVE FIRM HEREBY REQUESTS ACCEPTANCE OF FOLLOWING PRODUCT OR SYSTEMS
AS A SUBSTITUTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH PROVISIONS OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
SPECIFIED PRODUCT OR SYSTEM:
Substitution request for: __________________________________________________
Specification Section Number: _____________________________________________
Article(s)/Paragraph(s): __________________________________________________
SUPPORTING DATA:
Product Data for proposed substitution in accordance with requirements of Section 01641.
Sample is attached: Yes ___ No ___
Sample will be sent if requested: Yes ___ No ___
QUALITY COMPARISON:
SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
Name, brand:
____________________
________________________
Catalog No.:
____________________
________________________
Manufacturer: ____________________
________________________
Variations:
________________________
___________________
Maintenance Service Available: Yes ___ No ___
If yes, location: ______________________________________________________
Spare Parts Source: __________________________________________________
List minimum of 5 previous installations giving data regarding projects on which proposed substitution
was used:
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
Project: _______________________________________________________________
Address: ______________________________________________________________
Owner: _______________________________________________________________
General Contractor: _____________________________________________________
Date Installed: _________________________________________________________
Dollar Value this Work: $_________________________________________________
REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
EFFECT OF SUBSTITUTION:
Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: Yes __ No __. (If yes, explain)
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Substitution requires dimensional revision or redesign of structure or Mechanical and Electrical Work:
Yes ___ No ___. (If yes, explain)
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
STATEMENT OF CONFORMANCE OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION TO CONTRACT
REQUIREMENTS:
I/we:









have personally investigated the proposed substitution.
believe that it is equal or superior in all respects to specified product, except as stated above;
will provide same warranty as specified;
have included complete cost data and implications of substitution;
will pay redesign costs and special inspection costs caused by use of this product;
will pay additional costs to other contractors caused by substitution;
will coordinate incorporation of proposed substitution in Work;
will modify other parts of Work as may be needed, to make all parts of Work complete and
functioning;
waive future claims for added cost to Contractor caused by substitution.
List of Attachments: _______________________________________________
Comments: ______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Architect’s Recommendation
__ Recommend
__ Do not recommend
__ Need more information
Comments: ______________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Firm: ___________________________________________________________
Date: ___________________________________________________________
By: _____________________________________________________________
Position: ________________________________________________________
REQUESTED BY:
Signed: _____________________________________________________________
Name of Person Signing: _______________________________________________
Contractor Name: _____________________________________________________
Position: ____________________________________________________________
Date: _______________________________________________________________
END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
SECTION 016600 - PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Accomplish Work to avoid damage to property.
B. Clean debris from streets and walks.
C. Provide fire protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. By manufacturer's normal means.
B. In original labeled containers.
C. Configure orders to vendors providing materials and equipment to ensure that packaging shows
qualification of material contained therein. This may include UL labels, ANSI standards, ASTM and
labels of other agencies and organizations listed in Specifications.
D. Contractor responsible for acceptance at site.
E. Schedule deliveries to avoid delaying Work.
F. Schedule deliveries to avoid interference with Owner's operations.
G. Require Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) to be delivered with pertinent equipment and materials.
H. Inspect items for damage upon delivery, reorder as required to avoid delays.
I.
Provide copy of MSDS to Owner immediately upon delivery.
3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Use methods to avoid damage to item or structure.
B. Protect weather fragile items from weather damage.
C. Handle and store bulk aggregates to avoid contamination.
D. Store to allow air circulation.
E. Store only in authorized areas on site.
F. Replace or repair damaged items.
G. Protect installed items as required until final completion.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016600 ‐ 119
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
H. Uncrate, assemble, if required, and remove debris.
I.
When off-site storage is authorized, perform re-handling to move items to Project site at no added
cost.
3.03 CLEANUP
A. Remove excess materials from site.
B. Turn over to Owner, excess materials scheduled to remain.
C. Restore site storage areas to original condition or as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 016600
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
016600 ‐ 120
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 017400 – PROJECT CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 FIRE PROTECTION
A. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers.
B. Remove from Project daily.
1.02 POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Conduct cleanup and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
B. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste on site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS
A. Use materials and methods recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be cleaned.
B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Clean all items installed under this Contract.
1. Leave free of stains, dirt, dust, damage, or defects prior to Final Completion and Acceptance.
3. Replace damaged or defaced items not acceptable to Owner to Owner's satisfaction.
3.02 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Clean up all waste materials, rubbish, and debris from site daily or as required by Owner and dispose
of off site.
B. Sprinkle dusty debris with water.
C. Repair, patch, and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent undamaged finishes
D. Remove snow and ice from accesses to site as required, minimum once daily.
E. Remove mud from vehicles prior to their use on public roads (a mechanized water jet system for this
purpose may be employed) and on site access roads as required.
F. Use self-loading mechanical road sweeper with water jet nozzles to clean paved or concrete road
surfaces. Perform this continuously during time that excavation work is underway, and when Owner
requests. Perform the latter a minimum once daily while construction activities cause vehicles to
deposit mud on sidewalks or roads.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017400 ‐ 121
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT CLEANING
3.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
B. At completion of construction, just prior to Final Completion and Acceptance, perform final cleaning.
C. Remove dirt, dust, stains, temporary labels, and foreign materials.
D. Repair and touch-up marred areas.
H. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and
exterior surfaces of fixtures, hardware, and equipment.
I.
Clean all glass, aluminum, stainless steel, plastic, rubber and plated surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017400
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017400 ‐ 122
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT CLEANING
SECTION 017419 - WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Implementation of a waste management program for recycling non-hazardous
construction and demolition debris.
1.02
DEFINITIONS
A. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes such as building materials, packaging
and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, demolition and repair of buildings and
facilities, paving and infrastructure.
B.
Recyclable Materials: Products and materials that can be recovered and remanufactured
into a new product. Recyclable materials include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Metals (ferrous and non-ferrous), including banding, metal studs, ductwork, piping.
2. Asphaltic concrete paving.
3. Portland cement concrete.
4. Land clearing debris including trees and plant materials.
5. Native rock and granular fill.
6. Gypsum products.
7. Paper and cardboard.
8. Wood products, including structural, finish, crates and pallets.
9. Brick and masonry.
10. Carpet and padding.
11. Plastics.
12. Copper wiring.
13. Mechanical and electrical products and equipment.
C. Recycling Facility: A business that specializes in collecting, handling, processing,
distributing, or re-manufacturing waste materials generated by demolition and new
construction projects, into products or materials that can be used for this project or by
others.
D. Salvage and Reuse: Existing usable product or material that can be saved and reused in
some manner on the project site. Materials that can be salvaged and reused must comply
with the applicable technical specifications and include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Dimensional lumber and other wood products.
2. Structural steel.
3. Soil.
4. Masonry products.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017419 ‐ 123
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
E. Salvage for Resale: Existing usable product or material that can be saved and removed
intact, as is, from the project site to another site for resale to others without remanufacturing.
F. Trash: Product or material unable to be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, returned,
or recycled.
G. Waste Materials: Product or material that can be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused,
returned to vendors, or recycled.
1.03
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: Follow Section 01 33 00.
A. Waste Management Plan.
B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
three copies of report. Include separate reports for demolition and construction waste.
Include the following information:
1. Material category.
2. Generation point of waste.
3. Total quantity of waste in tons.
4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.
5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.
7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total
waste.
C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Acceptance, submit three copies of
calculated end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total
waste generated by the Work.
D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals
and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
F. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable
waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests,
weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.
G. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by
landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Section 01 31 19 – Project Meetings. Review methods and procedures
related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017419 ‐ 124
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste
Management Coordinator.
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.
1.06
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A. General Intent: The Contractor shall use all means available to divert to the greatest extent
practical and economically feasible, construction and demolition waste from landfills and
incinerators.
B. Construction Waste Management Operations: Take a pro-active, responsible role in
management of construction waste and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to
participate in the effort. Establish a construction waste management program that includes
the following categories:
1. Minimizing Packaging Waste.
2. Salvage and reuse.
3. Salvage for resale or donation.
4. Recycling.
5. Disposal.
C. Make all efforts to salvage and reuse products and materials. Waste materials that cannot
be salvaged and reused, and have value as being recyclable, shall be recycled.
D. Transport only trash to a landfill.
E. The Contractor is responsible for implementation of any special programs involving rebates
or similar incentives related to recycling construction waste for this project.
F. Revenues or other savings obtained for recycling or returns accrue to the Contractor.
1.07
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A. Perform a waste analysis to determine the types and quantity of construction waste
anticipated and identify salvage for resale, salvage and reuse, recycling and disposal
options available.
B. Within 30 days after contract award and prior to performing any demolition work, submit a
Waste Management Plan for review and approval. The Waste Management Plan shall
include the following:
1. Project waste analysis.
2. Projected cost of disposing of all trash and waste materials as if there would be no
salvage or recycling on this project.
3. Name, address and phone number for each landfill facility to be utilized.
4. Tipping fee for each landfill.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017419 ‐ 125
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
5. A list of waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, and
recycled.
6. Identification of each recycling facility to be utilized.
7. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting the cost of separating and
recycling from the following:
a. Savings due to reuse of demolished materials.
b. Revenue from the sale of salvaged and recycled materials.
c. Landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials to recycling.
8. Description of the method to be employed in recycling waste materials and description
of the method that will be used to protect recycled materials from contamination.
9. Description of the means of transportation of recyclable materials and the destination of
the materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
PROGRAM IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING
A. Implement and maintain the construction waste management program for the duration of
the project.
B. Establish a method of monitoring and documenting the program. Submit a periodic report
with each application for payment that includes the following:
1. Amount, by weight, and type of waste materials disposed of in a landfill, the tip fee per
ton, and the total cost of disposal including transportation costs, container rental costs,
etc.
2. Amount, by weight, and type of materials salvaged for sale, salvaged for reuse, and
recycled. Provide destination, means of transportation, cost of transportation and
handling, tipping fee savings and revenue generated for each material.
3. Cost savings due to salvaging, reusing, and recycling materials.
C. If any non-acceptable materials such as hazardous materials or hazardous wastes are
encountered, notify the Contractor, C/M, O/R and Contracting Officer.
D. Training and Coordination:
1. Furnish copies of the approved Waste Management Plan to all on-site supervisors, each
subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect.
2. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and
recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all entities at the
appropriate stages of the Project.
3. Meetings: Include construction waste management on the agenda of regularly
scheduled job-site meetings.
a.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Pre-Bid
017419 ‐ 126
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
3.02
Pre-construction meetings
c.
Pre-installation conferences
d.
Progress Meetings
e.
Coordination Meetings
f.
Owner’s Meetings
g.
Regular job-site meetings
SALVAGE AND REUSE
A.
3.03
b.
Encourage the practice of efficient waste management when, sizing, cutting, and installing
products and materials.
SEPARATION OF RECYCLABLE WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Provide the necessary containers and bins, to facilitate the waste management program,
that are clearly and appropriately marked.
B.
Prevent contamination of recyclable materials from incompatible products and materials.
Separate construction waste at the project site by one of the following methods:
1.
Source Separated Method: Waste products and materials, that are recyclable, are
separated from trash and sorted into appropriately marked separate containers and
then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Trash is
transported to a landfill.
2.
Co-Mingled Method: All construction waste is placed into a single container and
then transported to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are sorted and
processed and the remaining trash is transported to a landfill .
3.
Other methods proposed by the Contractor and approved by the O/R.
END OF SECTION 017419
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017419 ‐ 127
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017419 ‐ 128
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WASTE MANAGEMENT
SECTION 017600 - PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Protection for products, including Owner-provided products, after installation.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
A. Protect installed products and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent
operations. All methods and materials utilized in providing temporary protection shall be installed as
soon as practicable after installation of permanent work being protected.
B. All methods of temporary protection shall be of such design and materials suitable for their intended
use; shall not damage protected surfaces, shall be maintained when in place, and shall be removed
when no longer needed.
3.02
PATCH AND REPAIR DAMAGE TO INSTALLED WORK
A. General Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of each trade’s work. This includes
damaged to one subcontractor’s work by the operation of another subcontractor. Protect installed
products and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. All
methods and materials utilized in providing temporary protection shall be installed as soon as
practicable after installation of permanent work being protected.
B. Where work has become damaged, Contractor shall patch and repair as necessary to fully restore
damaged area. In some cases, at the discretion of the Architect, the affected area(s) or item(s) will
have to be replaced. Architect will make the final determination of acceptance or rejection of
restoration and final determination of restoration or replacement.
C. All time required to address the matter of patch/repair/replacement and associated work will not be
added to the project schedule. Contractor is responsible for making up time spent so as not to impact
the project schedule in any way.
D. Total cost associated with addressing the matter of patch/repair/replacement and associated work will
be borne by Contractor. This includes, but not limited to, Architect and Engineer’s time and expense
related to said matter.
END OF SECTION 017600
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017600 ‐ 129
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017600 ‐ 130
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROTECTING INSTALLED WORK
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Not required for Owner review.
B. Product Data: Not required for Owner review.
C. Samples: Not required for Owner review.
D. Project Information: Not required for Owner review.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. For Final Completion and Acceptance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
k.
Contractor's Certification of Completion.
Certificates of Owner authorities.
Consent of surety.
Certificate from licensed surveyor verifying Contractor's conformance to elevations,
locations, grade and site work to contours indicated.
Coordination drawings.
Evidence of payments to subcontractors and vendors in triplicate.
Final application for payment, including Contractor's and subcontractors’ releases of claims
and liens.
Initialed list of incomplete and/or deficient work (IDW), verifying completion of items.
Electronic and hard copy list of Subcontractors and equipment suppliers. Include:
(1) Scope of work or items supplied.
(2) Name.
(3) Address.
(4) Telephone number.
(5) Representative.
Closeout submittals required by other Sections.
1.02 FOR ACCEPTANCE
A. Submit Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion. Utilize form at end of this Section. Certify that:
1. Work has been reviewed and inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents.
2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.
3. Equipment and systems have been tested and are operating per contract requirements.
4. Contract closeout requirements have been completed and submitted.
B. Submit evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities:
1. Certificates of inspection of:
a. Mechanical.
b. Electrical, including UL inspection and certification of the lightning protection system.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017700 ‐ 131
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
c. Plumbing.
d. Fire protection systems.
e. Life Safety / Building
2. Health Department and other authorities as required.
C. Owner will make final walk through within reasonable period after receipt of Contractor's properly
completed Certificate of Final Completion.
D. If Owner does not agree Work is complete:
1. Contractor will be notified, with reasons stated.
2. Complete Work and submit another Contractor's Notice of Final Completion, including revised
list of items to be completed or corrected.
3. Owner will again review the Work and list items to be completed or corrected, if any.
E. Redo work found not in accordance with Contract Documents at Contractor's expense.
F. If Owner agrees Work is complete:
1. Owner will sign and issue Certificate of Final Completion.
G. Owner may occupy Project, or designated portion thereof.
1. If Owner is going to occupy Project, or designated portion thereof, Contractor must perform final
cleaning of portion(s) occupied.
2. Use of equipment by Owner :
a. The Owner may take over and operate, with Owner employees, such equipment as soon as
the installation is sufficiently complete.
b. The Owner will advise the Contractor by letter, prior to the use of equipment, which items of
equipment will be operated, and the date and time such operation will begin.
c. Owner operation of equipment will not relieve the Contractor of the one-year guarantee on
materials and workmanship elsewhere provided for in this Contract. Guarantee period
commences upon Final Completion and Acceptance. There shall be no partial Final
Completion and Acceptance unless Owner expressly agrees to any.
H. Preserve monuments and property lines. If displaced, reset at Contractor's expense.
I.
Provide other close-out documents and follow associated procedures as the Owner may direct.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 017700 (FORM FOLLOWS)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017700 ‐ 132
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
PROJECT: __________________________________________________________________________
CONTRACT TITLE: __________________________________________________________________
CONTRACTOR NAME: _______________________________________________________________
TO OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: _____________________________________________________
This is to certify that I am an authorized official of the Contractor, and have been properly authorized by
said firm or corporation to certify the following:
I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify on behalf of Contractor that the Work has
been reviewed and inspected for compliance with Contract Documents, that it has been completed in
accordance with Contract Documents, that all equipment and systems have been tested and are operating
as required by the contract, that all Contract Closeout requirements have been completed and submitted.
Attached are three copies of the following documents, which are required prior to final payment:
[ ] Certificates of inspections indicating compliance with requirements of Owner authorities, including
Certificate of Occupancy, have been obtained and are attached hereto.
[ ] Certificate of site conformance by licensed land surveyor.
[ ] Initialed list of incomplete and/or deficient work, verifying completion of items.
[ ] List of Subcontractors and equipment suppliers, with contact names, mailing addresses, email
addresses, and phone numbers matched to a matrix indicating which Subcontractors and equipment
suppliers provided each Project system.
I understand that acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall
constitute a waiver of claims and liens by that payee except those previously made in writing and
identified by that payee as unsettled at time of final Application for Payment.
SIGNED: __________________________________
Subscribed and sworn to me this
PRINTED NAME: ___________________________
____ day of ___________, 20____.
TITLE: ____________________________________
NOTARY PUBLIC ________________
DATE: ____________________________________
My commission expires: ___________
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Working Submittals:
1. Provide electronic versions of manuals for review. Initial fully organized submittal shall be made
two months prior to beginning the Acceptance Phase specified in section 01 91 13 Review
comments shall be incorporated and resubmission shall be made one month prior to Acceptance
Phase. Final compiled electronic copy shall be submitted prior to Acceptance Phase.
B. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Provide transmittal containing:
a. Date.
b. Project title.
c. Contractor's name and address.
d. Title and number of data.
e. Certification that data submitted is complete and accurate.
f.
Owner's signature indicating acceptance of data.
2. Provide copy of transmittal to Owner.
a. Transmittal to be on form furnished by Owner.
b. Furnish per schedule indicated in Section regarding submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble data Indicated and other data required to completely describe operation and maintenance
procedures.
B. Bind or assemble in 3-ring binders for the hard copy and composite PDFs for electronic copy,
completely indexed by Specification Section, with each item clearly labeled.
C. Identify each item in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract
Documents, not with manufacturer's catalog numbers.
D. Neatly type or draft all data not furnished in printed form.
E. Organize data for ease of reference. For electronic copies, provide active table of contents with
relative hyperlinks to referenced documents.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017823 ‐ 135
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
F. Provide 4 copies of each manual, plus CD’s.
2.02 GENERAL DATA REQUIRED
A. Directory of Entire Manual: Provide a directory indexing the entire set of manuals-that comprise the
entire set.
B. Contact Directory: Include the contact information for all contractors, subcontractors, vendors,
manufacturers, and any other entity that has provided goods or services installed in the Work. Contact
information shall include, at a minimum, name, website, address, phone numbers, and technical
support phone numbers and email addresses.
C. Maintenance Index: Provide a summary table that indexes the equipment requiring maintenance and
indicates the frequency each piece of equipment needs attention, and a reference to the number of the
Procedure associated with that frequency. Contractor will provide subcontractors with an Excel
spreadsheet that will be completed by each applicable subcontractor and returned to the Contractor
for incorporation in the Facilities Manual.
D. Warranty Information: Contractor shall provide all warranties indexed in a logical order, crossreferenced to the description of the scope applicable to the warranty, and the contact information of
the entity providing warranty services.
2.03 DATA REQUIRED FOR EACH COMPONENT AND SYSTEM
A. Sequence of operation:
1. List valves, switches, etc., used to start, stop and adjust systems.
2. Provide flow diagrams, control sequences and valve directory.
3. Submit valve directory for review prior to inclusion in manual:
a. Indicate valve number, location.
b. List equipment controlled.
B. Lubrication instructions:
1. Frequency of inspection and lubrication recommended.
2. Type of grease.
3. Amount of lubrication recommended.
C. Maintenance and troubleshooting data:
1. All manufacturer furnished data.
2. Project record wiring diagrams.
3. Name and address of manufacturer.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017823 ‐ 136
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
4. Name and address of local representatives who stock or distribute repair parts.
5. Name and address of local and regional factory trained service person or organization.
2.04 DATA REQUIRED FOR FINISH MATERIALS
A. Maintenance data:
1. Precautions necessary.
2. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
3. Maintenance materials and tools required.
4. Repair and/or replacement instructions.
5. Name and address of manufacturer.
6. Name and address of local supplier of materials.
2.05 ASSET MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DATA ENTRY
A. Contractor shall enter the Project’s asset management data into FCNEBP facility management and
building maintenance management system. FCNEBP shall provide a web interface to facilitate
Contractor’s data entry. All data shall be entered by Contractor prior to functional testing and data
will be checked by Owner and edited by Contractor during functional testing.
B. The following data shall be entered for all systems:
1. Asset Definition: Define the asset including ID, Manufacturer, Model Number, Serial number,
and all performance data (at a minimum as indicated in Drawing schedules).
2. Preventative Maintenance task instructions defining the daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual recommend preventative maintenance procedures. These shall be provided for
all assets defined.
C. Contractor shall consult with FCNEBP and follow conventions and asset/object models established by
them. FCNEBP will provide training for 3 Contractor personnel on entry methodology.
2.06
ELECTRONIC COPY OF MANUALS,
A. The electronic version of the operations and maintenance documentation will be a series of files
organized by Contractor into subdirectories with a summary index with relative hyperlinks to the
various documents that contain the information. Contractor shall ensure that index and hyperlinks
must remain functional when the top level directory is copied or moved with all underlying
directories.
B. Produce electronic copies of the operations and maintenance manuals in pdf format. Make all content
originally authored and text searchable. Scanned versions of operations and maintenance data are not
acceptable without prior approval by the Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017823 ‐ 137
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY
A. Deliver all items to Owner prior to Final Completion and Acceptance.
B. Use transmittal form furnished by Owner.
C. Acquire Owner's acceptance of items listed on transmittal form.
END OF SECTION 017823
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017823 ‐ 138
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 017836 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Definitions:
1. Documents required for construction: Complete set of all documents required by Contract
Documents, including but not limited to:
a. Contract drawings.
b. Project manual/Specifications.
c. Addenda.
d. Shop Drawings.
e. Product Data.
f.
Samples and mock-ups.
g. Project Information.
h. Change orders.
i.
Directives, clarifications, interpretations, etc.
j.
Field test records.
k. Warranties.
2. Field documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction.
a. Used for construction of Project.
b. Contract Drawings in form of prints.
3. Periodic Update Documents: Complete separate set of all documents required for construction
with exception of samples and mock-ups.
a. Do not use for construction of Project.
b. Contract drawings in form of clean prints.
4. Project Record Documents: Complete set of all documents required for construction with
exception of samples and mock-ups.
a. Do not use for construction of Project.
b. Provide Contract Drawings in PDF and in AutoCAD electronic format.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017836 ‐ 139
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Not required for Owner review.
B. Product Data: Not required for Owner review.
C. Samples: Not required for Owner review.
D. Project Information: Not required for Owner review.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Project Record Documents; at completion of Work, turnover to Owner with letter of transmittal,
in PDF and in AutoCAD.
a. Submit Record Documents in containers used for Periodic Update Documents.
2. Provide Transmittal Letter containing:
a. Date.
b. Project title.
c. Contractor's name and address.
d. Title and number of each Project Record Document.
e. Certification that Project Record Documents submitted are complete, accurate and reflect
actual construction of Work.
f.
Owner's signature indicating receipt and acceptance of Project Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 POSTING PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION
A. After Contract is executed, but prior to start of construction, obtain Contract Drawings and
Specifications which will be used for Field Documents and Periodic Update Documents.
B. Obtain copies of all addenda and post addenda in all above documents.
3.02 FIELD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain minimum of one copy at Project site.
B. Label each document "FIELD".
C. These documents will be used for construction of Project.
D. Make documents available at all times for review by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017836 ‐ 140
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
3.03 PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain one copy at Project site.
B. Label each document "PERIODIC UPDATE".
C. Do not use these documents for construction purposes.
D. Make documents available at all times for review by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Maintain in clean, dry, legible condition.
F. Maintain Contract Drawings in stackable, enclosed file drawers designed to hold drawings
horizontally.
1. Provide index of contents of each file drawer on outside of drawer.
G. Maintain all other Periodic Update Documents in stackable, enclosed file boxes designed to hold
specific type of document.
1. Provide index of contents of each box on outside of box.
3.04 POSTING AND UPDATING OF PERIODIC UPDATE DOCUMENTS
A. Post and update on weekly basis. Contractor acknowledges that progress payments may be withheld
in whole or in part by Owner if periodic update documents are found not to be up to date.
B. Contract drawings: Mark legibly to record actual construction including but not limited to:
1. Depths of various elements of foundations in relation to first floor level.
2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to
permanent surface improvements.
3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible
and accessible features of structure.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Changes made by change order, field order, clarifications, interpretations, directives, etc.
6. Addenda.
C. Specifications: Type on each Section to record all changes including but not limited to:
1. Addenda.
2. Change order or field order.
3. Clarifications, interpretations, directives, etc.
4. Bind added Sections.
5. Indicate manufacturer, makes, and models used for actual construction of Project.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017836 ‐ 141
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
D. Do not conceal work for which information must be recorded until all required information is
recorded on Periodic Update Documents.
E. Any work concealed prior to recording of required information must be uncovered by Contractor.
F. Once all required information is recorded on Periodic Update Documents, restore Work at
Contractor's expense.
3.05 PRODUCTION OF PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Utilize set of updatable PDF and AutoCAD drawings.
1. Provide at start of construction.
B. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD".
C. Have skilled draftsperson transfer all changes, corrections, entries, etc., from Periodic Update
Documents to Project Record Documents.
D. All other Periodic Update Documents may be used for Project Record Documents provided they are
in satisfactory condition.
E. Replace any Periodic Update Document, found by Owner to be in unsatisfactory condition.
F. Transfer all recorded changes from original working copy to a clean replacement copy.
END OF SECTION 017836
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017836 ‐ 142
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SECTION 017839 - WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide written warranties for products and installations Indicated.
B. Provide warranties for period(s) Indicated.
C. Provide manufacturer's warranties for products.
1. Where manufacturer's standard warranties expire before expiration date required by Contract
Documents, obtain and pay for extensions, as part of Contract Price.
D. Provide all warranties Indicated at least 60 days to Final Completion and Acceptance. Period of
warranty and/or guarantee to commence upon Final Completion and Acceptance.
E. Contractor shall be responsible to administer all warranty work associated with OFCI installation
work. Owner shall administer warranties for OFOI items.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Not required for Owner review.
B. Product Data: Not required for Owner review.
C. Samples: Not required for Owner review.
D. Project Information: Not required for Owner review.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Provide transmittal letter containing:
a. Date.
b. Project title.
c. Contractor's name and address.
d. Title and number of warranties.
e. Certification that warranties submitted are complete and accurate.
2. Furnish copy of transmittal letter and warranties to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WARRANTIES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017839 ‐ 143
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WARRANTIES
A. Assemble approved warranties required by other Sections.
B. Bind or assemble in 3-ring binders for hard copy and composite index PDF for electronic copy,
completely indexed by Specification Section, with each warranty clearly labeled. Organize dedicated
Warranty Manual as a section of the operations and maintenance documentation.
C. Identify each warranty in manner consistent with names and identification numbers used in Contract
Documents.
D. Neatly type or draft all warranties not furnished in printed form.
E. Organize warranties for ease of reference.
F. Provide contact information of specific personnel and entities that shall service each warranty.
G. Provide Contractor form and procedure for simultaneous notification of Contractor for warranty
service during warranty periods.
H. Provide 4 copies of warranties.
I.
Provide company name, contact names, street address, email address, telephone number of all
subcontractors and suppliers, matrixed to indicate which system or equipment was provided by each
entity listed.
END OF SECTION 017839
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017839 ‐ 144
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
WARRANTIES
SECTION 017846 - EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Not required for Owner review.
B. Product Data: Not required for Owner review.
C. Samples: Not required for Owner review.
D. Project Information: Not required for Owner review.
E. Contract Closeout Information:
1. Spare parts: To Owner with transmittal.
2. Maintenance materials: To Owner with transmittal.
3. Extra materials: To Owner with transmittal.
4. Copies of all transmittals: To Owner.
a. Each transmittal to indicate Owner's signed acceptance and receipt.
b. Transmittal to be on form furnished by Owner or approved by Owner.
c. Furnish prior to Final Completion and Acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Package in clearly identified boxes.
1. Indicate manufacturer's name, part name and stock number.
2. Indicate piece of equipment part or tool is for.
3. Indicate name, address and phone number of closest supplier.
2.02 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Package in clearly identified boxes.
1. Indicate trade name and stock number.
2. Indicate which item material is to be used with.
3. Indicate name, address and phone number of closest supplier.
4. Include complete installation instructions including tolerances.
2.03 EXTRA MATERIALS ("ATTIC STOCK")
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017846 ‐ 145
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS
A. Package in clearly identified containers, or Install where Indicated.
1. Indicate trade name, stock number, size, color, etc.
2. Indicate where product is to be used.
3. Indicate name, address and phone number of closest supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DELIVERY
A. Deliver to Owner at least 60 days prior to Final Completion and Acceptance unless Owner requests
earlier delivery.
B. Delivery to location directed by Owner.
C. Use transmittal form furnished by Owner.
D. Acquire Owner's acceptance of items listed on transmittal form.
END OF SECTION 017846
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017846 ‐ 146
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS
SECTION 017900 - SYSTEM DEMONSTRATIONS AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work includes:
1.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all system demonstrations
as Indicated in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2.
Completely coordinate with all other Contract work.
B. Provide instruction to Owner for all equipment and systems for which operating and
maintenance data is required.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructors:
1.
Member(s) of installers' staffs and authorized representative(s) of component, assembly,
or system manufacturer(s).
2.
See Specification Sections for additional instruction requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Training Plan as specified below.
B. Submit data showing that Contractor's proposed instructors are acknowledged experts and
possess extensive experience in the installation, operation, and maintenance of the systems they
are providing instruction for.
C. Contract closeout information and Training Record:
1.
Submit completed equipment and systems Owner instruction report (per attached
sample), signed by Owner, for each system or type of equipment.
2.
Include instruction reports in compiled and organized Training Record including attendee
evaluations, and session hand-outs and content.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Complete all instruction prior to functional testing, unless otherwise approved in the Training
Plan.
1.
Submit separate report for each system or type of equipment, subject to Owner's
approval.
a. Submit report (form attached), with preliminary information indicated, to Owner as
part of Training Plan submission. Provide this submission sufficiently in advance of
training to allow review, re-submittal and re-review, but at least 8 weeks prior to first
instruction period, for each item requiring instruction.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017900 ‐ 147
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1.05 TRAINING EVENTS
A. General: Adequate and thorough training of the Operators and the facilities staff is vital to
effective transition and early occupancy of the building. A key goal of the Commissioning
Team is to ensure that this is accomplished. Contractors, Subcontractors, and
Manufacturers/Vendors shall prepare and conduct training sessions on the installed systems and
equipment for which they are responsible. Contractor shall ensure that all training is performed
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Training Events Overview. Training Events include all classroom and field-based training
sessions that result in the training or transference of Design Team or Contractor knowledge to
the Owner’s operations team. The following Training Events shall be executed as part of the
Training Program:
1.
Design Orientation Training: The Commissioning Authority shall be responsible for
conducting a Design Orientation Training per the Commissioning Plan. The AE shall
provide support. This will be conducted by the Design Team after systems are placed but
before Start-up and shall be attended by the Contractor and its team.
2.
Equipment and Systems Training: The Contractor (and/or Manufacturer's Representative)
shall provide training to the Owner/Operators on individual systems and equipment only
after successful Start-Up. These training events cover proper operation, maintenance,
repair, and diagnosis of the systems, equipment, and components installed by the
Contractor. Details of this training are provided elsewhere in this Section.
3.
Final Systems Operation Training: The Contractor shall provide training to the
Owner/Operators on whole-building operation. This training shall focus primarily on
BAS control of building systems and operation and its impact on building performance,
and shall be conducted after Functional Performance Tests have been substantially
completed.
C. Training Means and Methods: Details on the means and methods for conducting training,
including location requirements, preparation, methods for presentation, scheduling, instructor
Qualifications, and other details are provided in Section 01 82 01.
1.
Setting: Training sessions provided by Contractor shall typically start and end in a
classroom setting. Field demonstrations provided by Contractor will also typically be
conducted to demonstrate the hands-on aspects of the required tasks.
2.
Presentation: Training provided by Contractor shall include electronic presentation
materials. Presentation materials provided by Contractor shall be submitted by Contractor
with Training plan submittal. Contractor shall provide Audio/Visual equipment as
required to communicate to a minimum of 10 attendees.
3.
Documentation: Contractor shall cause Subcontractors or Vendors to document training
sessions in a Training Record as follows. Beyond the information included in the
Training Plan, documentation shall include the names of the attendees and their
evaluations. Training shall either (a) follow handouts that, at a minimum, list the key
training objectives in bullet form presentation style or (b) follow detailed written
documentation. Training will not be approved unless it contains accompanying hand-out
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017900 ‐ 148
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
documentation distributed to every attendee for their own use and record, separate from
the master copy for the Training Record. All documentation must also be provided by
Contractor in acceptable electronic format. All handouts and presentations slides
presented by Contractor shall also be included in the documentation.
4.
Evaluations: In addition to documenting all training sessions, all training sessions must
be evaluated by the participants. Contractor shall utilize an evaluation form provided by
the Commissioning Authority that assesses the quality of the presentation, the quality of
the content, and provides a forum for feedback of items the attendees feel need to be
provided or expanded upon. Contractor shall distribute the evaluations, ensure they are
completed, and compile them and forward them to the Commissioning Authority.
1.06 TRAINING PLAN
A. The Training Plan shall outline the Equipment and Systems Training and Final Systems
Operation Training Events proposed by the Contractor, and shall be approved by the
Commissioning Authority. Contractor will compile the individual training agendas of the
subcontractors and vendors and submit a comprehensive Training Plan to the Commissioning
Authority, Architect and the Owner for review. For each applicable system or item of
equipment, the Contractor-furnished Training Plan shall summarize all equipment and systemsrelated training events with topics to be covered and approximate training duration.
B. The Contractor-authored Training Plan shall include at a minimum:
1.
Topic and applicable specification section;
2.
Scheduled date(s) for the Events(s);
3.
Location and setting (classroom or field);
4.
Lead instructor’s and/or instructors’ qualifications;
5.
Co-instructors and their qualifications;
6.
Training objective;
7.
Event outline/agenda;
8.
Detailed breakout of content to be presented;
9.
Anticipated duration;
10.
Required attendees for each session.
C. Review: Contractor shall cause Subcontractors to submit Training Plans to Contractor, who will
then disseminate it for review. Contractor shall incorporate comments and requirements
resulting from the review and resubmit the Training Plan, prior to conducting any training
sessions.
1.07 TRAINING PREREQUISITES:
A. Training shall not be conducted by Contractor until the subject system or equipment is
operating properly and after it has been successfully started per the commissioning
requirements. If Contractor wishes to schedule both Start-Up and Training on the same
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017900 ‐ 149
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
day/visit, Contractor shall allow enough time to fully start-up and document start-up of the
systems. If the systems are not fully functioning to the satisfaction of the Commissioning
Authority, Contractor shall cancel and reschedule training.
1.08 RECORD TRAINING DOCUMENTATION:
A. The Contractor must document all training sessions. Beyond the information provided in the
Training Plan, Contractor shall provide documentation including the names of the attendees.
Training shall follow handouts that list at a minimum the key points in bullet-form presentation
style, and presentation handouts shall be provided even when training follows detailed written
documentation. Contractor-provided training shall not be considered complete or approved
unless it contains accompanying written documentation. Contractor shall also provide
Instruction reports and attendee evaluations.
1.10 DIGITAL RECORDING OF TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATION
A. Owner reserves the right to digitally record all training sessions. If manufacturer, vendor, or
contractor prohibits this digital recording, they must provide a commensurate digital recording
that illustrates all topics covered in the actual site training for the specific system or equipment.
If digital recording of any training sessions are to be prohibited, this must be stated by
Contractor with its bid or offer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Do not begin instruction until component, assembly or system has been tested as specified,
commissioned, and is in correct operating condition.
B. Assemble instructional aids.
C. Have operating and maintenance data available for use during instruction.
D. Schedule all instruction with Owner.
3.02 INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems.
B. Provide all necessary instruction to satisfaction of Owner.
C. Explain use of operating and maintenance manuals.
D. Tour building areas involved and identify:
1.
Maintenance points and access.
2.
Control locations and equipment.
E. Explain operating sequences.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017900 ‐ 150
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
1.
Identify location and show operation of switches, valves, etc., used to start, stop and
adjust systems.
2.
Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams, etc.
3.
Demonstrate operation through complete cycle(s) and full range of operation in all
modes, including testing and adjusting relevant to operation.
F. Explain use of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available
adjustments, reading of gages; and functions that must be serviced only by authorized factory
representatives.
G. Explain trouble shooting procedures.
1.
Demonstrate commonly occurring problems.
2.
Note procedures which must be performed by personnel with special qualifications or
licenses or by authorized factory representative with specified level of training.
H. Explain maintenance procedures and requirements.
1.
Point out items requiring periodic maintenance.
2.
Demonstrate typical preventive maintenance procedures and recommended typical
maintenance intervals.
3.
Demonstrate other commonly occurring maintenance procedures not part of preventive
maintenance program.
4.
Identify maintenance materials to be used.
5.
Review Owner obligations to maintain warranty.
I.
Furnish all tools required to properly demonstrate operations of systems.
J.
Do not leave site until instruction report is signed by Owner.
END OF SECTION 017900 (FORM FOLLOWS)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
017900 ‐ 151
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS OWNER INSTRUCTION/TRAINING REPORT
Project: _______________________________________________________________
System or type of equipment: ______________________________________________
NOTE: Contractor shall maintain and complete this report during course of instruction and training.
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
To be completed by Contractor:
Proposed dates for instruction period: ________________ to __________________.
Contractor Representative conducting instruction: _____________________________.
Number of hours of instruction required: ____________.
To be completed by Owner:
Owner's personnel to be instructed (Designate supervisor if required.)
INSTRUCTION LOG
Date
No.
Hrs.
Material Covered
Instr
Owner's
Personnel
Init.
Comments
Init.
Receiving
Instruction
Total Hours: _____________________ Date Instruction Completed: ______________________
Instructor's Signature:
Owner Signature:________________________________________
END OF INSTRUCTION REPORT
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
019200 ‐ 152
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
FIELD ENGINEERING
SECTION 019200 - FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
Attention is directed to the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS and all Sections
within DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS which are hereby made a part of this
Section of the Specifications.
B.
The requirements in this Section are in addition to those in Division 1 by Forest City
Enterprises, and specifically Section 01 52 00, Par. 1.21 – Setting Out and Surveying.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field
engineering services, including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Survey work required in execution of the Project.
Civil, structural, or other professional engineering services specified, or required to
execute Contractor's construction methods.
3.
Verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions shown on Drawings.
4.
Lay out Work from established control, points, and bench marks.
5.
Coordinate the work of all subcontractors.
6.
For structural steel work, verify:
a.
Elevation of concrete surfaces relative to supporting structural steel.
b.
Elevation of setting plates.
c.
Centerlines (position) of anchor bolts.
The Contractor will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes indicated
on the Drawings, as required.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: Provide a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer
certifying that the location and elevation of structures and improvements complies with the
Contract Documents.
B.
Final Property Survey: Submit 3 copies of the final property survey.
C.
Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as
required under provisions of Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout".
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surveyor: Contractor shall engage Registered Land Surveyor to perform the required land
surveying services, unless otherwise acceptable to the Owner.
B.
Engineers: Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer(s) of the discipline required,
registered in the State of Maryland to perform required engineering services.
C.
Established in independent professional practice in the specific discipline for a minimum of
five years and as acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
019200 ‐ 153
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Identification: The Owner’s Representative will identify existing control points and property
line comer stakes.
B.
Verify layout information, in relation to property survey and existing benchmarks, before
proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points.
Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
1.
C.
D.
Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without written approval.
Report destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because
of changes in grades.
2.
Replace destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey
control points.
Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks. Record benchmark locations,
with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other
utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of existing underground utilities and other
construction.
1.
3.2
Prior to construction, verify location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary and storm sewers, and water-service piping.
PERFORMANCE
A.
Working from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and
markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to
properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions
within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions.
B.
Advise other Contractors engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels
provided for their use. Other Contractors shall provide additional layout as required to
complete their work.
C.
As construction proceeds, each Contractor shall check their own work for every major element
for line, level and plumb.
D.
Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log
available for reference.
E.
Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations
that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings,
record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.
F.
On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other Work requiring field
engineering services, designated Contractor shall prepare a certified survey showing
dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
G.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and
similar appropriate means.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
019200 ‐ 154
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
FIELD ENGINEERING
H.
Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing
structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by
construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
I.
Foundation Survey: Prior to backfilling, a designated contractor shall survey the foundation,
accurately positioning and recording all of its elements relative to a known benchmark on the
Project Site. The Contractor shall certify on the survey that the survey meets all requirements
of governing State and local regulations and requirements of the Owner.
J.
Final Property Survey: Before Substantial Completion, Contractor shall prepare a final
property survey showing significant features (real property) for the Project. Include on the
survey a certification, signed by the Surveyor, to the effect that principal metes, bounds, lines
and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
END OF SECTION 01920
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
019200 ‐ 155
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
FIELD ENGINEERING
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
019200 ‐ 156
Forest City – New East Baltimore Partnership
FIELD ENGINEERING
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume;
materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B.
W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.4
Contractor's superintendent.
Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
Concrete Subcontractor.
Special concrete finish Subcontractor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1.
C.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 157
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the
structure.
1.
1.5
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
D.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:
1.
E.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Fiber reinforcement.
Waterstops.
Curing compounds.
Bonding agents.
Adhesives.
Semirigid joint filler.
Joint-filler strips.
Repair materials.
Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.
Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
1.
2.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 158
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician,
Grade II.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.
C.
Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.
1.
1.7
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
1.8
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on concrete mixtures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage.
B.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
1.9
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1.
2.
3.
B.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is
Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 159
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
2.2
ACI 301.
ACI 117.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1.
2.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding
specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D.
Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E.
Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient
to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
F.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
G.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
H.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 160
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed
concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete
surface.
Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60,
deformed bars, assembled with clips.
D.
Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, galvanized.
E.
Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.
F.
Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.
G.
Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
H.
Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated
from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.
C.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated
wire bar supports.
For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar
supports.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 161
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.5
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Cementitious Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.
Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.
Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag
cement.
Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and
that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened
concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F.
Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor
or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing
chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.
G.
Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
H.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
I.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 162
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.6
WATERSTOPS
A.
2.7
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
B.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
D.
Water: Potable.
E.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating. Verify with manufacturer that retained products have been tested against
interference with bonding of floor covering.
G.
Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,
Type 1, Class A.
2.8
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1.
E.
Types I and II, nonload bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily
fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 163
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2.9
REPAIR MATERIALS
A.
Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.10
A.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1.
B.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce
the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40
percent:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Slag Cement: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum,
with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
Silica Fume: 10 percent.
Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not
exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash
or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 164
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of
cement.
D.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
2.11
A.
Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Footings: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
w/c ratio below 0.50.
Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated.
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.5.
Slump Limit: 4, plus or minus 1 inch.
Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch
nominal maximum aggregate size.
Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated.
Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.5.
Slump Limit: 4, plus or minus 1 inch.
4.
Retain one or both "Air Content" subparagraphs below. Percentages in options are default
air contents required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for severe exposure.
5.
Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch
nominal maximum aggregate size.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 165
deliver
concrete according
to
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1.
B.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1.
2.
3.
For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not
more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.
For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each
additional 1 cu. yd..
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount
of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1.
2.
Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 166
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by
form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.
1.
2.
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new
form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces
unless approved by Architect.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 167
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
3.4
SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.
1.
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B.
In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld
crossing reinforcing bars.
1.
Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps
of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
F.
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair
coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten
epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
G.
Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material
according to ASTM A 780/A 780M. Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated steel
reinforcement.
3.6
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 168
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.7
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
WATERSTOP INSTALLATION
A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.8
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1.
D.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 169
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit
concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have
begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded
items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
B.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1.
C.
3.10
A.
3.11
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather
protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 170
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder
of curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover
for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at
least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven
days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material
and waterproof tape.
a.
b.
c.
3.
A.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a.
3.12
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound
manufacturer.
JOINT FILLING
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 171
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joints clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed
joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.13
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and
replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2
parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C.
Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of
cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes
and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding
agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place
with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color.
Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before
proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than
surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges
to match adjacent floor elevations.
Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 172
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
6.
7.
elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E.
Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F.
Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.14
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
C.
Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Steel reinforcement placement.
Steel reinforcement welding.
Headed bolts and studs.
Verification of use of required design mixture.
Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd, but less than 25 cu. yd, plus one set for each additional 50 cu.
yd. or fraction thereof.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 173
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional
tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.
Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;
one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a.
b.
8.
b.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a.
9.
When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 174
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
14.
15.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply
with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 033000
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 175
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
033000 - 176
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Architectural precast concrete cladding units.
Architectural precast concrete units.
Architectural precast concrete curbs.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing connection anchors in concrete.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and waterabsorption tests.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit.
Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface finish.
Indicate details at corners.
Indicate type, size, and length of welded connections by AWS standard symbols. Detail
loose and cast-in hardware and connections.
Indicate locations, tolerances, and details of anchorage devices to be embedded in or
attached to structure or other construction.
Include plans and elevations showing unit locations and special conditions.
Indicate location of each precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on
panel.
Indicate locations, dimensions, and details of anchors and joint widths.
Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type of
finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of three,
representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2
inches.
1.
Grout Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual sections of grout
showing manufacturer's full range of colors.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 177
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B.
Material Certificates: For the following items:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.4
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Accessories.
Material Test Reports: For aggregates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A precast concrete erector qualified and designated by PCI's Certificate
of Compliance to erect Category A (Architectural Systems) for non-load-bearing members.
B.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural
precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes
preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
1.
Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural Cladding
and Load Bearing Units or designated as an APA-certified plant for production of
architectural precast concrete products.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, qualitycontrol recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with
PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast
Concrete Products."
E.
Mockups: After sample panel and range sample approval but before production of architectural
precast concrete units, construct full-sized mockups to verify selections made under Sample
submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and
execution.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Build mockup as indicated on Drawings including anchors, connections, and joint fillers.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver architectural precast concrete units in such quantities and at such times to limit
unloading units temporarily on the ground or other rehandling.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 178
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
B.
Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing material.
C.
Store units with adequate dunnage and bracing and protect units to prevent contact with soil, to
prevent staining, and to prevent cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage.
D.
Place stored units so identification marks are clearly visible, and units can be inspected.
E.
Handle and transport units in a manner that avoids excessive stresses that cause cracking or
damage.
F.
Lift and support units only at designated points indicated on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, available fabricators offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Nelson Precast – (410) 522-7190
2.
Arban & Carosi – (703) 491-5121
3.
The Shockey Precast Group – (540) 667-7700
4.
Back River Pre-Cast, LLC. – (410) 833-3394
5.
High Concrete Group, LLC. – (877) 844-4418
6.
Arban Precast Stone, LTD. – (703) 221-8005
7.
Oldcastle Precast – (888) 965-3227
8.
Universal Concrete Products – (610) 323-0700
9.
Approved Equal
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI
Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural
precast concrete units indicated.
MOLD MATERIALS
A.
Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non-absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that
provides continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated;
nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 179
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
1.
2.4
Mold-Release Agent: Commercially produced form-release agent that does not bond
with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent
surface or joint treatments of precast concrete.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, with
ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coating and chromate treatment. Galvanize after
fabrication and bending.
C.
Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60,
deformed bars, assembled with clips.
D.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanizedsteel wire into flat sheets.
E.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
F.
Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other
devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement
in place according to PCI MNL 117.
2.5
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Supplementary Cementitious Materials:
1.
2.
3.
C.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of same
type, brand, and mill source.
Metakaolin: ASTM C 618, Class N.
White Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M, with
coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type
of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1.
Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material that reacts
with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.
a.
2.
Gradation: Uniformly graded to match design reference sample.
Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand compatible with
coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 180
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
D.
Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or
colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
E.
Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength
of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
required admixtures.
G.
Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to
not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of
admixture.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.6
Water-Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.
Plasticizing Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type I.
Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished,
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
C.
Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.
D.
Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30.
E.
High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.
F.
Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C.
G.
Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
H.
Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36; carbonsteel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat, unhardened steel
washers, ASTM F 844.
I.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.7
STAINLESS-STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Stainless-Steel Plate: ASTM A 666, Type 304, Type 316, or Type 201.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 181
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
B.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2 hex-head bolts and studs;
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel nuts; and flat, stainless-steel washers.
1.
C.
2.8
Lubricate threaded parts of stainless-steel bolts with an antiseize thread lubricant during
assembly.
Stainless-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 276, Alloy 304 or Alloy 316, with minimum
mechanical properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.9
Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, high-density plastic or steel shims, and other
accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units.
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean, natural sand,
ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3 parts sand, by
volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. Water-soluble chloride ion
content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to
ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
B.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, plasticizing
and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade A for drypack and
Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable for application within a 30minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of
cement when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
C.
Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M, of
type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
2.10
A.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
1.
2.
Use a single design mixture for units with more than one major face or edge exposed.
Where only one face of unit is exposed use either a single design mixture or separate
mixtures for face and backup.
B.
Limit use of metakaolin and white silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
C.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified
precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
D.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by
ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 182
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
E.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion face and backup mixtures or full-depth
mixtures, at fabricator's option by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods
according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal-weight
concrete with the following properties:
1.
2.
F.
2.11
A.
Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.
MOLD FABRICATION
Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures
due to concrete-placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and
detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement
is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent.
1.
B.
A.
Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid
backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form
liner with form-release agent.
Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and
dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified.
1.
2.
2.12
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work.
Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered.
FABRICATION
Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate anchorage
hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design requirements.
Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in place during precasting
operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not affect position of main reinforcement
or concrete placement.
1.
Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B.
Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors, dowels,
cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural precast concrete units to
supporting and adjacent construction.
C.
Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete units as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 183
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or
destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy-coated reinforcing exceeds limits
specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with
coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during
concrete-placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to
prevent exposure on finished surfaces.
Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strands to maintain at least 3/4-inch minimum
concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1-1/2 inches when
units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while
placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces
at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of
adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection
stresses and specified in-place loads.
F.
Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring,
mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be
added.
G.
Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch or 1.5
times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified.
H.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness from
forming in precast concrete units.
1.
I.
Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating
or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or
entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117.
1.
Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6, "Interim
Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete
Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond between face and backup concrete, if
used.
J.
Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
K.
Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure with
permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings. Imprint or
permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that does
not show in finished structure.
L.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat
or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure
units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect
on performance or appearance of final product.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 184
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
M.
2.13
A.
Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements,
including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements
in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated so each
finished unit complies with the following product tolerances:
1.
Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Exposed to View: As follows:
a.
2.
Overall Height and Width of Units, Measured at the Face Not Exposed to View: As
follows:
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
4.
A.
3 feet or under, plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Total Thickness: Plus 1/16 inch, minus 1/16 inch.
Variation from Square or Designated Skew (Difference in Length of the Two Diagonal
Measurements): Plus or minus 1/8 inch/72 inches or 1/2 inch total, whichever is greater.
Bowing: Plus or minus L/360, maximum 1 inch.
Local Smoothness: 1/4 inch/10 feet.
Warping: 1/16 inch/12 inches of distance from nearest adjacent corner.
Tipping and Flushness of Plates: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
Dimensions of Architectural Features and Rustications: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Position Tolerances: For cast-in items measured from datum line location, as indicated on Shop
Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
2.14
3 feet or under, plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Weld Plates: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Handling Devices: Plus or minus 3 inches.
Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plus or minus 1/4 inch where
position has structural implications or affects concrete cover; otherwise, plus or minus
1/2 inch.
Location of Rustication Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
FINISHES
Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners shall be
uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units
to match approved mockups and as follows:
1.
PCI's "Architectural Precast Concrete - Color and Texture Selection Guide," of plate
numbers indicated.
a.
Plate 101
1)
2)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Color: White
Texture: Sandblasted
034500 ‐ 185
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
3)
Exposure: Light
B.
Finish exposed top surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-surface finish.
C.
Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with as cast finish.
2.15
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR-6,
ASTM C 1610/C 1610M,
ASTM C 1611/C 1611M,
ASTM C 1621/C 1621M,
and
ASTM C 1712.
B.
Strength of precast concrete units is considered deficient if units fail to comply with ACI 318
requirements for concrete strength.
C.
Testing: If there is evidence that strength of precast concrete units may be deficient or may not
comply with ACI 318 requirements, precaster will employ an independent testing agency to
obtain, prepare, and test cores drilled from hardened concrete to determine compressive strength
according to ASTM C 42/C 42M and ACI 318.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A minimum of three representative cores shall be taken from units of suspect strength,
from locations directed by Architect.
Test cores in an air-dry condition.
Strength of concrete for each series of three cores is considered satisfactory if average
compressive strength is equal to at least 85 percent of 28-day design compressive
strength and no single core is less than 75 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.
Report test results in writing on same day that tests are performed, with copies to
Architect, Contractor, and precast concrete fabricator. Test reports include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Project identification name and number.
Date when tests were performed.
Name of precast concrete fabricator.
Name of concrete testing agency.
Identification letter, name, and type of precast concrete unit(s) represented by core
tests; design compressive strength; type of break; compressive strength at breaks,
corrected for length-diameter ratio; and direction of applied load to core in relation
to horizontal plane of concrete as placed.
D.
Patching: If core test results are satisfactory and precast concrete units comply with
requirements, clean and dampen core holes and solidly fill with precast concrete mixture that
has no coarse aggregate, and finish to match adjacent precast concrete surfaces.
E.
Defective Units: Discard and replace recast architectural concrete units that do not comply with
acceptability requirements in PCI MNL 117, including concrete strength, manufacturing
tolerances, and color and texture range. Chipped, spalled, or cracked units may be repaired,
subject to Architect's approval. Architect reserves the right to reject precast units that do not
match approved samples, sample panels, and mockups. Replace unacceptable units with precast
concrete units that comply with requirements.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 186
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, bearing surface tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Do not install precast concrete units until supporting cast-in-place concrete has attained
minimum allowable design compressive strength and supporting steel or other structure is
structurally ready to receive loads from precast concrete units.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting architectural
precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable
tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position, stability,
and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims as precast concrete units are being
erected. Tack weld steel shims to each other to prevent shims from separating.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
Remove projecting lifting devices and grout fill voids within recessed lifting devices
flush with surface of adjacent precast surfaces when recess is exposed.
Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 1/2 inch.
C.
Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or as
otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon
as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
D.
Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.4/D1.4M
for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Protect architectural precast concrete units and bearing pads from damage by field
welding or cutting operations, and provide noncombustible shields as required.
Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using no less than the minimum
fillet as specified by AWS.
Clean weld-affected metal surfaces with chipping hammer followed by brushing, and
apply a minimum 4.0-mil- thick coat of galvanized repair paint to galvanized surfaces
according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
Visually inspect welds and remove, reweld, or repair incomplete and defective welds.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 187
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
E.
At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent
loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
1.
2.
Where slotted connections are used, verify bolt position and tightness. For sliding
connections, properly secure bolt but allow bolt to move within connection slot.
For slip-critical connections, use one of the following methods to assure proper bolt
pretension:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
F.
3.3
Turn-of-Nut: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using
ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Calibrated Wrench: According to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
Twist-off Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852.
Direct-Tension Control Bolt: ASTM F 1852.
For slip-critical connections, use method and inspection procedure approved by Architect
and coordinated with inspection agency.
Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or
indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Alternatively, pack
spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout
and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout
material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp
for not less than 24 hours after initial set.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment, without
exceeding the following noncumulative erection tolerances:
1.
Top Elevation from Nominal Top Elevation: As follows:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.4
Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/16 inch.
Non-Exposed Panel Relative to Adjacent Panel: 1/8 inch.
Plumb in Any 10 Feet of Element Height: 1/4 inch.
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/8 inch.
Joint Width (Governs over Joint Taper): Plus or minus 1/16 inch.
Maximum Joint Taper: 1/4 inch.
Joint Taper in 10 Feet: 1/4 inch.
Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Faces: 1/8 inch.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
B.
Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and
ASTM E 1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 188
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
REPAIRS
A.
Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves the right
to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B.
Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between
original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20
feet.
C.
Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint according to
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
D.
Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of shop
primer.
E.
Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply
with requirements.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
B.
Clean mortar, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent
materials immediately.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment
to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1.
2.
Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's
recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning
operations.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed
concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 034500
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 189
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
034500 ‐ 190
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Stone masonry adhered to concrete backup.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
1.3
For each stone type indicated. Include at least three samples in each set and show the full
range of color and other visual characteristics in completed Work.
For each color of mortar required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with
manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, supply sources, and other information as required
to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.
1.
C.
Material Test Reports:
1.
1.4
Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from
the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner approves such deviations in
writing.
Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating
that sealants will not stain or damage stone. Include interpretation of test results and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone
fitters.
B.
Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for
materials and execution.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 191
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
1.
Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 96 inches long by full
height and thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Include stone coping at top of mockup.
Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches long in mockup.
Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Owner specifically approves such deviations in
writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
1.6
Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant
manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's
standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will
contact or affect joint sealants.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
C.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,
under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills
with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry
when construction is not in progress.
1.
B.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining stone
masonry face.
1.
2.
3.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings spread
on the ground and over the wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 192
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by
frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
1.
D.
Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40
deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days
after completing cleaning.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from single
quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for each
cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or
producer.
2.2
STONE
A.
Varieties and Source: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1.
Burlington Natstone, Inc.
(972) 985-9182
www.burlingtonstone.com
2.
An evenly distributed, three color blend of the following as indicated on the plans:
a.
b.
c.
3.
An evenly distributed blend of the following two dimensional sizes (in each color)
indicated on the plans:
a.
b.
B.
Kirby Sanded
Cumbrian Black Flame Textured
Westmoreland Green Sawn
4 inches x 24 inches
6 inches x 24 inches
Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic
effects.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 193
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
2.3
MORTAR MATERIALS
A.
Pre-Packaged Thin-Set Mortar: Packaged blend of polymer fortified masonry cement.
1.
Laticrete 254 Platinum
a.
B.
Pre-Packaged Grout: Packaged blend of masonry cement.
1.
C.
2.4
Color: Grey
Laticrete Permacolor Grout
a.
Color: 03 Silk
b.
Joint Width: 1/4-inch.
Water: Potable.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
2.5
Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene,
urethane or PVC.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
2.6
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and
grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces
without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by
cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated.
B.
Select stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on
Drawings and pattern specified.
C.
Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
Shape beds to fit supports.
D.
Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for
appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
1.
E.
Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.
Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 194
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
F.
Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:
1.
G.
2.7
Thickness: 1/2 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch.
Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to
match approved samples and mockups.
MORTAR MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures.
1.
2.
Use proprietary masonry cement mortar as indicated.
Mixing Pointing Mortar (Grout): Mix grout per manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Pigmented Grout: Use colored cement product.
1.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
stone masonry.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before
setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear
water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
SETTING STONE MASONRY
A.
Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1.
Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines straight
and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 195
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
B.
Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with requirements
relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is otherwise unsuitable
for intended use.
C.
Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
D.
Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Set stone accurately in locations
indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated
tolerances.
E.
Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where minor
variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not less than 1/4
inch at narrowest points or more than 3/8 inch at widest points.
F.
Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1.
2.
3.4
Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.
Sealing joints is specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8
inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control
joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
B.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
C.
Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the average
plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.
D.
Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.
E.
Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance specified for
thickness of stone.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
A.
Use sufficient setting mortar so a slight excess will be forced out the edges of stone units as they
are set. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat.
B.
Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than 1/2 inch before setting mortar
has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 196
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
3.6
POINTING
A.
Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with grout by removing dust and mortar particles.
B.
Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8 inch
deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard before applying
next layer.
C.
Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the
following joint profile:
1.
3.7
Joint Profile: Smooth, flat face slightly below edges of stone.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods
and results are approved by Architect.
Defective joints.
Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
B.
Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes
or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking
tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A.
Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
END OF SECTION 044313.16
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 197
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
044313.16 ‐ 198
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Structural steel.
Field-installed shear connectors.
Grout.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in
AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B.
Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or
along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and
their connections.
C.
Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant
degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are
indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
1.4
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 199
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs):
Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded
joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:
1.
2.
1.6
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Include embedment Drawings.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed
and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.
Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System.
Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.
Identify demand critical welds.
Power source (constant current or constant voltage).
Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.
B.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical
welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by
AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for
welding personnel qualification.
AISC 303.
AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.
AISC 360.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.
1.
B.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
1.
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 200
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
2.
3.
Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents
to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, to withstand loads indicated and comply with
other information and restrictions indicated.
1.
B.
2.2
Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360.
Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained.
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B.
Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M
C.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
1.
E.
2.3
Weight Class: Standard.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
1.
B.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain
finish.
Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
2.
Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with
mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy-coated finish.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 201
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
C.
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
D.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Configuration: Straight.
Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.
Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.
PRIMER
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California
Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B.
Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting". Primer in first "Primer" Paragraph
below requires SSPC-SP 2 surface preparation or better and 24 hours' drying before recoating.
Type II has lower VOC content than Type I.
C.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
D.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
E.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.
F.
Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
G.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.5
GROUT
A.
Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic
aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute
working time.
B.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency
suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according
to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
1.
2.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated.
Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 202
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
3.
4.
5.
B.
Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain
markings until structural steel has been erected.
Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.
Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to
metal surfaces.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPCSP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." Retain "Shear Connectors" Paragraph below if shear connectors are
shop installed to structural steel.
F.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.
Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to
pass through steel members.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes
or enlarge holes by burning.
Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to
steel surfaces.
Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.8
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 203
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
2.9
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
1.
2.
D.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
Galvanized surfaces.
Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPCPS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting
Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
GALVANIZING
A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
1.
2.10
A.
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as
weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.
1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 204
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
B.
Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1.
2.
E.
to
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear
connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
1.
B.
3.2
Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and
elevations.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-inplace concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 205
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
3.3
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces
of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface
of plates.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before
packing with grout.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain.
Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in
permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
1.
2.
Level and plumb individual members of structure.
Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
G.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts.
H.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors.
Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M
and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 206
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS
A.
3.6
Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written
recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fireresistance rating indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special
inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.
Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C.
Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D.
Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to
requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:
1.
2.
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree
flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.
Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear
connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 207
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
3.7
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or
missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1
for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool
cleaning.
C.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
D.
Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "HighPerformance Coatings."
END OF SECTION 051200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051200 - 208
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
SECTION 051213 - ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements regarding the appearance and surface preparation of
Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS).
B.
Related Sections include:
1.2
1.
Section 05 12 00, “Structural Steel Framing” for requirements regarding steel work not
included in this section.
2.
Section 09 96 00, “High Performance Coatings” for application of coating systems.
3.
Section 13 31 40, “Tensioned ETFE Fabric Structure” for coordination of mockups.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
B.
Samples: As requested by the Architect.
C.
1.
Submit samples of each type of weld for AESS. Sample welds shall be 8 in. long and
shall show finish, cleaning and shop finishing required in the finished work.
2.
Patterns, Models, or Plaster Castings: Made from proposed patterns for each design of
custom casting required.
Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of AESS components.
1.
Provide erection drawings clearly indicating which members are considered as AESS
members.
2.
Include details that clearly identify all of the requirements listed in sections “Fabrication"
and "Erection" of this specification. Provide connections for exposed AESS consistent
with concepts shown on the architectural or structural drawings.
3.
Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,
and show size, length and type of each weld. Identify grinding, finish and profile of welds
as de- fined herein.
4.
Indicate type, size, finish and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tensioned shear/bearing connections.
Indicate to which direction bolt heads should be oriented.
5.
Clearly indicate which surfaces or edges are exposed and what class of surface
preparation is being used.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 209
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
6.
D.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the 'Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects names and
address, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.
1.3
Indicate special tolerances and erection requirements as noted on the drawings or defined herein.
For each project, submit photographs showing detail of installed AESS.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Section 05 12 00,
“Structural Steel Framing,” engage a firm experienced in fabricating AESS similar to that
indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to fabricate AESS without delaying the Work. Fabricators
known to be capable of complying with the requirements includes the following:
1.
Offenhauser Company, 2201 Telephone Road, Houston, TX 77023, 800-228-4811 or
713-590-2546 voice, attn: Mr. Robert Dillard.
2.
Permasteelusa Cladding Technologies, Ltd., 321 N. Clark Street Suite 2410, Chicago, IL,
60654, 847-255-8133.
B.
Installer Qualifications: In addition to those qualifications listed in Section 05 12 00, “Structural
Steel Framing,” engage an experienced Erector who has completed AESS work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicted for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
C.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
D.
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," Section 10 as
amended herein.
Mockups: At least four weeks prior to fabricating AESS, the Contractor shall construct
mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. A
mockup for each of the following elements shall be constructed:
1.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
a.
Mockups shall be full-size pieces unless the Architect approves smaller models.
Refer to Drawings for size and extent of mockups.
b.
Coordinate extent of mockup work with Section 13 31 40 – Structured and
Tensioned ETFE Outer Envelope.
c.
After fabrication, move mockups to Forest City office in Baltimore, MD. Notify
the Architect at least one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be available for review.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 210
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
E.
1.4
d.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects regarding each element listed
under the fabrication heading below.
e.
Mockup will have finished surface (including surface preparation and white shop
primer).
f.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication of final units.
g.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed work.
Pre-installation Conference: The General Contractor shall schedule and conduct conference at
the project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section “Project Meetings" As a
minimum, the meeting shall include the General Contractor, Fabricator, Erector, the finishpainting subcontractor, and the Owner, Architect. Coordinate requirements for shipping, special
handling, attachment of safety cables and temporary erection bracing, touch up painting and
other requirements for AESS.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver AESS to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure uninterrupted
progress of work.
B.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep material out of
mud and dirt and provide for proper drainage. Protect steel members and packaged materials
from erosion and deterioration. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting or warping of
AESS members.
C.
Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by sufficient packing
material to ensure that products will not be cracked or otherwise damaged.
D.
Erect pre-painted finish pieces using padded slings or other methods such that they are not
damaged. Provide padding as required to protect while rigging and aligning member’s frames.
Weld tabs for temporary bracing and safety cabling only at points concealed from view in the
completed structure where approved by the Architect during the pre-installation meeting.
Methods of removing temporary erection devices and finishing the AESS members shall be
approved by the Architect prior to erection.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against walls and other construction, verify
dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
work.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchors for AESS members that connect to the work of other trades.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchors, including sleeves,
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 211
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the project site in time for installation. Anchorage
concepts shall be as indicated on drawings and approved on final shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Meet requirements Section 05 12 00, “Structural Steel Framing” as amended below
B.
High-Strength Bolts. Nuts, and Washers: Per section 05 12 00 heavy hex heads and nuts.
Provide standard carbon steel Mechanically galvanized finish.
C.
Electrodes, welding rods, and filler metals are to be compatible in strength and appearance with
the parent material joined.
D.
Castings: Sand castings custom fabricated from either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or
malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M unless otherwise indicated to satisfy performance
requirements and as recommended by the fabricator for the application indicated.
2.2
FIELD APPLIED PAINT MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Section 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings
B.
Compatibility: The General Contractor shall submit all components/procedures of the paint
system for AESS as a single coordinated submittal. As a minimum, identify required surface
preparation, primer, intermediate coat and finish coat.
C.
Carbon Steel Surfaces, Shop Finishing:
1.
Materials:
a.
Primer: A two-component, moisture-cured, zinc-rich aromatic urethane primer.
The primer shall also conform to SSPC Paint 20, Type II.
1)
b.
Intermediate Coat: Inorganic hybrid water-based epoxy intermediate coating
compatible with specified primer and top coat.
1)
c.
Tnemec; Series 27-color W.B. Typoxy.
Top Coat: A metal flake containing pigmented fluoropolymer top coating
compatible with specified intermediate coat. Provide in one custom color
matching Architect’s sample of Duranar UC55026 Bright White.
1)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Tnemec; H90-97 Tneme-Zinc.
Tnemec; Series 1071 color Fluoronar.
051213 - 212
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel identified as Architecturally
Exposed Structural Steel.
B.
Fabricate and assemble AESS in shop to greatest extent possible. Locate field joints in AESS
assemblies at concealed locations or as approved by the Architect. Detail AESS assemblies to
minimize field handling and expedite erection.
C.
Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces smooth, square and of surface quality consistent with the
approved mock up. Use special care in handling and shipping of AESS both before and after
shop painting.
D.
1.
Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,
treating, and shop priming.
2.
Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that
impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove
seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.
Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Weld behind finished surfaces
without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress
exposed and contact surfaces.
1.
E.
Where welding cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply
with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a
welded joint.
In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, employ the following fabrication
techniques.
1.
Fabrication Tolerance: Fabricate steel to one half the normal tolerance as specified in the
Code of Standard Practice Section 10.
2.
Welds ground smooth: Fabricator shall grind welds of AESS smooth. For groove welds,
the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces each side and be within +1/16", -0" of plate
thickness.
3.
Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be groundcontoured, or blended, oversize welds as required and grind to provide a smooth
transition and to match profile on approved mock-up.
4.
Continuous Welds: Where welding is noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of
a uniform size and profile.
5.
Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed
connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with
adjacent material.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 213
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.4
6.
Coping and Blocking Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of 1/8" +/- I/32" at all copes and
blocks.
7.
Joint Gap Tolerance: Maintain a uniform gap of I/8" +/- 1/32".
8.
Piece Marks Hidden: Fabricate such that piece marks are fully hidden in the final
structure or made with such media to permit full removal after erection.
9.
Mill Mark Removal: Fabricator shall deliver steel with no mill marks (stenciled, stamped,
raised etc) in exposed locations. Mill marks shall be omitted by cutting of mill material to
appropriate lengths where possible. Where not possible, the fabricator can fill and/or
grind to a surface finish consistent with the approved mock up.
10.
Grinding of sheared edges: Fabricator shall grind all edges of sheared, punched or flamecut steel to match approved mockup.
11.
Rolled Members: Member specified to be rolled to a final curved shape shall be fully
shaped in the shop and tied during shipping to prevent stress relieving. Distortion of the
web or stem, and of outstanding flanges or legs of angles shall be visibly acceptable to
the Architect from a distance of 20' under any lighting condition determined by the
Architect. Tolerances for the vertical and horizontal walls of rectangular HSS members
after rolling shall be the specified dimension +/- 1/2".
12.
Seal weld open ends of round and rectangular hollow structural section with 3/8" closure
plates. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar
locations where AESS is exposed to weather.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
Bolted Connections: Make in accordance with Section 05 12 00. Provide bolt type and finish as
noted herein and align bolt heads as indicated on the approved shop erection drawings.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and Section 05 12 00. Appearance and quality of
welds shall be consistent with the mock up. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods
that will maintain alignment of members without warp exceeding the tolerance of this section.
2.5
SHOP FINISHING
A.
B.
Shop-prime steel surfaces, except the following:
1.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2".
2.
Surfaces to be field welded.
3.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip- critical connections, if primer does not meet
the specified AISC slip coefficient.
Surface Preparation:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 214
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
1.
C.
Surface Preparation:
a.
Clean all surfaces of exposed steel in accordance with SSPC Surface Preparation
Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning.
b.
Cleaning shall be done after fabrication and immediately prior to shop painting or
shipment. Apply shop coat of paint within 4 hours after cleaning and before rust
bloom occurs.
c.
Blast cleaning operations for exposed steel shall not be conducted when the
relative humidity of the air is greater than 85% or when the surface temperature of
the steel is less than 5 degrees F. above the temperature at which condensation will
occur, or when these conditions are anticipated, unless otherwise recommended by
the primer and paint manufacturer. Remove all traces of blast residue and dust in a
manner that will not contaminate the surfaces. Take every precaution to prevent
contamination of surfaces. Workmen shall wear gloves free of grease and/or oil
when handling blast cleaned steel.
Paint Application: Use painting methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
webs, and exposed surfaces. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
1.
Primer Application: Apply specified primer to provide 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness
unless otherwise as recommended by the primer manufacturer. No painting shall be done
when the surface temperature of the steel is below the temperature at which condensation
will occur. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's directions.
2.
Intermediate Coat Application: Apply specified intermediate coat to provide 4.0 to 6.0
mils dry film thickness unless otherwise recommended by the intermediate coat
manufacturer. Apply paint thoroughly and evenly to dry primer surfaces in accordance
with manufacturer's directions.
3.
Top Coat Application: Apply specified topcoat to provide 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film
thickness unless otherwise recommended by the topcoat manufacturer. Apply paint
thoroughly and evenly to dry primer surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's
directions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
The erector shall check all AESS members upon delivery for twist, kinks, gouges or other
imperfections which might result in rejection of the appearance of the member. Coordinate
remedial action with fabricator prior to erecting steel.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 215
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.2
PREPARATON
A.
3.3
Provide connections for temporary shoring, bracing and supports only where noted on the
approved shop drawings. Temporary connections not shown shall be made at locations not
exposed to view in the final structure or as approved by the Architect. Handle, lift and align
pieces using padded slings and/or other protection required to maintain the appearance of the
AESS through the process of erection.
ERECTION
A.
Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's
specifications referenced in this Section.
B.
In addition to the special care used to handle and erect AESS, employ the following erection
techniques:
1.
AESS Erection tolerances: Erection tolerances shall meet the requirements of standard
frame tolerances for structural steel per Chapter 7 of the AISC Code of Standard
Practice.
2.
Welds ground smooth: Erector shall grind welds smooth in the connections of AESS
members. For groove welds, the weld shall be made flush to the surfaces of each side and
within + 1/16", -0" of plate thickness.
3.
Contouring and blending of welds: Where fillet welds are indicated to be ground
contoured, or blended, oversize welds as required; grind to provide a smooth transition
and to match profile on approved mock-up.
4.
Continuous Welds: Where noted on the drawings, provide continuous welds of a uniform
size and profile.
5.
Minimize Weld Show Through: At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed
connection occurs, grind distortion and marking of the steel to a smooth profile with
adjacent material.
6.
Bolt Head Orientation: All bolt heads shall be oriented as indicated on the Contract
Documents. Where bolt-head alignment is specified, the orientation shall be noted for
each connection on the erection drawings. Where not noted, the bolt heads in a given
connection shall be oriented to one side.
7.
Removal of field connection aids. Run-out have tabs, erection bolts and other steel
members added to connections to allow for alignment, fit-up, and welding in the field
shall be removed from the structure. Field groove welds shall be selected to eliminate the
need for backing bars or to permit their removal after welding. Welds at run-out tabs shall
be removed to match adjacent surfaces and ground smooth. Holes for erection bolts shall
be plug welded and ground smooth.
8.
Filling of weld access holes: Where holes must be cut in the web at the Intersection with
flanges on W shapes and structural tees to permit field welding of the flanges, they shall
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 216
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
be filled. Filling shall be executed with proper procedures to minimize restraint and
address thermal stresses in group 4 and 5 shapes.
C.
Field Welding: Weld profile, quality, and finish shall be consistent with mock-ups approved
prior to fabrication.
D.
Splice members only where indicated.
E.
Obtain permission for any torch cutting or field fabrication from the Architect. Finish sections
thermally cut during erection to a surface appearance consistent with the mock up.
F.
Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must
be enlarged to admit bolts. Replace connection plates that are misaligned where holes cannot be
aligned with acceptable final appearance
3.4
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
Bolted Connections: Install bolts of the specified type and finish in accordance with Section 05
12 00, "Structural Steel Framing."
B.
Welded Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, and appearance. Refer to Section
05 12 00, "Structural Steel Framing" for other requirements.
3.5
1.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of
axes without warp. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for
AESS will limit distortions to allowable tolerances.
2.
Obtain Architect’s approval for appearance of welds in repaired or field modified work.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
Structural requirements: The Owner will engage an Independent testing and inspecting agency
to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports Refer to Section 05 12 00,
"Structural Steel Framing" for detailed bolt and weld testing requirements.
B.
AESS acceptance: The Architect shall observe AESS steel in place and determine acceptability
based on the mockup. The Testing Agency shall have no responsibility for enforcing the
requirements of this section.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint shall be completed to blend with the adjacent surfaces of AESS.
Such touch up work shall be done In accordance with manufacturer's instructions as specified in
Part 2 of this specification section.
END OF SECTION 051213
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 217
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
051213 - 218
Gensler
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Roof rafter framing.
Soffit framing.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping,
bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining
work.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 219
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other
damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Design Loads: As indicated.
Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a.
b.
3.
4.
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside
the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,
connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects
when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.
Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction
tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as
follows:
a.
C.
2.2
Upward and downward movement of 1 inch.
Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1.
D.
Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected
span for live loads.
Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and
1/240 for total loads of the span.
Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
Grade: ST33H.
Coating: G60.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 220
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
B.
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of
grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
2.3
Grade: As required by structural performance.
Coating: G60.
ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING
A.
Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with
stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
2.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
SOFFIT FRAMING
A.
Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths
indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, minimum.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
2.6
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Web stiffeners.
Anchor clips.
End clips.
Foundation clips.
Gusset plates.
Stud kickers and knee braces.
Joist hangers and end closures.
Hole reinforcing plates.
Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 221
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel and carbon-steel nuts; and flat,
hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class C.
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or
equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICCES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping,
steel drill screws.
1.
F.
2.7
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.
B.
Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.
Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for
placement and hydration.
C.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid
consistency and 30-minute working time.
D.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed
steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
E.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 222
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
3.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing
members is not permitted.
a.
b.
4.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin
fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary
framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B.
After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as
needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fireresistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect
remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C.
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 223
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
D.
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame
both sides of joints.
H.
Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing
members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are
inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved
or standard punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing
or other finishing materials.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 224
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
3.4
JOIST INSTALLATION
A.
Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to
supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position,
brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.
1.
2.
Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2.
Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers,
steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.
C.
Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, or another
combination of connected joists if indicated.
D.
Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located
directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
1.
E.
Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.
Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist
intersection as follows:
1.
2.
Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist
webs.
Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated
and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to
bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.
F.
Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.
G.
Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces,
clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete
and stable joist-framing assembly.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified
requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 225
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
3.6
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
054000 - 226
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Stainless-steel tube railings.
Illuminated stainless-steel tube railings.
Section 057313 "Glazed Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental railings fabricated
from glass panels, pipes and tubes.
Section 265600 “Exterior Lighting” for terminations of electrical wiring for illuminated
handrails.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
B.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
Railing brackets.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
3.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
Fittings and brackets.
Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including top rail,
post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Show method of connecting and finishing members at intersections.
055213 ‐ 227
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Stainless-Steel Tube Railings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Julius Blum and Company, Inc.
Kane Architectural Innovations
R&B Wagner, Inc.
Stainless Fabricators, Inc.
Tri Tech, Inc.
Tuttle Railing Systems
Approved equal.
Illuminated Stainless-Steel Tube Railings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
io Lighting
R&B Wagner, Inc.
C.R. Laurence Company, Inc.
Approved equal.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 228
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
C.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
b.
B.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1.
2.3
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.4
Provide type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger
bolt and that provides 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall
surface.
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L.
B.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.
C.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 229
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
1.
2.
Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture,
of railings.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1.
2.
2.6
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1.
B.
2.7
For stainless-steel railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal
to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated
items.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Shop assemble railings to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of
joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that are exposed to weather in a manner that excludes water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 230
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
J.
Form Changes in Direction as Follows:
1.
2.
As detailed.
By bending
K.
For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each
repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of all returns.
N.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
O.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.8
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
C.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 231
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that are coated or finished
after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means
without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.2
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored
to match finish of railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 6 inches of post.
3.3
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring
material.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 232
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
3.4
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to
railing ends.
B.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Locate brackets as
indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean
water.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 055213
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 233
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
055213 ‐ 234
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
SECTION 057313 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Post-supported railings with glass infill.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided
floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
1.4
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project
site in time for installation.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.5
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
Each type of glass required.
Fittings and brackets.
Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.
Samples need not be full height.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 235
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
D.
1.6
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Preconstruction test reports.
D.
Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
2.
1.8
Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill
area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24
inches in length.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction
testing on laboratory mockups. Payment for these services will be made by Contractor.
Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.
1.
2.
3.
1.9
Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups
will be tested.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 236
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Julius Blum.
Wagner Architectural Glass Systems.
C.R. Laurence Company, Inc.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural
analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1.
2.2
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 45 00
"Quality Control," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate
tensile strength divided by 1.95.
Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as
listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12,
"Structural Properties of Glass."
Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
057313 ‐ 237
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
c.
2.
Infill of Guards:
a.
b.
3.
D.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass
panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1.
2.3
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.
C.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.
D.
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316.
E.
Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.
2.5
GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
B.
Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1
(transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge
compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for
Category II materials.
1.
2.
Glass Color: Clear.
Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 238
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
C.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or
another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label
shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with
which glass complies.
D.
Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended
or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.
2.6
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to
other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
2.7
Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the
design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.
1.
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Wood Rails: Clear, straight-grained hardwood rails secured to [recessed] [exposed] metal
subrail.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Species: White oak.
Finish: Acrylic impregnated.
Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Profile: Rectangular, 2 by 6 inches with edges eased to 1/4-inch radius.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 239
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
H.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
I.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
J.
Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
K.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.
L.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
M.
For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 6 inches long with
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal
plate forming bottom closure.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 240
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
2.9
GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on
glazing panels.
1.
B.
2.10
Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels for both straight and curved sections.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half
of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
C.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.11
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
C.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
D.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 241
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
3.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.2
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match
finish of railings.
B.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 6 inches of post.
3.3
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring
material.
D.
Leave anchorage joint exposed with 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post.
E.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1.
F.
For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 242
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
3.4
INSTALLING GLASS PANELS
A.
Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
B.
3.5
Attach base channel to structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated and assembled glass panels.
Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in
position.
Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing
components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field.
Protect edges from damage.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and to
prepare test reports.
B.
Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing
assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the
completed Work. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance
with performance requirements.
C.
Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and comply with
specified requirements.
D.
Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and
wiping dry.
B.
Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial
Completion.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 243
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05 73 13
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057313 ‐ 244
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following items made from formed metal:
1.
2.
1.2
Aluminum 3003-H14 perforated metal.
Aluminum 3003-H14 sheet metal.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For materials and components of formed-metal fabrications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to
other Work. Show coordination for formed-metal fabrications housing items specified in other
Sections. Plans shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 1/2” = 1’-0”. Elevations shall be drawn
at a scale of not less than 1" = 1'-0". Details shall be drawn at a scale of not less than 6" = 1'-0".
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
1.3
Sections of linear shapes.
Samples of welded joints showing quality of workmanship and color matching of
materials.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator and finisher. Provide list of completed projects
within 20 mile radius of site.
B.
Welding certificates.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative metal similar to that
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as
sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 245
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
D.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1.
E.
1.5
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped
together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they
stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B.
Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop
drawings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
B.
Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that
wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the
effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ALUMINUM
A.
Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and
finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each
aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.
B.
Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
C.
Extruded Structural Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.
D.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003-H14.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 246
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
2.2
FABRICATION
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble formed-metal fabrications in shop to greatest extent possible.
Form metal in maximum lengths to minimize joints.
B.
Support joints with concealed stiffeners to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush
alignment.
C.
Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Dress to
produce exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible.
D.
Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials
from direct contact with incompatible materials.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
Aluminum Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, select fasteners of
type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to
other types of construction indicated.
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting components and for attaching decorative metal
items to other work unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
1.
For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be
welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
C.
Intermediate Coats and Topcoats for Steel: Provide products that comply with Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 247
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
2.5
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film
thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. Color and
Gloss: Finish to match Architect’s sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Locate and place aluminum fabrications level, plumb, and in alignment with adjacent
construction.
B.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place
construction.
C.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative metal. Set products
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry,
or similar construction.
D.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated,
uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting, welding, and grinding
are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of decorative metal, restore finishes to eliminate
evidence of such corrective work.
E.
Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with
such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide
new units as required.
F.
Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.
G.
Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove
protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be
performed at same location.
H.
Restore finishes damaged during construction. Return items to the shop; refinish or provide
new units, as required.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 248
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
3.2
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap,
rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
C.
Protect finishes of decorative metal from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by decorative metal fabricator. Remove protective covering at
time of Substantial Completion.
D.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 057500
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 249
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
057500 - 250
Gensler
DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes miscellaneous rough carpentry.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
1.3
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber and plywood; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency that identifies the
grading agency, grade species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2inch nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction; including rooftop
equipment bases and support curbs, cant cleats, blocking, and nailers.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061053 - 251
Gensler
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
B.
2.3
For items of dimension lumber size, provide mixed southern pine complying with SPIB No. 2
Grade of Better lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content.
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
2.4
Marine Grade Plywood: Made entirely of Douglas-fir or Western Larch. The grade of all plies
of veneer is B or better, which means it may have knots, but no knotholes. The panels are
sanded on both faces, and are also available with Medium Density Overlay (MDO) or High
Density Overlay (HDO) faces. The maximum core-gap size permitted is 1/8 inch. Its exposure
durability rating is EXTERIOR and the glue used is a fully waterproof structural adhesive. It is
considered a “premium” panel grade for use in situations where these characteristics are
required, i.e., for boat hulls and other marine applications where bending is involved.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this Article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with
ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667., type and size best suited for purpose.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272, type and size best suited for purpose.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1, type and size best suited for purpose.
E.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1., type and size best suited for purpose.
F.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers, type and size best suited for purpose.
G.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to
use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061053 - 252
Gensler
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
B.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers,
blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C.
Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
and plywood.
D.
Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized
standards.
E.
Use fasteners of appropriate type and length.
splitting wood.
3.2
Predrill members when necessary to avoid
WOOD BLOCKING, NAILER, AND ROOF CANT INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated
and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other
work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces.
END OF SECTION 061053
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061053 - 253
Gensler
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061053 - 254
Gensler
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SECTION 061533 - WOOD DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Wood decking.
Support framing for elevated decks.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominal or greater in
width.
B.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.
NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products and metal framing anchors.
1.
2.
B.
1.4
For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.
For metal framing anchors. Include installation instructions.
Samples: For decking, not less than 24 inches long, showing the range of variation to be
expected in appearance of decking, including surface texture.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates:
1.
For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and net
amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include
statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before
shipment to Project site.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 255
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
B.
Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed wood products not
marked with grade stamp.
C.
Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Preservative-treated wood products.
Expansion anchors.
Metal framing anchors.
Decking fasteners.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Lumber Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSCaccredited certification body.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air
circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMBER, GENERAL
A.
Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the
applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.
For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, omit grade stamp and provide
certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry wood products.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content:
1.
2.
3.
Boards: 15 percent.
Dimension Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less; 19 percent for more
than 2-inch nominal thickness.
Timber. 19 percent.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 256
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
2.2
WOOD DECKING
A.
Hand select wood for freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would
impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and
wane.
B.
Board Decking: 1-1/4-inch actual thickness by 6 inch width radius-edged S4S boards, with one
face free of planer skip, machine burn, and torn or chipped grain. Pre-grooved on two edges to
receive hidden fasteners.
1.
Species: Ipe
2.
Grade Characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3
Grade A, Clear; Sound.
Straight grained and parallel cut; no quarter sawn surfaces.
No decay, incipient decay, honeycomb, knot holes, pin holes, shakes, splits, or
wane.
No discoloration.
DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A.
Deck Framing: No. 1 grade and the following species:
1.
2.4
Southern pine; SPIB.
PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
A.
Pressure treat boards and dimension lumber with waterborne preservative according to
AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and
Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
B.
Pressure treat timber with waterborne preservative according to AWPA U1; Use
Category UC4a.
C.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Do not use chemicals containing arsenic or chromium.
D.
Use process for dimension lumber that includes water-repellent treatment.
E.
After treatment, redry dimension lumber to 19 percent maximum moisture content.
F.
Mark treated wood with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's
Board of Review.
G.
Application: Treat all dimension lumber unless otherwise indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 257
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches
(38 mm) into wood substrate.
1.
2.
3.
Use fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or
ASTM F 2329 unless otherwise indicated.
For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
For wood decking, use stainless-steel fasteners where fasteners are exposed to view.
B.
Nails: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES AC70.
D.
Wood Screws and Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1, ASME B18.6.1, or ICC-ES AC233.
E.
Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2
hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.6
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated on Drawings. Manufacturer's published values
shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated
by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
B.
Galvanized-Steel
Sheet:
Hot-dip,
zinc-coated
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G185 coating designation.
2.7
steel
sheet
complying
with
CONCEALED DECKING FASTENERS
A.
Deck Clips: Black-oxide-coated, stainless-steel clips designed to be fastened to deck framing
with screws, and to secure decking material with teeth that also provide uniform spacing of
decking material.
1.
Ipe Clip Exteme; The Ipe Clip Fastener Company. Color: Ipe Brown
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 258
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit work
to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install wood decking with crown up (bark side down).
D.
Secure decking to framing with deck clips.
E.
Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
H.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
I.
Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as
indicated, complying with the following:
1.
2.
J.
3.4
ICC-ES AC70 for power-driven fasteners.
"Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.
Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that do not fully
penetrate members where opposite side is exposed to view. Make tight connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads unless
otherwise indicated.
ELEVATED DECK JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than
1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists where
framed into wood supporting members by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated,
by using metal joist hangers. Do not notch joists.
B.
Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers
and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 259
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
C.
Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or girders not less than 4 inches or securely
tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of
joist over supports.
D.
Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at intervals of 96 inches
o.c., between joists.
END OF SECTION 061533
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
061533 ‐ 260
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
WOOD DECKING
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes thermoplastic membrane roofing.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not
permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement,
and exposure to weather without failure.
B.
Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C.
FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply
with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that
are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as
applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.
1.
2.
1.3
Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A- 90.
Hail Resistance: SH.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for roofing system. Include plans, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1.
C.
Samples: Submit samples for the following products:
1.
D.
4-by-4-inch square of sheet roofing, of color specified.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit certificates signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that
roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1.
E.
Base flashings and membrane terminations.
Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.
Product Test Reports: Submit product test reports based on evaluation of comprehensive tests
performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of
roofing system.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 261
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
F.
1.4
Research/Evaluation Reports: Submit research/evaluation report for components of membrane
roofing system.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified installer. Provide list of completed projects within 20 mile
radius of site, including month and year installation was completed.
B.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for roofing system to include in maintenance
manuals.
C.
Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
D.
Inspection Report: Submit a copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of
completed roofing installation.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the thermoplastic membrane roofing work to a single firm
specializing in roofing work so that there will be undivided responsibility in this single firm for
such work. The roofing subcontractor must be a firm experienced with work comparable to the
roofing work shown and specified. Do not engage a firm which is unacceptable to the
manufacturers of the roofing materials to be used. The roofing subcontractor shall engage
experienced and qualified sub-subcontractors to perform any part of the roofing work which he is
not equipped or qualified to perform properly with his own forces. Include the following major
items of work in the roofing subcontractor's scope of work (herein referred to as "roofing work")
for undivided responsibility:
1.
Flashing and Sheet Metal, Section 07 62 00.
B.
Roofing Manufacturer’s Review of Roofing: Before purchasing and delivering roofing
materials to the project site, submit written statement signed by the Contractor, the roofing
installer and the manufacturer’s technical representative, stating that the drawings and
specifications for roofing work have been reviewed with a qualified technical representative of
the selected manufacturer of the roofing assembly and that the manufacturer’s technical
representative has not indicated any further precautions or additional requirements to be
fulfilled in connection with the use of the selected materials on this project.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for membrane
roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane
manufacturer.
E.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method
below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 262
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
1.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
F.
Manufacturers Inspection: The Contractor shall arrange and pay for the manufacturer of the
thermoplastic membrane roofing to inspect, test, and report on all work pertaining thereto. The
Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer’s technical representative to perform the above
duties at the start-up, and thereafter weekly, until the completion of the roofing work. The
Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all recommendations of the manufacturer’s
technical representative to ensure a total and complete installation of the roofing work. The
issuance of the manufacturer’s final inspection report shall be made prior to the acceptance of
the work by the Architect.
G.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with project
requirements pertaining to project management and coordination. Review methods and
procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.6
Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, and
condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for
storing and mixing with other components.
B.
Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1.
Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 263
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
C.
Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D.
Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
B.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.
1.
Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane
accessories roof insulation fasteners cover boards, substrate board, and other components
of membrane roofing system.
2.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this
Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of
membrane roofing system such as roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, and substrate boards, for the following warranty period:
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TPO ROOFING MEMBRANE
A.
Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim
reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.
1.
Manufacturers: One of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
GAF Materials Corporation.
Johns Manville International, Inc. JM PVC Single Ply Roofing System
Sarnafil Inc. G410 feltback fiberglass reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating
Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 264
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
3.
2.2
Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer
for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.
1.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
Adhesives and sealants used within the building waterproofing envelope shall comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.
Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.
Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.
Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.
Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
B.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,
55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent or water-based bonding adhesive for
membrane and base flashings.
D.
Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
E.
Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
F.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosionresistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.
G.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover
strips, and other accessories.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 265
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof
drains are securely clamped in place.
Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with
requirements in Division 5 Section "Steel Roof Decking."
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking
place or when rain is forecast.
C.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3
ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel.
C.
Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D.
Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by
manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to
splice area of membrane roofing.
E.
In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
F.
Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 266
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
G.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
a watertight seam installation.
1.
2.
3.
H.
3.4
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet membrane.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.
Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in
place with clamping ring.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
C.
Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.6
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 267
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty
requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075423
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
075423 - 268
Gensler
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim.
1.
1.2
Single Subcontract Responsibility: Refer to Section 075423, “Thermoplastic Polyolefin
(TPO) Roofing” the requirements of single subcontract responsibilities for sheet metal
flashing and trim.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B.
Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements
resulting from surface temperatures ranging from -50F. to +1800F., without buckling, opening of
joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of
connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear
stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements.
1.
C.
1.3
Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design temperature of +70oF.
Fabrication and installation procedures shall take into account the ambient temperature
range at the time of the respective operations.
Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
underside of roof.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include
the following:
1.
2.
3.
Identify material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.
Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim,
including fasteners, clips, cleats, and attachments to adjoining work.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 269
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the sheet metal flashing and trim work to a firm which is
specialized in the fabrication and installation of sheet metal flashing and trim and who has
successfully installed work similar in design and extent to that required for the project, in not
less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of 5
years.
B.
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Reference Standards: Comply with the industry standard
sources below. Where sheet metal flashing and trim work details have not been specifically
detailed on the drawings or specified the Contractor shall submit, for the Architect’s approval,
proposed sheet metal detailing. The primary source for proposed sheet metal detailing shall
come from the industry standard sources below.
1.
2.
C.
1.5
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
NRCA’s “Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.”
Design Modifications: Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance
requirements and field coordination. Variations in details or materials which do not adversely
affect the appearance, durability or strength of components shall be submitted to the Architect
for review. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and
alignment.
COORDINATION
A.
1.6
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leak proof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
WARRANTY
A.
Furnish written warranty against water leakage resulting from defects of materials or
workmanship. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period, make the
necessary repairs and replacements at the convenience of, and no cost to, the Owner. This
warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against
the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1.
Warranty period shall be 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
2.2
Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, soft annealed, Type 304, with No. 2D finish,
except where harder temper is required for forming or performance.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 270
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A.
Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.
B.
Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft., complying with FS UU-B-790A.
C.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet:
0.76 mm thick, self-adhering, self-sealing,
underlayment consisting of slip-resisting high density cross laminated polyethylene-film top
surface laminated to layer of butyl rubber based adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold
applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
2.3
Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 116 deg C; ASTM D 1970.
Product Reference: Grace, W. R. & Co.; Vycor Ultra.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, separators, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
B.
Fasteners: Provide same metal as flashing/sheet metal, annular threaded nails, self-tapping
screws, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
C.
Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer, use a noncorrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces.
D.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: Silicone, refer to Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.
F.
Roofing Cement: Refer to Section 07 54 23, Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing.
2.4
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with the referenced
standards that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.
Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop
fabrication.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness needed to comply with performance
requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
C.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1.
D.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 271
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
E.
Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in the Work cannot
be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
F.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal
flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored.
Cleats shall be 2 inches (50 mm) wide by nominal 3 inches (75 mm) long typically, minimum
0.0187 inch (0.5 mm) thick, punch for minimum 2 nail or screw holes. One end shall be locked
into seams, or into folded edge of sheet metal sheets, the other end shall be secured with nails or
screws and folded back over nail or screw heads.
2.5
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: Fabricate roof drains and overflow drains of dimensions
shown, or if not shown not less than 6” x 6” cross sectional throat dimensions.
1.
Fabricate roof drains and overflow drains from the following material:
a.
Type 304 Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing
and trim work.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
1.
Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood
substrates at other than copings, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a
slip sheet.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 272
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2.
Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
C.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, and butyl sealant.
E.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
1.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
F.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not
be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
G.
Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
H.
Seal joints with butyl sealant as required for watertight construction.
1.
I.
3.3
Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.
Soldered Joints: Edges of sheets to be soldered shall be in close contact at every point along the
joint before soldering. Edges of all sheets of sheet metal to be soldered shall be tinned with
solder on both sides for a minimum width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Where specified, all seams
shall be thoroughly soldered to produce watertight joints. All soldering shall be done slowly
with well heated metal - to heat sheet thoroughly and to sweat solder completely through full
width of seam. Ample solder shall be used and seam shall show at least one full inch of evenly
flowed solder. Wherever possible all soldering shall be done in flat position. Remove every
trace of flux residue from metal promptly after tinning. Comply with manufacturer's
recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. Clean exposed surfaces of sheet metal
flashing and trim of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion of metal surfaces.
Use soldering irons (3 lb. Minimum each). Do not use abrasives in preparing the sheet metal
surfaces for soldering. All exposed parts of finished soldered joints shall be smooth and free of
smeared solder.
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to the referenced standards and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter
flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B.
Roof drains and overflow drains: Install where indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 273
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
3.4
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and the referenced standards. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line,
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently
watertight.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
B.
On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners,
metal filings, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
C.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
076200 - 274
Gensler
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1.
1.2
Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a.
Joints between metal panels.
b.
Joints between different materials listed above.
c.
Other joints as indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit product data for each joint-sealant product indicated and the following:
1.
Written certification from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products
comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use(s) indicated as
verified through manufacturer’s in-house testing laboratory.
a.
b.
2.
Test results for all job specific concealed and exposed (custom colored) sealants
confirming compatibility and adhesion are mandatory for all materials in contact
with exterior glazing, curtain wall components, metal panels, and architectural
precast concrete, prior to erection of sample installations.
Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing
and protection of each type of sealant.
Laboratory and field test results confirming joint preparation (cleaning/priming),
chemical compatibility, and proper adhesion for specified joint sealant for each of the
joint profiles and substrate materials included in the design of this project.
B.
Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of exposed joint sealant required. Provide
fully cured joint sealant samples in 3/4-inch wide joints 12-inches long formed between two
strips of material to be sealed as they will appear on the Project.
C.
Warranties: Submit specified warranties.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Exposed sealant work shall be performed by one firm specializing in
the installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to this project, in
not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance for a period of
10 years. Concealed sealant work shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor responsible
for the final design, installation, and performance of the respective system.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 275
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant, and each type of structural silicone
adhesive, from a single manufacturer.
C.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing (All Exterior Sealants Only): Submit to
joint sealant manufacturers, prior to full size building sample installation(s), samples of
materials that will contact or affect, by direct or indirect chemical or mechanical means, exterior
wall joint sealants for compatibility and adhesion testing below.
1.
General: Test results confirming compatibility and adhesion are mandatory for all
concealed and exposed sealant materials in contact with exterior steel, exterior aluminum,
other sealants, flashings, metal framing, and shims.
a.
Investigate materials that fail compatibility and adhesion testing and obtain sealant
manufacturer's written recommendations for corrective measures, which may
include the use of primers, cleaners, cleaning measures, curing time, temperature
limitations (surface and air), humidity conditions, moisture content of substrate,
etc.
b.
Definitions:
1)
2)
c.
2.
Compatibility: The capability of the sealant materials and substrates to be
placed in direct contact with each other and maintain their required physical,
chemical and visual qualities with the absence of softening, staining, oil
exudation, discoloration or other detrimental, deleterious or degradative
effects caused by chemical interactions.
Adhesion: The mechanical or chemical ability of the sealant materials and
substrates to adhere or bond together at their interface.
Specimen Sizes and Shapes: As required by the manufacturer's testing laboratory
for the tests listed, unless otherwise specified.
Tests Required:
a.
Adhesion in Peel Testing:
1)
Test Methods:
a)
b)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Comply with ASTM C794 'Adhesion and Peel of Elastomeric Joint
Sealants', modified to include project specific substrates and to report
cohesive or adhesive failure mode. Samples of each exterior precast,
other sealants, flashings, metal framing in contact with the concealed
and exposed sealant materials are required to be tested.
Comply with ASTM C1135 'Determining Tensile Adhesion
Properties of Structural Sealants', modified to include project specific
substrates and the following. Sealant manufacturer’s modified
interpretations of ASTM C1135 will not be permitted. Samples of
each exterior structural glazing and metal framing in contact with the
structural sealant materials are required to be tested. In addition to
the testing being performed under the standard environmental
conditioning required of ASTM C1135; the Contractor shall prepare,
079200 - 276
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
and test, additional specimens for each project specific environmental
condition under which the sealant will be applied and cured.
2)
3)
All specimens shall be tested for primed and unprimed performance.
Report:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
b.
Compatibility Testing: This test method describes an accelerated laboratory
procedure to determine if the proposed sealant materials and substrates are
compatible.
1)
Test Methods:
a)
b)
2)
3)
Comply with ASTM C1248 'Staining of Porous Substances by Joint
Sealants', modified to include project specific substrates. Samples of
each exterior precast, and other sealants, in contact with the concealed
and exposed sealant materials are required to be tested.
Comply with ASTM C1087 'Determining Compatibility of Liquid
Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing
Systems', modified to include project specific substrates. Sealant
manufacturer’s modified interpretations of ASTM C1087 will not be
permitted. Samples of each exterior dry glazing gasket (if any),
spacers, shims and setting blocks proposed for use in contact with the
structural sealant materials are required to be tested.
All specimens for ASTM C1248 testing shall be tested for primed and
unprimed performance.
Report:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Date(s) of testing.
Project identification.
Test method (as identified herein).
Specimen substrate(s) tested.
Sealant(s) tested.
Substrate preparation (cleaning materials, methods and primers used).
Test results for each specimen tested (type of failure - adhesive or
cohesive - force measured at failure in pounds per lineal inch).
Recommendations. Where testing shows equal or better performance
without a primer, a primer will not be required.
Additional remarks, if any (i.e., color change of substrate or sealant,
voids in the body of the sealant when examined in cross section,
blistering, bubbling, sealant softening, or evidence of improperly
mixed or cured sealant).
Date(s) of testing.
Project identification.
Test method (as identified herein).
Substrate preparation (cleaning materials, methods and primers used).
Name of sealant, type of sealant, rated movement capability and
identifying batch number.
Substrates used.
Testing Equipment: Manufacturer of apparatus, type of lamps.
079200 - 277
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
c.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing exposed exterior
elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Conduct field tests for each type of exposed exterior elastomeric sealant and
joint substrate indicated.
The Architect and manufacturer's technical representative, shall be present
when joints are tested.
Test Method: Test exterior elastomeric joint sealants by hand-pull method
described below:
a)
b)
c)
d)
5)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Statement describing curing conditions if other than at standard
conditions.
Description of, and reasons for, any variations from the test
procedure.
Description of test effects observed, such as change in finished
surface appearance, discoloration into the substrate, adhesion failure,
or other characteristics; average measurement of stain width and
depth.
Recommendations. Where testing shows equal or better performance
without a primer, a primer will not be required.
Additional remarks, if any. (i.e., color change of substrate or sealant,
voids in the body of the sealant when examined in cross section,
blistering, bubbling, sealant softening, or evidence of improperly
mixed or cured sealant).
Install joint sealants in 60-inch long joints using same materials and
methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation in
accordance with manufacturer’s final laboratory testing
recommendations. Allow sealants to cure.
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two
cuts approximately 3-inch long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut
at one end. Place a mark 1-inch from cross-cut end of 3-inch piece.
Use fingers to grasp 3-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and
1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle to the joint and
hold sealant in this position for ten seconds; following the ten second
time duration pull sealant at a 180 degree angle parallel to the joint
and hold the sealant in this position for ten seconds. Pull sealant
away from joint to the distance recommended by sealant
manufacturer for testing adhesion.
Repair joint as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
Sealants evidencing adhesive failure with one or both substrates during
testing, and/or a level of elongation prior to failure that is not in compliance
with the performance characteristics specified herein or otherwise published
by the sealant manufacturer will be subject to rejection by the Architect.
Discontinue use of joint sealants, cleaning agents, primers, and application
methods associated with failures documented during testing and
immediately notify manufacturer and Architect for further review.
079200 - 278
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
3.
D.
Report: Provide written summary of each compatibility and adhesion test.
Preinstallation Conference: As soon as possible after award of exterior joint sealant work, but
no later than 2 weeks before the installation of the joint sealants, meet with Installer, Owner,
Architect, installers of the substrate construction, and other work adjoining joint sealants and
representatives of any other entities directly concerned with joint sealant performance. Conduct
conference at Project site to comply with the following:
1.
Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to sealing substrates, including but
not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
1.4
Discuss substrates to be sealed, discuss as fabricated and installed condition of
substrate, sealant application, flashing details, and other preparatory work.
Review joint sealant requirements: drawings, specifications, and other contract
documents.
Review required submittals, both complete and incomplete.
Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for coping with
unfavorable conditions.
Review schedule and intended sequence of work.
Review changes arising from the pre-construction mock-up and performance
testing program, if any.
Review the purpose and method of integration of field quality assurance programs
developed by Contractor and suppliers/subcontractors responsible for the Work.
Record discussion and furnish copy of recorded discussions to each attendee.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent
their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the
following conditions:
1.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2.
When joint substrates are wet.
Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths
are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 279
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
C.
1.6
Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants
capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealant work which has failed to provide a weathertight system within
specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Manufacturer's Warranties: Written warranties (weatherseal and stain resistance),
signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to
repair or replace those that fail to provide airtight and watertight joints, or fail in adhesion,
cohesion, abrasion-resistance, stain-resistance, weather resistance, or general durability or
appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in the manufacturer's data as an
inherent quality of the material within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as stated
by sealant manufacturer's published data, and as substantiated by the manufacturer for each
application through testing.
B.
Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide manufacturer's standard color of sealant which has
the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints
provide custom colors to match Architect's samples of the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.2
Exterior field applied paints and coatings, each color.
Metal panels, each color.
Other exterior materials, each color as indicated.
Manufacturer's Representative: Do not use elastomeric sealant produced by a manufacturer
who will not agree to send a qualified technical representative to the project site when
requested, for the purpose of rendering advice concerning the proper installation of
manufacturer's materials.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants for Vertical Applications (Non-Sag):
1.
Typical Exterior Joints:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 280
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
a.
Properties:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Products and Manufacturers: One of the following:
1)
2)
3)
2.3
Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 25 or
50; use NT, M, A and O.
Performance: Non-stain, non-bleed, non-streaking to sealed and adjacent
substrates. The minimum peel adhesion value after 7 day immersion shall
not be less than 13 pli when tested in strict accordance with ASTM C794
Adhesion in Peel.
Cure System and Oil Content: Neutral-cure, low or medium modulus
system specifically manufactured with controlled oil content to eliminate oil
migration into sealed substrates and residue rundown over and onto adjacent
substrates.
756 SMS; Dow Corning.
Spectrem 3 or Spectrem 4-TS (Use Spectrem 1 for metal to metal joints);
Tremco, an RPM Co.
Silpruf NB SCS 9000 (use Silpruf SCS 2000 for metal to metal joints); GE
Advanced Materials – Silicones.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible
with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with
ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select shape and density of cylindrical sealant
backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in specific condition of
use in each case.
1.
Type C: Closed-cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is
nonabsorbent to liquid water and gas, non-outgassing in unruptured state; one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
Type B: Bi-cellular reticulated, polymeric foam material with a surface skin,
nonoutgassing, with a density of between 1.5-3.0 pcf per ASTM D1622 and minimum
tensile strength of greater than 29 – 38 psi per ASTM D1623, and with water absorption
less than 0.058 oz./cubic inch per ASTM C1016; one of the following:
a.
b.
C.
HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc.
Sonneborn Closed-Cell Backer-Rod; BASF.
SOFROD; Nomaco, Inc.
Sonneborn Sonolastic Soft Backer-Rod; BASF.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, TFE fluorocarbon, or other plastic tape recommended by
sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 281
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure.
Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by joint
sealant manufacturer for the substrates indicated to be sealed.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and which
will not stain nor mar the finish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), oil, grease,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical
abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed
air.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean metal and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants.
Joint Priming (Elastomeric Sealants Only): Prime joint substrates with primers selected through
the preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing. Apply primer to comply with joint
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 282
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do
not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
3.3
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following
requirements:
1.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
a.
b.
c.
2.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and back of joints.
Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant
backings are installed.
1.
Apply sealants in the depth shown or, if none is shown, apply in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and the following general proportions and limitations:
a.
b.
2.
D.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Trim for tight fit around
obstructions or elements penetrating the joint.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry sealant backings.
Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a
depth equal to 50% of the joint width, but not less than and not more than 1/2 inch.
Apply non-elastomeric sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
Pour self leveling sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform, beads to eliminate air pockets; and to
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from
surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to the profile shown, or if none is shown, tool slightly
concave.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 283
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
Provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet.
Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess
sealant or compound by locating the compound or sealant well back into joint wherever
possible.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test exterior wall joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as
follows:
1.
B.
Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of exposed exterior
wall sealant and joint substrate.
Field adhesion testing of sealants shall take place in the presence of a qualified technical
representative of the sealant manufacturer.
1.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts
approximately 3 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end.
Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 3-inch piece.
Use fingers to grasp 3-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch
mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle to the joint in the direction of side cuts and
hold the sealant in this position for 10 seconds; following the 10 second time
duration pull sealant at a 180 degree angle parallel to the joint and hold the sealant
in this position for 10 seconds. Pull sealant away from joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesion.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately.
Do this by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and
then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
The sealant manufacturer’s qualified technical representative shall record test results, and
observations of joint and sealant conditions, in a field adhesion test log.
Repair joint sealants pulled from test area as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
The sealant manufacturer shall provide written documentation of changes in product
and/or application method required to address sealant failure, observe and document
retesting as required by the Architect, and provide a written statement of compliance with
applicable warranties.
Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing will be considered satisfactory. Remove
sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 284
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 079200
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 285
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
079200 - 286
Gensler
JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 099600 - HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance coating systems
on the following substrates:
B.
Exterior Substrates:
a.
b.
C.
1.2
Structural steel framing and secondary steel framing
All other exposed steel
Related Sections include Section 051213 – “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish
coat indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
1.3
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and
locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Material Performance Criteria:
B.
Products: Provide certified test reports when submitting products other than those specified
herein the specification. Test reports shall indicate the test method, system and requirements for
those products being submitted, and shall meet or exceed the test criteria and performance
values of the specified coatings herein.
C.
Applicator Qualifications:
D.
Preparation and Workmanship: A firm or individual with a minimum of (5) years experienced
in applying coatings similar in material design, and extent to those indicated for a particular
project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service
performance.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 287
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
E.
Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality
standards for materials and execution.
F.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each
type of coating and substrate.
a.
b.
Provide samples of a section of the steel/metal surface to be coated.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
G.
Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been
activated.
H.
Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
I.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
J.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer’s name and label and the following information.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Product name or title of material.
Product description (generic classification or binder type)
Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture.
Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
VOC content.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 450 F.
C.
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
D.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 288
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
1.6
PRODUCT WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer’s (15) year color and gloss, crack, check, peel warranty at the completion
of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service on this project.
Basis of Design is the Tnemec Company, Inc. and products are listed to establish a standard of
quality. Equivalent materials of other manufacturer's may be submitted a minimum ten days
prior to bid date on written approval of the Architect.
B.
Materials specified herein shall not preclude consideration of equivalent or superior materials.
Requests for substitution shall be submitted to the architect a minimum ten days prior to bid
date in accordance with the general construction documents and in compliance with substitution
procedures in Section 01 60 00 of this Project Manual.
C.
Requests for substitution shall include evidence of satisfactory past performance on substrates
that are listed herein.
D.
Substitutions will not be considered that change the generic type, number of coats or do not
meet specified total dry film thickness.
E.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Materials Compatibility: Provide shop and field primers, and finish-coat materials that are
single source and compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
B.
Requirements: Provide as listed below:
C.
OTC/VOC Requirements: Industrial & Exterior – 340 g/l
2.3
FINISH SYSTEM
A.
Primer: A two-component, moisture-cured, zinc-rich aromatic urethane primer. The primer
shall also conform to SSPC Paint 20, Type II.
1.
B.
Tnemec; H90-97 Tneme-Zinc.
Intermediate Coat: Inorganic hybrid water-based epoxy intermediate coating compatible with
specified primer and top coat.
1.
Tnemec; Series 27-color W.B. Typoxy.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 289
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
C.
Top Coat: A metal flake containing pigmented fluoropolymer top coating compatible with
specified intermediate coat. Provide in one custom color matching Architect’s sample. Refer to
Section 05 12 13 – “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel.”
1.
2.5
Tnemec; Series 1071 color Fluoronar.
FLUOROPOLYMER FINISH COATING
A.
Fluoropolymer, Pigmented & Metallic Coating (Non-Flat, Finish Coat)
1.
2.
a.
b.
3.
Product: Tnemec Series 1071V Fluoronar (Exterior Finish Coat)
Finishes:
Series 1071V – Semi-Gloss
Color: Match Architect’s sample.
Properties:
a.
Solids by Volume:
i)
ii)
iii)
iii)
b.
VOC:
i)
ii)
iii)
iii)
4.
1070V: 51.0 +/- 2.0%
1071V: 56.0 +/- 2.0%
1072V: 54.0 +/- 2.0%
1078: 54.0 +/- 2.0%
Series 1070V: 0.83 lbs/gallon (99 grams/litre)
Series 1071V: 0.81 lbs/gallon (97 grams/litre)
Series 1072V: 0.77 lbs/gallon (93 grams/litre)
Series 1078: 3.40 lbs/gallon (407 grams/litre)
Performance Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Abrasion: ASTM D4060, (CS-17 Wheel, 1,000 grams load). No more than 103 mg
loss after 1,000 cycles.
Adhesion: ASTM D 4541 (Method B, Type II Tester). No less than 1,333 psi (9.19
MPa) pull, average of three tests.
Adhesion: ASTM D 4541 (Method E, Type V Tester). No less than 1,930 psi (13.3
MPa) pull, average of three tests.
Exterior Exposure: Exposed at 45 degrees facing south. No blistering, cracking,
rusting or delamination of film. No less than 87% gloss retention (8.9 units gloss
change) and 2.99 DED FMCII (MacAdam units) color change after 24 months.
Exterior Exposure: ASTM D 4141, Method C (EMMAQUA). No blistering,
cracking or chalking. No less than 96% gloss retention (3.2 units gloss change) and
0.18 DED Hunter Lab color change after 1,260 M/J m2 EMMAQUA exposure,
average of five tests in five colors.
Flexibility: ASTM D 522 (Method A – Conical Mandrel). No less than 14.83%
elongation average of three tests.
099600 - 290
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.6
Graffiti Resistance: The following graffiti materials applied to coating and allowed
to remain for 7 days.
Reagent
Series 680
Xylene
MEK
Acrylic Spray Paint
Removal
Removal
Removal
Epoxy Spray Paint
Removal
Removal
Removal
Markette Marker
Removal
Removal
Removal
Ball Point Ink
Removal
Removal
Removal
Crayon
Removal
Removal
Removal
Lipstick
Removal
Removal
Removal
Some slight gloss loss and/or softening may occur depending on the amount of
effort required for removal of the graffiti and length of exposure of the underlying
coating to the cleaning solvents.
Hardness: ASTM D 3363. No gouging or scratching with an 8H or less pencil.
Humidity: ASTM D 4585. No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of film
after 3,000 hours exposure.
Impact: ASTM D 2794. No visible cracking or delamination of film after 34.6
inch/pounds (3.9J) or less direct impact.
QUV: ASTM D 4587 (UVA-340 Bulbs, Cycle 4:8 hours UV/4 hours
condensation). No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 93% gloss
retention (5.7 units gloss change) and 2.21 DED FMCII ( MacAdam Units) color
change after 10,000 hours exposure, average of five tests in five colors. No
blistering, cracking, or chalking. No less than 60% gloss retention (31.4 units gloss
change) and 1.89 DED FMCII
(MacAdam Units) color change after 25,000
hours exposure, average of five tests in five colors.
Salt Spray (Fog): ASTM B 117. No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of
film. No more than 1/32 inch rust creepage at scribe after 10,000 hours exposure.
No blistering, cracking, rusting or delamination of film. No more than 1/8 inch rust
creepage at scribe after 10,000 hours exposure. No blistering, cracking, rusting or
delamination of film. No more than 1/16 inch rust creepage at scribe after 10,000
hours exposure.
Weatherometer Exposure: ASTM D 5031. No blistering, cracking, or chalking. No
less than 92% gloss retention (6 units gloss change) and 0.73 DED Hunter Lab
Scale color change after 5,000 hours exposure.
SHOP SURFACE PREPARATION
A.
Ferrous Metals – SSPC-SP6 Commercial Blast Cleaned steel
B.
Deliver steel components to the site with shop applied primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 291
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
C.
Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
D.
Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2
FIELD PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.
B.
Clean using methods recommended in writing by coating manufacturer.
C.
Blast clean according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning or SP11 Needle
Gun to Bare Metal with a (1) mil profile.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
B.
Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
C.
Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with
prime coat only.
D.
Coat backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match
exposed surfaces.
E.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
F.
If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
G.
Apply coatings by spray application to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp
glass lines and color breaks.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner
deems necessary during the period when coatings are being applied:
B.
Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample coating material being
used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in presence of Contractor.
C.
Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with specified requirements.
D.
Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used
do not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying-coating
materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 292
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on
recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
END OF SECTION 099600
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 293
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
099600 - 294
Gensler
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
SECTION 101400 - SPECIALTIES (SIGNAGE)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.3
Description of all materials, fabrication standards, and installation services for the sign system
defined within the Design Intent Document.
GENERAL
A.
Substitutions: In order to substitute materials or methods, prior approval must be obtained at
least 72 hours before Bid opening. Approved substitutions shall be shared with other bidders.
After execution of the contract, all substitutions shall be governed by the Specifications.
B.
Approvals: All submittals and articles of any kind necessary for the work are subject to
approval by Project Architect and Owner.
C.
Coordination: The Sign Fabricator will coordinate on-site work, electrical service and final sign
placement with the Construction Manager for each parcel of land. Where structural support
for signage is required, it shall be provided and installed by the Sign Fabricator, and all
adjacent landscaping, irrigation, and other damages caused by installation, repaired as required.
D.
Sign Definitions, Descriptions and Characteristics: Refer to Design Intent Documents, Message
Schedule and Sign Location Plans for precise definition and proposed message of each sign.
E.
Time of Completion: Sign Fabricator shall complete all work in accordance with schedule
milestones. All activities shall be sequenced to coordinate with field progress.
F.
Pre-Construction Conference: A pre-construction meeting will be held with representatives
from Owner, Sign Fabricator and Project Architect to establish the procedure for
communication and coordination with the General Contractor or Construction Manager and
subsequent trades.
G.
Field Measurements: Measure in-place any existing construction as needed for fabrication and
execution. No changes to fees or schedule will be allowed for differences between Design
Intent dimensions and field measurements.
H.
Electrical Service: Requirements shall be determined as soon as possible. Electrical service
must be coordinated with service available at each sign location. Service may vary according to
location. Only new electrical components and respective lamps shall be utilized. Reasonable
access for maintenance of components and lamps is required.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 295
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
I.
Instruction: Prior to acceptance, establish with Owner an instruction and training program for
Owner personnel. Notify Owner in writing at least seven (7) days prior to commencement of
the program by providing an outline of topics indexed to the Maintenance and Operating
Manual. Provide a trained instructor. Instruction and training shall include, but are not limited
to, procedures to be followed in the normal day-to-day maintenance and operation of the work.
J.
Permits: Sign Fabricator shall make all submittals for permits; shall be responsible for paying
all fees, making adjustments as required, or any task necessary for obtaining local building and
installation permits for the proper execution of the work. All such permits must be obtained
prior to fabrication of the sign item. Copies of all permits shall be delivered to the Owner.
K.
Markings and Labels: Visible labels are not allowed except as required. When necessary, locate
markings, labels, manufacturer names and other identifications so as to be concealed from
public view.
L.
Final Location Of Signs: The location of signs as shown on the Sign Location Plans is for
general reference only and in some cases is not representative of the exact final location. Final
locations of signs shall be field located in coordination with Project Architect and Owner at the
site. Sign Fabricator shall arrange for meetings at the site to accommodate direction of final
locations according to project schedule.
M.
Discrepancies: Any discrepancies in the drawings or graphic message schedule, in field
dimensions or conditions and/or changes required in construction details shall be resolved by
Project Architect. Sign Fabricator shall advise Project Architect as these conditions are
discovered. Sign Fabricator shall not resolve these issues independently.
N.
Rights to Design: Sign Fabricator may not manufacture, reproduce, or exhibit these designs, or
modify them for any other purpose outside of this current contract without written approval of
Project Architect and Owner.
O.
Structural Documents: Provide signed and sealed drawings for structural components as
required.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
Comply with requirements of Division 01 33 00, “Submittals”.
B.
International Building Code (IBC) 2006.
C.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) "Metal Finishes
Manual."
D.
American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code, Steel," and AWS
D1.2 "Structural Welding Code, Aluminum".
1.5
SUMMARY OF WORK
A.
Sign Fabricator will be held to furnish all work as specified in the Design Intent Documents,
Specifications, Message Schedule, and Sign Location Plans as provided by Project. This
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 296
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
includes but is not limited to the following: all fabrication, installation, structural engineering,
schedule and sequence coordination, anchor and support devices, work process and product of
subcontractors, and all accessories required in order to produce the complete sign system
described.
B.
Scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Exterior signs with permanent foundations, including site preparation and restoration in the
immediate work areas.
2. Exterior signs coordinated with and attached to architectural elements and other features
specified by others.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Furnish plans, elevations, sections, and details of fabrication and erection for
all items outlined in Design Intent Documents. Include all materials, shapes, dimensions,
finishes, mounting heights, method of anchoring and connections, and mounting methods.
Provide notations for reinforcement, structural members, supports, surfaces, finishes, materials,
and accessories.
B.
Sign Layouts: Provide full-scale layouts for each sign type including text, symbol artwork, Type
2 Braille, and any other graphic elements as solid black with sign face outlined. Provide scaled
layouts for all signs. All Sign Layouts should indicate the following: complete layout including
proper character spacing and heights; dimensions of all layout elements relative to the sign
panel and to one another and exact typeface and letter spacing.
C.
Electrical: Provide wiring diagrams and electrical load requirements for signs with illuminated
characters, panels or faces.
D.
Schedule: Submit a project schedule that conforms to project occupation and opening dates.
Include submittals, review, production milestones, shipping, on-site preparation, installation
and follow-up.
E.
Materials Samples: Submit per schedule for approval. Provide three (3) sets of 10" x 10" nonreturnable samples of all materials, colors, and finishes as specified. Provide three (3) complete
sets of all exposed hardware and fasteners to be used.
F.
Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner, in manufacturer's original packaging and store at the project
site where directed: one (1) gallon of each finish paint color for touch-up purposes and paint
formula index for every color used. Provide packaging and protection for extended storage.
Deliver to the owner, all molds or forms made uniquely for, and used to, produce this signage.
G.
Supplementary Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's literature describing the general
properties of each product to be used.
H.
Structural Calculations: Provide drawings with engineers stamp for engineer registered in the
state where work is to be installed. Provide exterior sign assemblies designed, tested, and
installed to withstand positive and negative wind loads per site specific code requirements as
determined by a licensed professional structural engineer, registered in the State of Maryland.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 297
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
Furnish engineering calculations to show that maximum stresses and signage support system,
do not exceed specified performance requirements under full design loading. Limit deflections
on signage members under full wind loading to 1/4-inch. Calculations shall be prepared and
sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Maryland.
I.
Qualification Data: For installer, suppliers, and subcontractors. Describe nature and extent of
project involvement of each. Use standard AIA form. Qualification Data must be provided ten
(10) working days prior to commencement of work. Relevant sign types for each must be
referenced.
J.
Signing Warranty: Submit to Client for Owner's documentation, a 1 year written warranty
(effective the date of final acceptance) covering all signs, signed by the Sign Fabricator and
Installer, agreeing to repair or replace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials
or workmanship or installation. Upon notification of such defects, within the warranty period,
make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience of Owner.
K.
Linear Polyurethane Paint Factory Finish Warranty: Submit to Construction Manager for
Owner's documentation. Furnish 5 year written warranty, warranting that the factory-applied
linear polyurethane finishes will not develop excessive fading or excessive non uniformity of
color or shade, and will not crack, peel, pit, corrode or otherwise fail as a result of defects in
materials or workmanship within the following defined limits. Upon notification of such
defects, within the warranty period, make necessary repairs or replacement at the convenience
of Client.
1."Excessive Fading": A change in appearance, which is perceptible and objectionable as
determined when visually, compared with the original color range standards.
2."Excessive Non-Uniformity": Non-uniform fading to the extent that adjacent panels have a
color difference greater than the original acceptable range of color.
3."Will Not Pit or Otherwise Corrode": No pitting or other type of corrosion, discernible from
a distance of 10' (3m), resulting from the natural elements in the atmosphere at the
project site.
L.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals: Submit two (2) copies for Owner's documentation and
one (1) copy to Project Architect. Furnish complete manuals describing the materials, devices
and procedures to be followed in operating, cleaning and maintaining the work. Include
manufacturers' brochures and parts lists describing the actual materials used in the work,
including metal alloys, finishes, electrical components and other major components. Include in
the manual samples of all vinyls or films used, samples of all paints used, and all paint
formulas used. Assemble manuals for component parts into single binders identified for each
system.
M.
Burn-in Certification: Submit certification that fabricator has completed the burn-in of all
illuminating signs as required under Section 1.3 F.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mock-ups and Prototypes: Provide a mock-up of all sign types listed below. Utilize the same
materials and installation methods in the mock-up as intended for the final work. Schedule the
installation so that the mock-up may be examined, and any necessary adjustments made, prior
to commencing fabrication of the final work. Replace unsatisfactory items as directed. When
accepted, mock-up shall serve as the standard for materials, workmanship, and appearance for
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 298
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
such work throughout the project. Approved samples WILL be returned for installation into
project.
1.Pylon
a. Three (3) top logo panels
b. Three (3) middle map panels
c. Three (3) middle rules panels
2.Three (3) 3’ sections of Large Scale Commemoration
3.Three (3) Education Sign/Medium Commemorations
4.Three (3) Trail Mile Markers
5.Three (3) Tree Commemoration and mounting plates
B.
Work-In-Progress Approvals: Scheduled or unscheduled viewings at the shop or factory may
be initiated as deemed necessary to ensure continued quality control and make any adjustments
required during fabrication. Unsatisfactory items are to be corrected by the Sign Fabricator as
directed. All subcontractors shall be identified; contact names, numbers and addresses shall be
provided with reference to sign types they will be fabricating.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain each material type, shape or size from one source from a single
manufacturer.
D.
Materials: Cut all required faces, trim, or continuous surfaces from a single piece of base
material unless overall size cannot be obtained from a single piece due only to its size.
Materials shall be new, un-used in any previous work, free of imperfections of surface,
substance, manufacture, or damage from shipping or handling. Materials shall be utilized in the
fabrication process only for the purpose intended by the original manufacturer or supplier.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal,
State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, include state and federal ADA
requirements as applicable. Obtain necessary approvals and permits from all such authorities as
required.
B.
Interior Code Signage: N/A
1.9
QUALITY OF WORMANSHIP
A.
Sign Fabricator: The Sign Fabricator shall be responsible for the quality of all materials and
workmanship required for the execution of this contract including materials and workmanship
of any firm or individual who act as Sign Fabricator's sub-contractor. Sign Fabricator shall be
responsible for providing up-to-date drawings, specifications, graphic schedule, etc., to all subcontractors. Sign Fabricator shall provide a supervisor who will be assigned for the duration of
the project.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Installer shall provide workers trained and supervised by signage
manufacturer. An authorized representative from the Sign Fabricator shall be present for the
duration of the on-site installation.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 299
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
C.
Fabrication Qualifications: Fabrication and installation shall be conducted by trained individuals
working under the direct and continual supervision of the Sign Fabricator or sub-contractors as
disclosed on the bid form. All materials shall remain under the direct control of the Sign
Fabricator or his disclosed sub-contractors during the entire fabrication and installation
process.
D.
Templates: Templates will be required for certain sign items noted on design drawings.
Templates must be created only after complete installation of finish surfaces to receive
installed sign.
E.
Sign Locations: Sign locations shall accommodate full door swing where applicable, in addition
to required mounting height and position requirements.
F.
Dimension: Written dimensions on drawings shall have precedence over scaled dimensions.
Sign Fabricator shall verify and be responsible for all dimensions and conditions shown by
these drawings. Shop details must be approved prior to fabrication.
2.0 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHARACTERS AND LETTERING
A. The Sign Fabricator shall be responsible for the quality control of all characters and lettering. All
characters shall be crisp, sharp, free of nicks, ragged edges and discontinuous curves. Letterforms
with burrs, saw marks, rounded positive or negative corners, nicked, cut, or ragged edges, etc.,
will not be accepted. All letterforms shall be so aligned as to maintain a baseline parallel to the
sign format unless otherwise indicated in the Design Intent Documents. Margins must be
maintained as specified in Design Intent Documents.
B. All characters and lettering shall conform to approved typeface, weight and letter spacing. No
substitutions of typeface foundry, brand or version or implementation technique will be accepted
without prior approval.
C. Cast Characters: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with smooth
flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes,
and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
D. Cutout Characters: Cut characters from solid plate of thickness and metal indicated. Produce
precisely cut characters with square cut, smooth edges.
E. Fabricated Characters: Fabricate letters and numbers to required sizes and styles, using metals
and thickness indicated. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from
warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories.
2.2
ILLUSTRATION, PHOTOGRAPHY, IMAGERY, ARTWORK AND OTHER GRAPHICS
A. Vinyl Die Cut Graphics: All precision machine-cut vinyl typography or graphics shall be
executed in such a manner that all edges and corners of finished letterforms are true and clean.
Cut-out characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils (0.076 mm) with pressuresensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to exposed face of panel sign, or glass surfaces. Apply
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 300
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
protective, ultraviolet-inhibiting, clear coating to vinyl characters applied to any painted surface.
The application of all vinyl characters shall be smooth, free of air bubbles, ridges, creases,
distortion or other imperfections. Application technique must follow manufacturers
recommendations. Surface coating shall dry for a minimum 4 days (medium humidity) prior to
application of vinyl graphics. Avoid air pockets caused by out-gassing or curing of the base
coating upon which self-adhesive vinyl is applied.
B. Artwork and Imagery: All artwork shall be digitally generated or scanned, high-resolution
images. Original raster images will be provided as original reflective art or digital art at
approximately 8" x 10" at 300 dpi. The final production must achieve 100 dpi at full size. Sign
Fabricator shall assume scanning, photo retouching and color correction of images is included.
Architect will provide low-resolution file of photo cropping, placement and color target.
Contractor to make final adjustments within high-resolution file.
C. Screen Printing: Photo screen printed images shall be sharp without serrated or irregular edges,
exactly true to the letter and design form. Screen printed images shall be applied to the base
surface within 72 hours of base surface coating application.
2.3
SIGN MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Contact adhesive or foam tape, shall be used in conjunction with silicone adhesives
for installation of wall signs, in minimum thicknesses required. Use vertical bands of doublesided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinylcovered or rough surfaces unless otherwise indicated. Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended
in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl covered surfaces. Use
double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place
until adhesive has fully cured.
B. Metals, General: Standard thickness for all sheet/panel surfaces shall be .125" minimum unless
otherwise noted. Contractor shall recommend and use material thickness sufficient to prevent any
waviness, "oil canning" or warping of the surface. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or
blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished
finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. When
polishing, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces
chemically clean.
C. Metals, Aluminum: Aluminum shall be suitable for ornamental, architectural work. Surface finish
shall be smooth, free of extrusion marks or imperfections. Alloy shall be selected to meet the
structural requirements of the specific application. Aluminum shall not directly contact any other
materials. Contact surfaces are to be dielectrically separated with a zinc-chromate coating,
bituminous paint, or a gasket.
D. Metals, Stainless Steel: Stainless steel shall be suitable for ornamental and architectural work.
Surface finish shall be smooth, free of all extrusion marks or imperfections. Alloy shall be
selected to meet the structural requirements of specific application.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 301
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
E. Metals, Structural: Structural metal for concealed framing shall be of galvanized rolled steel or
equal as required to satisfy structural requirements.
F. Acrylic Sheet Plastic: Use Plexiglas II as manufactured by Rohm and Haas Co., or equal.
Thickness shall be as indicated on drawings or not less than 1/8" thick. Contractor shall provide
color and finish samples of all plastics for approval before fabrication; no substitution in color,
thickness, or finish of plastics will be accepted without written approval. All plastics shall be of
uniform color, translucence and illumination, as supplied by manufacturer. Any exposed edges of
acrylic shall be finished so as no saw marks are visible. Sheet materials indicated as "clear" shall
be supplied as colorless sheet.
G. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy must conform to
current ADA Accessibility Guidelines. Tactile lettering must be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille.
Tactile graphics, lettering and/or Braille must be permanent--routed and chemically fastened in
place.
H. Flexible Sign Face Substrate: All substrate shall be of uniform color, translucence and thickness,
as supplied by manufacturer. Any exposed edges of substrate shall be finished so as no saw marks
are visible.
I.
Concrete: Installation of anchoring devices into concrete slab shall be adjusted to avoid
penetrating existing reinforcing conduit, etc. contained in the concrete slab.
J.
Decal or Transfer: Printed paper or vinyl suitable for reproducing the design onto material
indicated, shall be used as required.
K. Fasteners: Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, anchors and other devices required to complete the work.
Same basic metal or alloy as the metal fastened, and finished to match in color and texture.
Stainless steel alloy shall be used to join dissimilar materials. Use of exposed fasteners is
prohibited unless otherwise indicated on the design drawings. Use of fasteners, anchors,
adhesives and other attachments shall be in accordance with requirements and recommendations
of the manufacturer of the device or material.
L. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) Construction: Custom engineered one-piece seamless FRP
monolith consisting of initial gel coat sealing layer with multilayers of (translucent) thermoset
polyester resin and (translucent) glass fiber strands molded in forms maintaining module
configuration to 0.125 minimum thickness with 3/16" radius all edges. Core material shall be
fully encapsulated resin impregnated honeycomb (expanded foam) as required. All FRP signs
shall be finish coated with UV inhibitors and crystal clear matte polyurethane sealers. Sign
Fabricator to provide Client with instructions for maintenance and waxing of FRP signs. In the
case of internally illuminated FRP signs, core will be hollow within structural frame to secure
FRP molded panels and house illumination fixtures.
M. Foam Tape: Provide concealed black polyurethane foam tape or "Isotac" laminate tape as
manufactured by 3-M (or equal), applied to sign elements as required.
N. Hardware/Hinges: Provide and install all incidental hardware necessary for the proper functioning
of the signs, including but not restricted to materials and products covered in this section. Provide
stainless steel hinges for all hinged access panels. Provide pin tumbler locks for all access panels
requiring locks.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 302
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
O. Insulation: Separate all ferrous and non-ferrous metals with non-conductive gaskets to prevent
electrolysis. In addition to gaskets, provide stainless steel fasteners for some cases as required.
P. PVC Tubing: Provide PVC (polyvinyl chloride/plastic) tubing in thickness and strength suitable
for signage as specified. Surfaces should be smooth and clean for application of painted finishes
and vinyl graphics. Mount/secure as indicated on drawings (suspended).
Q. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide the alloy and type required for strength,
workability, compatibility and color match after grinding smooth and finishing the fabricated
product.
R. Screen Printed Materials: Provide photo processed screening, arranged to furnish sharp and solid
images without edge build up or bleeding of the coating. Pattern-cut screens may be used for nonrepeat copy, provided that final image copy is equal to photo screen quality. Provide only
weather-resistant coating materials, compatible with the intended substrates.
S. Vinyl Die-Cut and Pattern Cut-Out Graphics: Use pressure-sensitive, non-yellowing, non-peeling
and weather resistant vinyls as specified. Use approved fonts and equipment as specified.
2.4
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. Wiring and Equipment: Provide and install electrical materials such as ballasts, transformers,
lamps, sockets, neon units, connectors, and all other equipment. All equipment shall be new and
shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. The assembly of all components within the
illuminated signs shall conform to current Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. standards. All wiring
and equipment shall be concealed within the sign structure unless otherwise instructed.
B. Transformers: Coordinate location of remote transformers with building construction. Ensure that
transformers are accessible after completion of work. Transformers and electrical hardware shall
be concealed, non-audible and nonvisible to pedestrian and vehicular traffic in the immediate area
of the completed installation. No electrical controls or devices are to be attached to any sign face
or support unless required by local authorities having jurisdiction
C. Exterior Sign Locations: Electrical components for exterior sign locations shall be suitable for
wet location and certified by the manufacturer.
D. Conduit and Devices: Provide rigid steel conduit, junction boxes and associated devices in
accordance with applicable codes as required.
E. Wiring: Minimum #12 AWG copper. High tension wiring shall not be less than GTO 15 wire as
manufactured by Carol Cable Company or approved equal. All wiring shall be AWM 90 0
centigrade 1000 volt TW/MTW U.L. file no. 18971. Wiring connectors for wire splicing shall be
U.L. approved 1000 volt capacity. They shall be Scotch Lock type Y or R or equal. All splices
shall be placed as to easily access for inspection.
F. Ballasts: As required for internally illuminated cabinet signs, in quantity and arrangement as
recommended by ballast manufacturer; accessible for maintenance.
G. Disconnect Switch: All signs or sign components with electrical service shall be equipped with an
approved external disconnect switch, flush mounted on the cabinet/sign, with circuits and
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 303
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
capacity to control all primary wiring within the sign. Location of switch must be shown on shop
drawings and is subject to approval.
H. Illumination: All signs with fluorescent fixtures shall utilize minimum 800 miliamp T12 output
cool white fluorescent lamps at the length and placement necessary to provide even illumination
without light leaks. All lamps and ballasts shall be provided by the Sign Fabricator. Provide
waterproof flush access panel(s), concealed wherever possible. Conduit wiring and electrical
equipment from the field electrical connection to any part of the sign and within the sign shall be
provided by the Sign Fabricator, and Installer shall be a licensed electrician.
2.5
ILLUMINATION
A. Internal or External Illumination: Unless otherwise indicated lighting fixture/source must emit a
color-balanced, consistent and uniform light effect with no browning, flickering, haloing, or other
uneven effect. No "hot" or "cool" spots will be acceptable. Homogenous illumination is required.
B. Illuminated Characters: Illuminate characters in manner indicated. Make provisions for servicing
and concealing connections to building electrical system. Coordinate electrical characteristics
with those of power supply provided.
C. Ventilation: While maintaining a proper weather seal, provide for sufficient ventilation of sign
components to prevent overheating or warpage; allowing for color of sign, mounting surface,
climate conditions, etc. In providing for ventilation, protect sign from elements (rain, wind,
debris, etc.) that might cause operational or cleaning problems. Signs/cabinets with light leaks
will not be accepted.
D. Neon: Form neon tubing as required, using tubes individually filled at optimum pressure required
for uniform lighting. Buttress threaded glass posts, securely attach tubes to supports with pure
annealed copper wire ties, without strain on tubing.
2.6
FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Painted surfaces are to be catalyst hardened acrylic polymer using a base clear coat system.
Coatings shall not crack, peel, craze, discolor, or fade under ultra-violet light conditions.
B. Coatings shall be compatible with the surface to which they are applied. Finish applications are to
be smooth and uniform, free of "orange-peel" or other irregularities, applied according to
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Color breaks on sign surfaces shall be sharp, without serration or color bleed or shadows. All
drips, splatters and over sprays shall be removed.
D. Brushed and satin finished aluminum surfaces are to be consistent and uniform among all the
signs of the system.
E. Coatings shall accurately match the colors specified or color swatches furnished by the Designer.
F. Clear Sealers: Crystal clear matte polyurethane sealers By Matthews Paint Co. or approved equal.
Sealers are to resist rust and corrosion associated with exposure to salt air.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 304
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
G. Protection: Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
H. Variations: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are not acceptable. Noticeable
variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are not
acceptable.
I.
2.7
Anodized Aluminum Components/Panels: If required provide anodized (application of aluminum
oxide film coating in clear or colored dye finish) aluminum panels or parts to match specified
color, grain, finish and specifications.
FABRICATION OF SIGNS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide custom manufactured sign assemblies, components completely fabricated and
finished at factory before delivery to site. Construct to accurate detail and dimensions as shown in
Design Intent Documents and as reviewed on shop drawings. Fit and assemble the work at shop
to the greatest extent possible, and mark the components as required to facilitate assembly during
installation. Fabricated and assembled materials, prior to painting and finishing shall be free of
imperfections, roughness, burrs, open joints, misalignment of components, surface irregularities,
pits, piping, or any other substandard feature or condition.
B. Seams and Joints: Added joints shall be ground, filled and finished flush and smooth with
adjacent work. Such seams shall be invisible after final finish has been applied. Spot welded
joints shall not be visible on exterior of signs after final finish has been applied. No gaps, light
leaks, waves, or oil canning will be permitted in work.
C. Metal Signs and Supports: Fabricate exposed surfaces uniformly flat and smooth, without
distortion, pitting or other blemishes. Form exposed metal edges to a smooth radius. Permanently
bond the laminated metal components and honeycomb core with adhesive or sealant in
accordance with product manufacturer's recommendations. Grind exposed welds and rough areas
to make flush with adjacent smooth surfaces.
D. Castings: Exposed surfaces shall be uniformly free from porosity, roughness, pits, sand holes, and
other defects. Edges are to be filled and ground smooth. Faces chemically etched and
mechanically polished for specified finish. Castings shall be of alloy and temper recommended by
sign manufacturer for casting process used and for type of use and finish indicated. Concealed
studs will be used unless otherwise indicated.
E. Galvanizing: Provide for steel components in exterior construction and where noted to be
galvanized. Complete the shop fabrication prior to application of the zinc coating. Remove mill
scale and rust, clean and pickle the units as required for proper pretreatment of the surfaces.
F. Hardware: Provide all incidental hardware necessary for the proper functioning of signs. External
hardware shall conform to the external appearance of the sign.
G. Support, Backing and Blocking: Sign Fabricator shall provide engineered sign supports anchored
to building structure where required and to meet requirements of applicable building codes.
Support or backing requiring installation within the building wall construction shall be
immediately relayed to the Owner for field coordination. Furnish templates for installation of
anchorage devices.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 305
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
2.8
SHOP APPLICATION OF SIGN FINISHES
A. Sign Graphics: Provide the letters, numerals, symbols, and other graphics markings, using the
finish materials shown. Apply the graphics neatly, uniformly proportioned and spaced, and
accurate within the dimensions indicated. Prepare the substrate surfaces and apply finish
materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B. Metal Finishes: Remove scratches, abrasions, dents and other blemishes before applying finish.
Apply relevant finishes to the fabricated work, with texture and reflectivity as specified in Design
Intent Documents.
C. Linear Polyurethane Finishes: Clean the surfaces as required for proper adhesion of coatings. Use
cleanser and water, and/or chemically treat as recommended by paint manufacturer to remove
deleterious film or residue. Provide pretreatment and primer in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
2.9
GRAPHIC APPLICATION
A. Preparation: Surfaces to receive the graphic markings shall be clean, dry, and otherwise made
ready for application of the materials. Accurately measure and lay out the required marking
configurations as indicated on drawings.
B. Vinyl Die-cut and Pattern-cut Graphics: Use die cut, pressure sensitive, non-yellowing, nonpeeling and weather resistant vinyl adhesive letters or images, custom flood coated as required.
Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Make uniformly smooth and free
from bubbles, wrinkles, stretching and blemishes.
C. Painted or Screen Printed Graphics: All graphics to be applied using photo processed screens
from camera ready art, arranged to furnish sharp and solid images without build-up or bleeding of
the coating. Comply with coating manufacturer's application instructions. Provide proper type of
primer to suit each substrate and obtain a permanent bond. Verify compatibility of each substrate
with the coatings to be used in the work. Apply the markings with neat edges, minimum thickness
and as required to obtain solid markings without voids.
D. Acid-Etched Graphics and Typography: Acid-etched typography and graphic imagery must be
clean, crisp, sharp edges; ragged or soft (polished out) edges will be rejected. Acid baths used for
etching should be fresh and used in an environment and temperature that will provide the highest
quality etched images. Infill with color as indicated by Design Intent Documents. Maintain ink
fills true to the edges of letterforms/graphics. Etch to depth indicated in Design Intent Documents.
3.0 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 306
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
A. Protection: Protect the work during the construction period so that it will be without any
indication of use or damage. Leave the work clean and free from defects at time of acceptance.
A. B: Final Walk-Through and Punchlist: Final walk-through will be held with Project Architect and
Owner to review the finished installation. A punchlist of all items requiring modification will be
developed and issued. Project Architect and Owner reserve the right to reject all or part of a sign
that does not correspond to the Design Intent Documents, specifications or the approved shop
drawings. Sign Fabricator shall promptly conduct repair and completion of all items for final
acceptance by the Owner.
B. Guarantee: Sign Fabricator to provide full guarantee of all workmanship, materials, equipment,
etc. of this installation for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. Sign Fabricator shall
replace/repair any defective work within thirty (30) days after notification by Owner throughout
the duration of this period.
C. Fabrication Errors: If the Sign Fabricator has made an error in copy (message), color, material,
quality, etc. these items must be corrected within thirty (30) days of observation of error (at no
additional cost). Sign Fabricator will be notified with a written punchlist as errors are discovered.
D. Erection of Signs: Set and attach the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb,
level and true, as measured from established reference points and from other work already in
place. Fit components accurately together to form tight joints and secure connections. Coordinate,
through the Construction Manager, with other trades and make connections of illuminated signs
to electrical service. Exterior wall penetrations and blocking are to be coordinated immediately
upon award of contract. Test illuminated sign components and adjust operation for proper
performance.
E. Illuminated Signs: Burn-in all illuminated signs for a period of 100 hours prior to delivery to the
job site.
F. Adjusting: Neatly repair minor blemishes or marring on finished surfaces so that repairs are
imperceptible. Completely replace components having permanent non-removable scratches,
stains, or other defacement.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Sign Fabricator must examine the areas to receive the work and the
conditions under which the work will be performed. Prior to commencing work, verify that items,
including anchor inserts, and electrical power provided are sized and located to accommodate
work. Sign Fabricator shall remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Pre-Installation Meeting: A pre-installation meeting will be held with Project Architect and
Owner to mutually agree on all installation details, placement, etc.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. General: Complete installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions and
accepted shop drawings and best industry practice. Sign Fabricator will be responsible for daily
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 307
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
clean up of their areas of work. Locate signs and accessories as indicated in Design Intent
Document, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's
written instructions and best industry practice. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated,
with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.
B. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk
holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate
with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach signs to shim plate
using mechanical fasteners or adhesives as indicated in Design Intent Documents. Where shim
plate is exposed, provide a decorative cover as required.
C. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non-removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes.
Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as
recommended in writing by sign manufacturer, engineer, or best industry practice.
D. Bracket-Mounted Units: Provide custom brackets, fittings, and hardware as appropriate for
mounting signs that project at right angles from walls and ceilings. Attach brackets and fittings
securely to walls and ceilings with concealed fasteners and anchoring devices to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions, engineer, or best industry practice.
E. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods, type of mounting,
wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish
character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
F. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by
manufacturer for type of wall surface indicated.
A. Illuminated Characters: Run wires into wall construction through conduit. Use insulators as
necessary for neon lighting wiring. Exposed-to-view wiring or conduit on wall face is not
permitted unless otherwise indicated.
3.4
CLEANING
A. Conform to Division 01 “Closeout Procedures”
B. Upon completion of the work, remove unused materials, debris, containers and equipment from
the project site. Remove protective coverings and clean the exposed surfaces of the Work to
remove dirt, stains and other substances, by methods as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Removal of materials and devices that protect installed work at the time of substantial completion
as agreed in advance with the Owner.
D. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by
Owner.
E. Remove protective coating or materials from signs and from the job site when required.
F. Touch up all fasteners or finished surfaces scratched or blemished during installation.
END OF SECTION 101400
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
101400 - 308
Gensler
SPECIALITIES (SIGNAGE)
SECTION 107500 - FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes ground-mounted flagpoles made from aluminum.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Section 265600 "Exterior Lighting" for site lighting fixtures.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports, shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated according to the following design criteria:
1.
Wind Loads:
90 mph, Exposure B according to NAAMM FP 1001, "Guide
Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles."
2.
Base flagpole design on nylon flags of maximum standard size suitable for use with
flagpole or flag size indicated, whichever is more stringent.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operating characteristics,
fittings, accessories, and finishes for flagpoles.
B.
Shop Drawings: For flagpoles. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other
work. Show general arrangement, jointing, fittings, accessories, grounding, anchoring, and
support.
1.
C.
1.4
Include section, and details of foundation system for ground-mounted flagpoles.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
manuals.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
For flagpoles to include in operation and maintenance
107500 ‐ 309
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Source Limitations: Obtain each flagpole as complete unit, including fittings, accessories,
bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy paper and enclose in a hard fiber tube or other
protective container.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
American Flagpole.
Baartol Company.
Concord Industries, Inc.
Pole-Tech Company, Inc.
U.S. Flag and Flagpole Supply.
FLAGS
A.
Types:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Material and Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
United States of America.
State of Maryland.
City of Baltimore.
UV Protected Nylon with reinforced seams.
U.S. Size: 6’ x 10’
State Size: 5’ x 8’
City Size: 5’ x 8’
FLAGPOLES
A.
Flagpole Construction, General: Construct flagpoles in one piece.
B.
Exposed Height: Two flagpoles at 25 feet; one flagpole at 30 feet as indicated on the plans.
C.
Aluminum Flagpoles: Provide cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded tubing
complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness of 3/16
(.188) inch.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
107500 ‐ 310
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
D.
Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube, not less than
0.064-inch- nominal wall thickness. Provide with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support
plate; 3/4-inch- diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together.
Galvanize steel after assembly. Provide loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation tube for
plumbing pole.
1.
2.4
Provide heavy duty flashing collar of same material and finish as flagpole.
FITTINGS
A.
Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, sized to match flagpole-butt diameter.
Finial ball to be installed on 25’ exposed height flagpole to receive City of Baltimore Flag.
1.
0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
B.
Finial Cross: Manufacturer’s standard Botanee Cross, sized as standard with manufacturer for
flagpole size indicated. Finial Cross to be installed on 25’ exposed height flagpole to receive
State of Maryland Flag.
C.
Finial Eagle: Manufacturer's standard Eagle on ball, sized as standard with manufacturer for
flagpole size indicated. Finial Eagle to be installed on 30’ exposed height flagpole to receive
United States Flag.
1.
D.
Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and
removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck assembly with
plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Provide flush access door secured with cylinder lock.
Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
1.
2.5
Cast aluminum with gold anodized finish.
Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide two stainless-steel swivel snap hooks per halyard.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.
B.
Sand: ASTM C 33, fine aggregate.
C.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane joint sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Use M, G, A,
and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, for Use O.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.6
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
107500 ‐ 311
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
B.
2.7
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Natural Satin Finish: AA-M32, fine, directional, medium satin polish; buff complying with
AA-M20; seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
B.
Gold Anodic Finish (Finial Eagle Only): AAMA 611, AA-M32C22A43 Class I, 0.018 mm or
thicker; gold color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, including foundation; accurate placement, pattern, and
other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-grade
portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B.
Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil
and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete. Place and
compact drainage material at excavation bottom.
C.
Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of flagpole base
at grade. Secure and brace forms to prevent displacement during concreting.
D.
Place concrete, as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact concrete in
place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use
nonstaining curing compound.
E.
Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform
in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete
base.
3.3
FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and manufacturer's
written instructions.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
107500 ‐ 312
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
B.
Ground Set: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement during
concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete to cure.
Install flagpole, plumb, in foundation tube.
1.
Foundation Tube: Place tube seated on bottom plate between steel centering wedges and
install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and compact sand in
foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of foundation tube with a 2-inch
layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing collar.
END OF SECTION 107500
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
107500 ‐ 313
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
107500 ‐ 314
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
FLAGPOLES
SECTION 108113 – BIRD CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes bird control devices.
B.
Related Sections include:
1.2
1.
Section 05 12 00, “Structural Steel Framing” for steel framing.
2.
Section 05 12 13 “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel”.
3.
Section 07 54 23, “Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing“.
4.
Section 13 31 40, “Tensioned ETFE Fabric Structure”.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide product data for materials and products used in the work of this
Section.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings including plans, elevations and details.
C.
Samples: Provide samples of each type of anchor post, guide post, cable, and accessory item
required.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Qualification Data: For qualified installer. Provide list of completed projects within 50 mile
radius of site, including month and year installation was completed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Provide record drawings and maintenance information.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide installer qualifications. Qualified installers shall have completed at least five projects
similar in scope in the last two years.
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 8/15/2014
108113 - 315
Gensler
BIRD CONTROL DEVICES
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store bird control devices in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry,
and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.
B.
Deliver and store bird control devices in boxes surrounded by sufficient packing material to
ensure that products will not be cracked or otherwise damaged.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Flite Line Post & Wire Bird Deterrent; Nixalite of America Inc.
B.
Subject to requirements, provide the basis-of-design product, or a comparable product,
acceptable to the Architect, by one of the following:
2.2
1.
Bird-B-Gone.
2.
Bird Barrier America.
3.
Bird-X.
4.
Gilbert Industries.
COMPONENTS
A.
Anchor Posts and Guide Posts: Stainless steel posts with 2 line capacity and stainless steel
base.
1.
Short Posts: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm) high.
2.
Tall Posts: 5 inches (127 mm) high.
B.
Cable: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) diameter stainless steel cable, nylon jacketed.
C.
Springs: 1/4 inch x 1/2 inch (6 mm x 12 mm) stainless steel extension springs.
D.
Ferrules: Plated copper ferrules.
E.
Fasteners, Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended stainless steel fasteners,
anchors and accessories that are compatible with materials used in the framing system.
1.
Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise
indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 8/15/2014
108113 - 316
Gensler
BIRD CONTROL DEVICES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and conditions under which the Work is to be
installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and
installing bird control devices. Do not install damaged components.
B.
Mark locations of rows of anchor posts and guide posts according to manufacturer’s written
installation instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Maximum space between anchor posts and outside edges or walls shall be 1 inch (25
mm).
Maximum space between rows of anchor posts shall be 3 inches (75 mm).
Alternate post heights on multiple row surfaces.
Install short posts on outside edges of multiple row surfaces.
Install tall posts on outside edges of single row surfaces.
C.
Install anchor posts 10 feet (3048 mm) on center maximum. Install guide posts between
anchor posts with a maximum space between guide posts and anchor posts of five feet (1524
mm).
D.
Drill pilot holes through bases and metal substrate. Fasten bases to substrate with sheet metal
screws.
E.
Install nylon jacketed stainless steel cable according to manufacturer’s written installation
instructions. Install ferrules and springs as required.
F.
Install upper and lower cables at all outside edges. Install gate cables at open ends.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Inspect finished installation. Make any adjustments needed to conform to manufacturer’s
spacing and installation guidelines.
B.
Remove debris and waste materials from project site.
C.
Clean bird control devices with potable water.
D.
Remove and replace bird control devices that are torn, distorted, yielded, or abraded or that is
damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 8/15/2014
108113 - 317
Gensler
BIRD CONTROL DEVICES
END OF SECTION 108113
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 8/15/2014
108113 - 318
Gensler
BIRD CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Manufacturer Seating.
Manufacturer Tables.
Custom wood benches
Bicycle racks.
Trash receptacles.
Recycling receptacles.
Exercise equipment.
Drinking fountain.
Dog Waste Stations.
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast, anchor bolts,
and forming voids in concrete footings.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation prior to installing concrete footings.
Section 331116 for "Water Distribution" associated with Drinking Fountain.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear
components and 4-inch- square sheet components.
E.
Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For site furnishings.
1.
Wood Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating type of
preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 319
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
Bench Replacement Planks: No fewer than 20 full-size units for Radial and Wood
Benches.
Bench Replacement Planks: No fewer than 10 full-size units for South Plaza Benches.
Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: 2 full-size units for each size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED SEATING AND TABLES
A.
Table shall be Catena Table by Landscape Forms
B.
Seating shall be Parc Centre Chair by Landscape Forms
2.2
CUSTOM SEATING
A.
Radial Wood Bench:
B.
Straight Wood Bench:
C.
South Plaza Bench:
2.3
BICYCLE RACKS
A.
Bicycle Racks: To match existing Forest City standard bike racks.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Frame: Schedule 20, U-shaped, 2 inch diameter aluminum tubing.
Style: As indicated on the drawings.
Installation Method: Embedded.
Finish: Directional brushed, or approved equal.
TRASH AND RECYCLING RECEPTACLES
A.
Model: Decatur, DCT Series, Steel Receptacles by Creative Pipe:
1.
2.
Receptacle shall be DCT-HT-PS-32-F-P-LDS
Color: RAL 7026 to match Forest City standard.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 320
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
3.
B.
Inner Container: Galvanized-steel sheet container; designed to be removable and
reusable. Color to match receptacle. Provide receptacle designed to accommodate
disposable liners.
Graphics for Recycle Receptacles: Surface-applied copy, content, and style per manufacturer's
standard. See plans for number of receptacles.
1.
Copy: Per approved graphics from Forest City.
a.
2.5
Copy to be applied to all new receptacles as well as existing receptacles identified
by Forest City for reuse.
EXERCISE EQUIPMENT
A.
Manufacturer: Xccent Fitness.
1.
Model: Air Stride #4523301
2.
Model: Pull-Up Station #4523001
3.
Model: Torso Bench #4522801
4.
Model: Tru Elliptical #44989
5.
Model: Leg and Press Combo #50472
B.
Finish: Powder coating shall be Silver Flake, X-grip coating shall be Black.
C.
Mounting: In Ground Mount per manufacturers products and instructions
2.6
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
A.
2.7
Manufacturer: Haws Corporation.
1.
Model: 3202G
2.
Finish: 12 gauge, galvanized steel.
DOG WASTE STATION
A.
2.8
Model: Dogipot Pet Waste Station by Belson Outdoors.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 321
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
2.9
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
2.10
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
B.
PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, mattetextured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry
film thickness.
2.11
A.
2.12
IRON FINISHES
Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
2.
Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 322
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been
completed.
C.
Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on
Drawings.
D.
Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.
E.
Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD
of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and
concrete with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
F.
Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with anchoring
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written
instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.
END OF SECTION 129300
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 323
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
129300 ‐ 324
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
SITE FURNISHINGS
SECTION 133140 - TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
PART 4 - GENERAL
4.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
4.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
The Specification together with the Architectural Drawings define the scope of Contract
Work, mandatory geometry of visible Tensioned ETFE Fabric Structure surfaces, the
performance parameters for fabric structure, provide minimum acceptable standards and
establish a regime for verification of the design, fabrication and installation processes.
The Drawings and Specification provide an indicative solution for the Contract Work.
The Contractor shall be responsible for completing the design and for the procurement,
fabrication, verification and installation of the Contract Work.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to warrant the above to the Owner, and to
ensure that all materials and work meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily indicate or describe in detail all work
required for the full performance and completion of the Contract Work. The Contractor
shall provide all items required for proper completion of the Contract Work.
Components of Contract Work:
1.
This Section includes the tensioned ETFE fabric structure for the entire project. This
work includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
ETFE membranes.
Aluminum framing, socket connections, clevis and spade connections, spines, ribs,
struts, keder rail assemblies and all other framing required to support the
tensioned membrane.
Connections to the supporting steel frame.
Painting and coating in conjunction with all exposed components.
Fasteners, inserts, expansion devices, gaskets, trim and other accessories required
to meet the design intent.
Stainless steel cabling and cable clamps to tension and support the ETFE
membranes.
Related Sections include:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 325
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
1.
2.
4.3
Division 01 Section “Alternates”, for alternate warranty period.
Section 05 12 13 “Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel” for coordination of mockup
requirements.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A.
The Contractor’s design, materials and workmanship shall comply with current Codes.
Comply with all appropriate National and Local Government Regulations and obtain all
necessary approvals from the Statutory Authorities. Where their recommendations or
requirements are to a lower standard than required by this Contract Document, this document
shall take precedence. Local codes include the following and are referred to as “Code” in this
section:
a.
B.
International Building Code – 2012 International Building Code.
Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards
below, where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply. Unless otherwise noted the
latest editions of the standards shall apply:
1.
2.
Aluminum Association (AA):
a.
No. 1 "Aluminum Standards and Data”.
b.
“The Aluminum Design Manual".
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
a.
b.
c.
4.
AAMA A9-91 & Addendum (2000), “Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners”.
AAMA CW-DG-1, “Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual”.
AAMA CW-10, “Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to
Site”.
AAMA MCW-1, “Metal Curtain Wall Manual”.
AAMA 2605, “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test
Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions
and Panels”.
“Steel Construction Manual”.
AISC 360: “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings” except as modified by
OBO-ICS, ANSI/AISC 360-05.
AISC 303-05: “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
a.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
“Standard 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.
133140 - 326
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
5.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
6.
American Welding Society (AWS):
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
AWS A5.10, “Specification for Bare Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Welding
Electrodes and Rods”.
AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code - Steel”.
AWS D1.2, “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum”.
AWS D1.6, “Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel”.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
a.
4.4
ASTM A743/743M, “Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, IronChromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application”.
ASTM B209, “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate”.
ASTM B221, “Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes”.
ASTM B308/B308M, “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6
Standard Structural Profiles”.
ASTM B429/B429M, “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Structural Pipe and Tube”.
ASTM B449, “Standard Specification for Chromates on Aluminum”
ASTM C509, “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket
and Sealing Material”.
ASTM D695, “Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics.”
ASTM D1730, “Standard Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and AluminumAlloy Surfaces for Painting”.
ASTM D2244, “Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color
Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates”.
ASTM D4214, Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of
Exterior Paint Films”
“Metal Finishes Manual”.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Prescriptive Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
All fasteners shall be stainless steel.
All brackets shall be stainless steel or aluminum.
All gaskets, where possible, shall be accessible for inspection/ replacement.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 327
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
a.
4.
B.
Loads to be adjusted as necessary for the type and orientation of maintenance
equipment anticipated. The Contract Work shall sustain safely, and without
damage access and specified maintenance loads.
Incorporate separators to prevent bimetallic corrosion.
General Performance:
1.
Contract Work shall as specified:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Withstand and accommodate the stresses and movements induced by the specified
cambers, estimated deflections, relative deflections and the long term
movements associated with the settlement of the foundations, or any other
movements of the structure, changes in temperature and chemical changes due to
anticipated local weather conditions.
Include suitable allowances for the specified construction tolerances.
Finishes shall withstand the specified deleterious and degrading effects of radiation
from the sun, weathering, atmospheric pollution, and fungi for the required
service life described herein without maintenance in excess of routine cleaning
and minor repairs.
Have a resistance to combustion and fire spread appropriate to each part specified.
Cleaning and maintenance of the Work shall be carried out easily, without
interfering with the function of the canopy.
Framing members shall not be buckled. Membranes, attachment assemblies, and
decorative capping pieces shall remain securely held and associated gaskets shall
not be displaced under normal loading conditions.
Repair and replacement of the membrane, and structural connection.
Failure shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Structural failure of components resulting from forces within specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to / from the Contract Work to the building Pressure
Resistant Curtain Wall and/or structure.
ETFE membrane tearing, wrinkling or sagging.
Excessive deflections.
Obvious noise or vibrations created by normal and anticipated wind, thermal and
structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating parts to function normally.
Failure of touch-up finish to closely match factory finish.
Staining of adjacent components.
Discoloration, fading, chalking, excessive non-uniformity, pitting, cracking,
peeling, corrosion, or crazing of finish.
133140 - 328
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
1)
The terms below used in conjunction with finish Guarantee are defined as
follows:
a)
b)
c)
k.
C.
Failure to fulfill other specified performance requirements.
Detailed Design Principles: This Project typically adopts an aluminum framed ETFE tension
membrane which is attached to a steel frame. This system shall:
1.
Provide the following when all tolerances are accommodated and the most onerous
combination of movements occur (including wind sway):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
D.
"Excessive fading": means a change in appearance that is perceptible
and objectionable as determined by the Architect when viewed
visually in comparison with the original color range standards.
"Excessive non-uniformity": means non-uniform fading during the
period of the guarantee to the extent that adjacent parts have a color
difference greater than the original acceptable color range.
"Will not pit or otherwise corrode": means there shall be no pitting or
other type of corrosion of finish discernible from a distance of 3,000
mm, resulting from the natural elements in the atmosphere at the
Project site.
Be designed to provide the membrane shape shown in the project documentation,
including specified radii of curvature.
Be designed to maintain the membrane under tension.
Be designed to maintain a membrane that is wrinkle free and consistently taut.
Minimize the frequency of re-tensioning that is required, and provide a mechanism
and methodology to do so.
Be designed such that any membrane or structural support member may be
replaced or serviced without requiring complete disassembly of the entire
system.
Be designed for an overall useful life as specified by the Basis of Design product.
Each membrane shall be optimized to reduce or eliminate seams.
The tensioned ETFE fabric structure shall be designed, fabricated and installed to
discourage bird attraction and to inhibit their roosting on the horizontal or low
sloped surfaces, edges, cables, and struts of the assemblies.
Structural Loads:
1.
General
a.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
The Work shall transmit the design loads as specified below to the steel structure
via the points of attachment as designed and built, with an adequate margin of
safety appropriate to each material and product. As required by the appropriate
Codes, the various load cases and combinations of load cases acting together
shall be considered.
133140 - 329
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
2.
Dead Loads:
a.
3.
Wind Loads: The tensioned ETFE fabric structure work shall be designed, fabricated and
installed to withstand the maximum inward and outward wind pressures as required by
2012 IBC.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Ultimate Wind Speed: 115 mph (based on 3 second gust).
Nominal Wind Speed: 89.1 mph.
Risk Category: II.
Exposure Category: B.
Seismic Loads: As required by 2012 IBC.
a.
b.
5.
The work shall support its self-weight and transmit this weight safely back to the
supporting structure without overloading or permanently displacing any of its
components.
Provide miscellaneous steel framing not shown on drawings which is required to
satisfy seismic criteria.
Refer to Structural drawings for seismic criteria.
Snow / Ice Loads:
a.
The Work shall sustain any loads created by snow and/or ice and shall transmit
these loads back to the supporting structure safely without overloading or
permanently deforming any of its components.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
b.
Calculations for review by the Architect shall be provided in accordance with
Submittals in this section.
1)
c.
Identify in the calculation submission all elements that are subject to Ice
loads. See “ASCE Standard 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures” included in Reference Standards.
Ice Forces: Detailing must ensure that:
1)
6.
Ground snow load: 30 psf.
Flat roof snow load: 25 psf + snow drift.
Snow exposure factor: 1.0.
Snow importance factor: 1.0.
Thermal Factor: 1.2.
Ice will not impose forces on the membrane or framing
Access and Maintenance Loads: To be determined.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 330
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
7.
Structural frame tolerances: Reference the following standards for structure movement
and tolerances:
a.
b.
c.
8.
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): “Steel Construction Manual”.
American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC 360: “Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings” ANSI/AISC 360-05.
American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC 303-05: “Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
Accommodation of Movement
a.
The Work shall accommodate the movements noted below without any reduction
in the performance below the minimum levels required herein.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
c.
9.
The Contractor shall provide estimates of nominal, minimum and maximum
movements of the system accounting for all tolerances and building movements
and shall confirm to the Architect that the connections shown on the Design
Intent Drawings will accommodate them. Verify by calculation.
Vibration: The primary brackets and all fasteners shall be designed so that there
will be no risk of loosening due to the effects of vibrations, or to the cyclic
effects of load, deflections and thermal movement.
Structural Frame Support Movements: To be determined.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Vertical Live Load:
Elastic lateral drift due to wind at each story:
Column shortening / long term creep:
Allow for differential movements between structural supports due to changes in:
1)
2)
3)
10.
Deflections due to design dead loads and live loads.
Deflections under repeated cycles of the design wind loads.
Changes in dimension and shape arising from specified building
movements, including settlement, shrinkage, elastic shortening, beam
deflections, creep, wind sway, twisting and racking and thermal and
moisture movement.
Deflections due to movement of any joint in the supporting structure or
tensioned frame.
Stiffness
Design Loads
Loading Conditions
Deflection of Framing Members:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 331
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
a.
Provide Contract Work that accommodates dimensional construction tolerances of
the steel support framing, and other adjacent construction. At design wind
pressure, as follows:
a)
2)
Cantilever Deflection:
a)
11.
The Work shall accommodate the following movements without any reduction in
the specified performance:
1)
2)
3)
Due to changes in the moisture content of its components, and wetting due
to rain.
Expansion of absorbed or retained moisture due to freezing.
Due to changes in the moisture content of the supporting structure and
interfacing construction.
Fire Performance
1.
2.
F.
Dimensions shown on Drawings are based on an assumed design
temperature of +70 deg F (+21 deg C). Fabrication and erection procedures
shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the
respective operations.
Accommodation of Moisture Movement:
a.
E.
Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit deflection to
(2) two times the length of cantilevered member, divided by 175.
Accommodation of Thermal Movements: Fabricate the tensioned ETFE fabric structure
work to accommodate for such expansion and contraction of component materials, and
supporting elements, as will be caused by surface temperatures ranging from -5 to
+180 deg F (-20.5 to +82 deg C), without causing noise, buckling, fabric tearing, failure
of joint sealants, undue stress on metal members and fasteners, reduction of performance,
and other detrimental effects.
1)
12.
Framing elements: Span/90, in any direction.
All Contract Work component materials to be non-combustible and shall not exhibit
sustained flaming according to NFPA 268 and shall not give off toxic fumes.
The Work shall comply with the relevant fire resistance recommendations as stated in the
Code.
Infestation
1.
To the greatest extent possible, use materials not be attacked or infested by microorganisms, fungi, insects or birds.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 332
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
G.
Brackets and Fasteners
1.
2.
3.
4.
The general requirement for torqueing of bolts shall be highlighted on the Contractor’s
drawings and tightening torque values to be clearly stated.
Fastener design on aluminum components as per Aluminum Association-Aluminum
Design Manual.
Allowable loads as per AAMA TIR A9-91 with 2000 amendments.
The design of the fasteners shall allow for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Shimming required accommodating local variations only in construction
tolerances. The maximum allowable shim dimension shall be stated in the
Contractor's drawings.
Any reduction in safe working loads in fasteners due to their spacing, location in
areas of tension, near edges or proximity to cast in inserts/existing fasteners, or
thickness of shims.
Where post drilled or site fasteners are used for connections to the external
structural steel frame, the integrity of the steel corrosion protection system shall
not be compromised.
Calculations submitted to the Architect shall show the extent of movements, which
have been allowed for in the design of fasteners.
When not following an applicable Code, standard or design guide, a minimum
factor of safety of 2 shall be used for permissible load design of anchoring
assemblies.
Nuts shall be fully tightened after adjustment to prevent loosening due to movements
and/or vibrations.
The design of brackets for site drilled fasteners shall allow for the possibility of
reinforcement or other obstructions being encountered and the fixing position being
moved as a result of this event occurring. No reinforcement or other obstructions shall be
cut without the approval of the Structural Engineer.
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner that the use of all proprietary fasteners
installed have been reviewed and approved by the fixing manufacturer and shall, prior to
the installation, submit the Manufacturer's written certification that the details proposed
by the Contractor are appropriate for their intended use.
Locked in Stresses
1.
2.
The Contractor shall avoid in his design and detailing the introduction of locked-in
stresses that may be detrimental to the performance of the Work during the service life.
The stresses that are referred to are those that can develop in an individual unit, if the
various fasteners that secure that unit in position are so rigid that they do not allow for
thermal or other movement in that unit.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 333
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
4.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Calculations: As specified by the Basis of Design product
B.
Shop Drawings and Models: Provide shop drawings that include plans, sections and details
that fully explain all product applications to this project.
C.
Product Data, Certificates and Reports: As specified by the Basis of Design product
D.
Samples
1.
General: Submit samples of materials including the following before any work is
fabricated
a.
Samples for verification: 3 paired sets of samples for each exposed metal finish
required. Sample finishes shall be on the specified alloy, temper, and thickness
of metal required for the work. Where finishes involve color and texture
variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
Furnish samples in either 300 mm lengths of rails, or 300 mm squares of sheet,
in addtion submit sample of the following:
1)
b.
c.
4.6
All fasteners anchor bolts and hardware.
ETFE Samples: Provide samples of all components of system.
Mock-up: Provide a 5’ x 5’ mockup as directed by the architect
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide all test reports as specified by the Basis of Design product.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified installer. Provide list of completed projects within 50 mile
radius of site, including month and year installation was completed.
4.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
4.8
Provide record drawings and maintenance information.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide installer qualifications
1.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
a.
b.
c.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code—Steel"
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum"
AWS D1.6/D1.6M, “Structural Welding Code—Stainless Steel”
133140 - 334
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
B.
Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Prior to the start of the AESS
and ETFE work, and at the Contractor's direction, meet at the site and review the construction
schedule, availability of materials, installers personnel qualifications, equipment and facilities
needed to make progress and avoid delays, installation procedures, testing, inspecting, and
certification procedures, and coordination with other work. Meeting shall include Contractor,
Owner, AESS installer, ETFE installer, as well as any other subcontractors or material
technical service representatives whose work, or products, must be coordinated with the
curtain wall work.
C.
Mockups: At least four weeks prior to fabricating ETFE, the Contractor shall construct
mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. A
mockup for each of the following elements shall be constructed:
1.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final unit of Work.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.9
Mockups shall be full-size pieces unless the Architect approves smaller models.
Refer to Drawings for size and extent of mockups.
Coordinate extent of mockup work with Section 05 12 13 – Architecturally
Exposed Structural Steel.
After fabrication, move mockups to Forest City office in Baltimore, MD. Notify
the Architect at least one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups
will be available for review.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects regarding each element listed
under the fabrication heading below.
Mockup will have finished surface (including surface preparation and white shop
primer).
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting fabrication of final units.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
All components of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure work shall be identified after
fabrication by marks clearly indicating their location. Packaging of components shall be so
selected to protect the components from damage during shipping and handling.
B.
Storage on Site:
1.
Store tensioned ETFE fabric structure components in a location and in a manner to avoid
damage to the components. Stacking shall be done in a way that will prevent bending,
excessive pressure, abrasion or other permanent damage of the component and its
finished surfaces.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 335
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
2.
C.
4.10
Store tensioned ETFE fabric structure components and materials in a clean, dry location,
away from uncured concrete, masonry work, and other construction activities. Cover
with non-staining waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that
will permit circulation of air inside the covering.
Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes of
materials.
WARRANTY
A.
Unless stated otherwise in these Specifications, warranty shall state that the Work is in accord
with Drawings and Specifications, as amended by any changes authorized by the Architect,
free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of years as identified by the Basis
of Design product that begins with the date of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall agree
to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship to "like new condition", including
such exploratory work, required to determine the cause, during the warranty period, at no
additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall include with his proposal, copy(s) of
proposed warranty(s). Provide descriptions and terms of the annual maintenance contracts
offered and included with the proposed warranty.
B.
The warranty, the enforcement or lack of enforcement thereof, shall not deprive the Owner of
other actions, rights or remedies available to him. Warranty shall be in form approved by the
Owner. Warranty does not cover damage resulting from vandalism or acts of nature exceeding
specified performance criteria.
C.
Defective materials and workmanship is hereby defined to include, but not be limited to,
evidence of:
D.
1.
Structural failure of components resulting from forces within specified limits.
2.
Wrinkling of the ETFE membrane.
3.
Obvious noise or vibrations caused by normal and anticipated thermal movements.
4.
Cracking, crazing, flaking, discoloration of coatings on ETFE.
5.
Secondary damage due to falling components of the Work of this Contract.
6.
Discoloration, fading, chalking, excessive non-uniformity, pitting, cracking, peeling,
corrosion, or crazing of finish.
7.
Failure of touch-up finish to match factory finish.
8.
Failure to fulfill other specified performance requirements.
9.
Failure of operating parts to function normally.
The terms below used in conjunction with finish warranty are defined as follows:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 336
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
E.
1.
"Excessive fading": means a change in appearance that is determined using the Lab Scale
method and color variance shall not deviate more than 5 Hunter units, delta E, according
to ASTM D 2244.
2.
"Excessive non-uniformity": means non-uniform fading during the period of the
guarantee to the extent that adjacent parts have a color difference greater than the original
acceptable color range.
3.
"Will not pit or otherwise corrode": means there shall be no pitting or other type of
corrosion of finish discernible from a distance of 3 meters, resulting from the natural
elements in the atmosphere at the Project site.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or
replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
F.
4.11
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion
MAINTENANCE SERVICE PROPOSAL
A.
Proposal: As part of this Work provide a proposal for maintenance of the Tensioned ETFE
fabric structure including the following:
1.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months'
full maintenance by skilled employees of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure Installer.
Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement to ensure long-term
performance and durability of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure.
2.
Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a proposal for a yearly maintenance service
contract starting on the date the initial maintenance service is concluded. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
3.
Scope of the Maintenance Contract including but limited to the following services:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Inspection of the tensioned ETFE fabric membrane.
Cleaning the tensioned ETFE fabric membrane.
Repair of the tensioned ETFE fabric membrane.
Re- Tensioning of the tensioned structure.
Replacement of tensioned ETFE fabric panels as required.
133140 - 337
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
4.
All Maintenance Contracts are directly between the Owner and the ETFE contractor.
PART 5 - PRODUCTS
5.1
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum Components: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated in accordance with:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Stainless Steel Components: Alloys as required for the type of use and finish indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
5.2
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B429
Structural Profiles: ASTM B308/B308M
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10 / A5.10M
Sheets or Plates: ASTM A 666 Type 316L
Bar Stock and Shapes: ASTM A 276 Type 316L
Tubing: ASTM A 269 Type 316L or A554 Type 316L
Castings: ASTM A296 Type 316L
Stainless steel cables
Fasteners, Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended noncorrosive fasteners,
anchors and accessories that are compatible with materials used in the framing system.
Exposed portions of fasteners, anchors and accessories shall match the color of the fixing.
Where movement is expected, provide slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of
fluorocarbon resin, nylatron polyamide, or a similar material recommended by the
manufacturer. Space fasteners and anchors as recommended by the tensioned ETFE fabric
structure fabricator to suit system performance requirements.
FABRICATORS
A.
Basis-of-Design Fabricator: Birdair, Inc. A Taiyo Kogyo Company, 65 Lawrence Bell Drive,
Suite 100, Amherst, NY 14221, USA. (800) 622-2246.
B.
Subject to requirements provide assemblies by the basis-of-design fabricator, or a comparable
fabricator, acceptable to the Architect, selected from the following:
1.
Novum Structures LLC.
2.
Vector-Foiltec.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 338
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
5.3
FRAMING
A.
Contractor to provide custom fabricated aluminum sections and extrusions as indicated in the
Drawings. These section are to incorporate manufacturer's framing members of thickness
required to comply with the performance and architectural requirements:
1.
B.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Construction: ETFE tension membrane framed by aluminum profile and extruded
sections and tensioned with a stainless steel cables.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
All exterior fasteners or fasteners in wet areas shall be of a suitable grade of stainless
steel or be weather coated for corrosion resistance.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Torx head or other security type, internal socket,
fasteners.
Gaskets:
1.
Of dense-cured extruded silicone or EPDM, of configuration as recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.4
Gaskets and seals used to achieve the required weather and airtightness shall be
selected in accordance with ASTM C716 to fully accommodate the range of
dimensional tolerances associated with fabrication and installation of the Work.
They shall be formed with materials capable of maintaining their elastic
qualities, dimensions and resistance to physical and chemical attack sufficient to
maintain the full performance during the design life. Gaskets shall be free from
contact and migration stain and shall be compatible with all substrate, sealant
and finishes with which they are likely to come in contact.
Gaskets shall maintain their performance and properties for the expected service
life of the product. They shall resist the deleterious effects of water, cleaning
agents, temperature variations expected from the specified temperature ranges,
gaseous pollutants (including ozone), weak acids deriving from gaseous
pollutants dissolved in water and UV radiation to which they may be exposed
during installation and in service.
Extruded rubber gaskets: ASTM C509.
The gaskets shall be free of mould flash.
ETFE FILM
A.
The film to be used in constructing the membrane is to be 100% Ethylene-Tri-Fluoro-Ethylene
(E.T.F.E.) copolymer as marketed by Dupont as Tefzel, by Hoechst as Hostaflon ET VP 6235
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 339
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
and by Nowofol and Toray Industries. The material may also include trace amounts of metal
oxide pigments.
B.
Unless noted otherwise, Foils shall be manufactured by a specialist with a proven track record
in this type of construction. Suitable companies include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B&O Hightex
Saint Gobain
Ashai Glass
Nowofol
Vector – Foiltec
C.
Membrane Manufacture: The membrane component of each fabric panel shall require
fabrication steps including cutting to a pattern specific to each unit and fabrication of fasteners
and cable pocket for fastening and tensioning. One side of the membrane shall require a
factory applied monochromatic ink (frit) coating in custom patterns. The printed pattern shall
not diminish the self-cleaning properties of the ETFE.
D.
Strength:
E.
F.
1.
The thickness of the ETFE, fabrication methods, and re-tensioning strategy, will be as
required by the membrane manufacturer.
2.
ETFE strength properties shall comply with DIN 53 455 and other requirements of this
specification. Submit details of the chosen materials and properties prior to procuring
materials.
Fire and combustibility resistance:
1.
Melting point shall not be less than 275°C.
2.
ETFE shall have a low flammability category B1 when tested to DIN 4102.
3.
ETFE shall be classified M2 (i.e. no burning drips) according to NF P 92-505.
4.
The foil shall be Class I spread of flame (tested to BS 476 Part 7) or having the following
indices as measured against AS1530.3 – 1999:
a.
Ignitability Index = As specified with Basis of Design product
b.
Spread of Flame Index = As specified with Basis of Design product
c.
Heat Evolved Index = As specified with Basis of Design product
d.
Smoke Developed Index = As specified with Basis of Design product
Finish: Provide ETFE Film with a fritted dot pattern with 60% opacity, matching Architect’s
sample.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 340
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
5.5
STAINLESS STEEL CABLING, CABLE CLAMPS, AND FITTINGS
A.
5.6
Type 316 structural stainless steel strand with type 316 fittings (swage assemblies and spelter
sockets). Fitting breaking strength to meet or exceed cable breaking strength. Cables shall be
prestretched and marked in prestretched condition. Cable construction to be spiral structural
strand with diameter as required to suit performance requirements. Casting or forgings are not
acceptable. All cable fittings shall have a pinned connection to protect against fatigue failure
in the cable. Provide hydraulic tensioning system to add pretension if required by the system
designer. Cable and fitting manufactures known to comply with the requirements include the
following:
1.
Pfeifer.
2.
Brugg.
FABRICATION
A.
Head Mount Assembly
1.
Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction, field adjustment, and
minimum clearance and shimming. Fit and secure corners and joints rigidly with
fasteners, internal reinforcement or welding. Make exposed framing and trim joints and
connections flush, hairline and weatherproof. Match exposed work to produce continuity
of line.
a.
Complete the welding, cutting, drilling and fitting of joints prior to finishing. Weld
with electrodes and by methods recommended by the stainless steel manufacturers
in accordance with applicable recommendations of the AISC and AWS. Use only
methods which will avoid distortion or discoloration of exposed faces. Grind weld
areas smooth and restore mechanical finish condition before proceeding with other
treatment.
1)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Exposed Stainless Steel Components: In addition to the above requirements
comply with the following:
a)
All exposed edges and ends of plates or bars must be square and
smooth, free of cutting marks, shear distortion, burrs, and nicks.
b)
Provide uniform and consistent joints with all exposed copes, miters
and butt cuts.
c)
Select weld sizes, sequence, and equipment so as to limit distortions to
within allowable tolerances.
d)
Continuously weld joints in exposed stainless steel members to extent
as accepted by the Architect on shop drawings.
133140 - 341
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
e)
2.
Prepare components to receive anchor and connection devices and fasteners. Where
fasteners exposed to view from interior are required, provide bolts with finish matching
the exposed plate fittings.
a.
B.
Do not apply erection marks, symbols, or painted notes to exposed
surfaces.
For stainless steel members drill or punch holes at right angles to the surface of the
metal. Hole sizes shall be drilled to required bolt diameter with maximum size of
fastener holes in accordance with AISC specifications. Do not make or enlarge
holes by burning. Holes shall be clean-cut without torn or ragged edges. Remove
outside burrs resulting from drilling operations.
Outer Envelope Unit Assembly:
1.
ETFE membrane
a.
Production
1)
b.
a)
Crack or bend the foil material.
b)
Drag or pull the foil on any type of ground or surface without
adequate protection.
c)
Stand or walk on the foil.
2)
After patterning design cut the ETFE using computer controlled machinery,
such as a plot desk. The construction elements (cushions) of a project shall
be completely pre-produced in a factory environment. This area shall to be
maintained clean and free of dust.
3)
The overall film thickness over the width of the film is shall be measured on
a contact-free basis by means of a radiometric or capacitive measuring
facility. If individual layer thicknesses are to be measured in composite
films, then infrared measuring technology can be the right solution
Handling:
1)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Do Not,
Take the following precautions during storage:
a)
The material has to be stored dry and dark and rolls are to be located
in hanging position
b)
Protect the material against any dust or dirt
133140 - 342
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
2)
c.
3.
a)
Wear aseptic cotton-gloves.
b)
Avoid any unnecessary roll out or movement.
c)
In case of unrolling the ground has to be clean and free of , dirt or
hindrances.
Seam welding:
1)
2.
Handling procedures limit the risk of optical damages such a scratches,
buckling and dents, as well as fingerprints on material surface. During
manufacture and on each contact with the material:
Welding shall be performed in an automated manner in clean environment
and shall be visually inspected for defects. Testing shall be carried out on a
representative sample of completed welds using interference light to detect
poor welds.
Framework
a.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
b.
Grinding, cutting and shaping of metals shall be carried out using tools which will
not contaminate them with particles which could stain or corrode them.
c.
Joints shall be accurately formed without lipping or offsets in visible surfaces
unless designed otherwise. Other joints shall be rigidly secured to prevent all but
designed movement, unless shown otherwise.
d.
Profiles are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
e.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
f.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of ETFE membrane and
framing to maintain required edge clearances.
g.
Provisions for field replacement of ETFE.
h.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
Metal Framework Welding:
a.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
Metals shall be welded in accordance with the relevant standards using methods to
avoid discoloration and distortion. The type, size and spacing of welds shall be
shown on drawings and reviewed by the Architect, prior to fabrication.
133140 - 343
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
4.
b.
Welds shall be fully bonded throughout their length without holes, inclusions,
cracks or porosity so that the long term performance is not compromised and the
welds are strong enough for the design requirements.
c.
The welds shall be ground smooth and flush with the adjoining surfaces where
visible or impinging on other work. Site welding shall not be carried out. The
completed welded construction shall be finished to prevent corrosion. All welds
shall be cleaned as necessary to ensure the durability of the connections.
Cutting, drilling and milling
a.
5.
Pressing and folding
a.
C.
5.7
Use of arc cutting and acetylene gas cutting shall be minimized as much as
feasible. If required, Contractor shall submit full welding procedures to
demonstrate hardness remain within the required limits.
The folding and forming of aluminum sheets shall be carried out over dies or
mandrels with the minimum radii recommended by the Aluminum Association
in such publications as Aluminum Design Manual. Trial bends shall be made on
scrap material of the alloy, temper and thickness being used to ensure that it is
not cracked, torn, unevenly stretched or separated at grain membranes.
Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produce
continuity of line and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact and
rigidly secured.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish Application:
1.
Apply high performance organic coatings to all exposed aluminum exterior weathering
surfaces of Tensioned ETFE Fabric structure components.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: During production, maintain large size color range samples
for use in comparing against production material. Variations in appearance of abutting or
adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples. Noticeable
variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
D.
Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
E.
High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x and the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 344
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
1.
Polyvinylidene fluoride finish coating containing not less than 70% of "Arkema Kynar
500" or "Solvay Solexis Hylar 5000" fluorocarbon resin specially formulated for spray
application to extrusions and preformed aluminum metal shapes. Remove die markings,
scratches, abrasions, dents and other blemishes before applying finish. Coating films
shall be uniform and visibly free from flow lines, streaks, blisters, sags or other surface
imperfections in the dry-film state on all surfaces.
a.
Metal Preparation and Pretreatment: Pretreatment of aluminum surface and
application of the finish shall be performed under specifications issued by the
licensed formulator to approved applicator and the following as a minimum:
1)
2)
b.
Thickness:
1)
c.
d.
e.
The products used to form the chemical conversion coating on aluminum
extrusions shall conform with ASTM D1730, Type B, Method 5
(Amorphous Chromium Phosphate Treatment) or Method 7 (Amorphous
Chromate Treatment).
The coating weight of the chemical conversion coating shall be a minimum
of 3.72 mg. per sq. m on exposed surfaces as specified in ASTM B449,
Section 6, Class I. Processing shall conform with that specified in ASTM
B449, Section 5.
Fluoropolymer 3-Coat Coating System: Minimum 1.6 mil total dry film
thickness (0.00635 mm primer +/- 0.00127 mm and 0.034 mm topcoat).
Coating Performance Criteria: Meets or exceeding AAMA 2605.
Colors: Two custom colors to match Architect’s samples.
Manufacturer, Coating System:
1)
Three Coat, Flake System; one of the following:
a)
b)
5.8
PPG Industries; Duranar XL.
Valspar, Inc.; Fluropon Classic.
EXPOSED STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, non-directional textured, finish indicated,
free of cross scratches.
Stainless-Steel Finish:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 345
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
1.
C.
Typical: Non-directional, uniformly textured glass bead-blasted type 316L alloy stainless
steel finish matching the Architect’s sample.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 6 - EXECUTION
6.1
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate tensioned ETFE fabric structure work with the work of other Sections and provide
items to be placed during the installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in the
work.
B.
Place such items, including framing, accurately in relation to the final location of tensioned
ETFE fabric structure components.
6.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and conditions under which the Work is to be
installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
6.3
Before beginning installation of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure work examine all
parts of the structural frame indicated to support the tensioned ETFE fabric structure
work. Notify Contractor in writing, of any dimensions, or conditions, found which will
prevent the proper execution of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure work, including
specified tolerances.
TRIAL INSTALLATION
A.
Provide initial installation of Project wall assembly for review for installation quality, fit and
finish.
1.
2.
3.
6.4
Notify Architect and Contractor of the proposed area for trial installation two weeks prior
to the start of trial installation.
Approved trial installation mockups may become part of the completed Contract Work if
undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
Approval of trial installation mock-up does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such
deviations in writing.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and
installing the tensioned ETFE fabric structure components. Do not install damaged
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 346
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
components. Fit joints to produce joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Cut and trim component parts of the tensioned ETFE fabric structure work during
erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with
his recommendations. Restore finish completely to protect material and remove all
evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and
trimming has impaired strength or appearance, as directed by Architect.
Set components within the erection tolerances.
Do not erect components which are warped, deformed, bowed, dented, defaced or
otherwise damaged as to impair its strength or appearance. Remove and replace
members damaged in the process of erection.
Coat concealed surfaces of dissimilar materials, and any ferrous metal components, with
a heavy coating of bituminous paint, zinc rich primer or other separation in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
No holes or slots shall be burned, cut into, or field drilled in any adjacent steel framing.
B.
Tensioned ETFE Fabric Structure Framing: Install framing components plumb and true in
alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members.
C.
Install ETFE tension membrane to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
6.5
Install membrane to ensure adequate tension.
Avoid wrinkling, distorting or tearing the membrane.
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
The Contract Work shall be fabricated and erected to accommodate the dimensional tolerances
of the structural frame while providing the following as installed tolerances.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.6
Variation from theoretical calculated position as located in plan or elevation in relation to
established floors lines, column lines and other fixed elements of the structure, including
variations from plumb, level, straight and member size: +/- 6 mm in any 6 m run,
column-to-column bay, or floor-to-floor height.
Alignment: Where surfaces about in line, and meet at corners, limit offset from true
alignment to 0.75 mm.
Variation from angle, or plumb, shown: +/- 3 mm in any 3 m run or story height, noncumulative.
Variation from slope, or level, shown: +/- 3 mm in any 6 m run or column-to-column
bay, non-cumulative.
ANCHORAGE
A.
Anchorage of the Contract Work to the steel structure shall be in accordance with the accepted
shop drawings.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 347
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
6.7
WELDING
A.
Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being
welded.
B.
Welds and adjacent metal areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with two coats of a
zinc-rich primer and three coats of alkyd paint where painted surfaces are specified.
6.8
REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
A.
6.9
All debris caused by, or incidental to, the erection of the Contract Work shall be removed
from the site and disposed of legally.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
All components of the Work shall be protected from detrimental weather and damage until
construction operations are completed and acceptable to the Architect.
1.
Apply removable protection film on all exposed framing members.
B.
Work which cannot for reasons acceptable to Architect be covered with complete construction
system before onset of weather detrimental to Work shall be completely covered and protected
in such a manner as to deflect water and weather from the installation without damaging
adjacent Work.
C.
Protect ETFE membrane from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into
contact with the membrane, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by
the ETFE manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace ETFE that is torn, distorted, yielded, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash ETFE membrane on external surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash
ETFE as recommended in writing by ETFE manufacturer and fabricator.
6.10
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's maintenance personnel
to maintain the tensioned ETFE assemblies.
END OF SECTION 13 31 40
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/2014
133140 - 348
Gensler
TENSIONED ETFE FABRIC STRUCTURE
SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
Sleeves for raceways and cables.
Sleeve seals.
Grout.
Common electrical installation requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-dieneterpolymer rubber.
B.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For sleeve seals.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
Eager Park
Bid Documents– 8/15/14
260500 - 349
RK&K
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished
surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section
"Access Doors and Frames."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A.
Retain one of first two paragraphs below for penetrations through exterior walls above and
below grade.
B.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Metal Thickness:
a.
b.
2.2
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more
than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and
1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
SLEEVE SEALS
B.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and raceway or cable.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel, Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing
element.
GROUT
D.
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time.
Eager Park
Bid Documents– 8/15/14
260500 - 350
RK&K
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
3.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
F.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items.
G.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
H.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
I.
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
J.
Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways
penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
K.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
L.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
M.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
N.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
O.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
P.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable,
unless indicated otherwise.
Q.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry
1.
R.
Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed
surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".
Eager Park
Bid Documents– 8/15/14
260500 - 351
RK&K
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
S.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
T.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
U.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
V.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow
for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
W.
Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
X.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
END OF SECTION 260500
Eager Park
Bid Documents– 8/15/14
260500 - 352
RK&K
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 260501 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Division Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
General: The provisions of this section are general and are intended to apply to all electrical
sections, to govern the quality of design, fabrication, workmanship and operation of materials,
equipment and appurtenances to be furnished and/or installed there under.
B.
Equipment: All electrical equipment, including but not limited to, wiring devices, wiring
materials and electrical construction materials shall be new and of the highest quality and latest
improved design.
C.
Workmanship: Workmanship shall be of the highest grade and all installation work shall be
performed by thoroughly qualified mechanics of the appropriate trade. All equipment shall be
installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering practice. Manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations shall be followed and all electric connections shall be
provided.
D.
Completeness: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services
necessary for the complete electrical system ready for continuous operation.
E.
Drawings: The drawings showing the layout of the electrical system indicate approximate
locations of outlets, apparatus and equipment. The runs of feeders and branches as shown, the
drawings are schematic only and are not intended to show the exact routing and location of
conduits and conduit terminations. The final determination as to routing, location and
termination shall be governed by structural conditions, obstructions and job conditions. This
shall not be construed to mean that the design of the system may be changed without the written
approval of the Engineer; it merely refers to the exact run of raceways and the exact placement
of outlets, etc. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain all shop drawings affecting
conduit terminations to the equipment specified in this or other sections or furnished by others,
and to verify conduit locations before installation. The
Contractor shall consult all contract drawings and specifications which may affect the location of any
equipment or conduit run, to avoid improper locations of such items and to avoid interference with
other trades.
F.
Accessibility: Electrical equipment such as junction and pull boxes, panel boards, switches,
controls and such other apparatus as may require maintenance or operation from time to time is
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 353
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
made easily accessible. Although the equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain
locations, in the course of building construction, it may develop that such locations do not
afford proper accessibility, in which case the Contractor shall direct the Engineer's attention to
the condition before advancing the construction.
G.
Site examinations: All bidders, prior to submitting a bid, shall thoroughly acquaint themselves
with the conditions under which the work will be performed.
H.
Unless noted as “existing” or “relocated”, all construction is new and shall be furnished and
installed by the contractor.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.4
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with electrical construction code requirements
of State, City and such other local political subdivision specifications as may exceed the
requirements of national codes, standards and approving bodies.
1.
Code Compliance Inspection: Have the work inspected by an authorized inspection
agency for compliance with National Electrical Code and obtain certificates of approval,
acceptance, and compliance with code regulations. Work shall not be deemed complete
until such certificates have been delivered to the City.
2.
All electrical equipment installed under this contract shall bear UL label.
Certificates and Permits: Upon completion of work, and prior to final payment, furnish to the
Engineer formal certification of final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction and secure
required permits or certificates (if any) from such authorities. Additionally, prepare detailed
diagrams and drawings which may be required by those authorities having jurisdiction. All the
cost for obtaining certificates and permits will be paid by the Contractor.
REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS
A.
Basic References: The following codes, standards, and approvals, shall serve as the minimum
standards and quality requirements directly appropriate to the work and workmanship.
References to catalogs, standards, codes, specifications and recommendations, etc., means latest
edition of such publications in effect at the date of invitation to submit bid.
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI C2; National Electrical Safety
Code - Latest Edition.
2.
National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Standards as apply to specified
Products.
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70 ( National Electrical Code),
NFPA 72 and other applicable NFPA codes
4.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings, Labels, and Approvals shall govern the
quality and performance of specified Products.
5.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 354
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
B.
1.5
Definitions:
1.
“Provide”
- means “furnish and install”
2.
“Indicated”
- means “indicated in contract documents”
3.
“Concealed” - means items referred to are hidden from normal sight, this includes
items partly excavated or crawl spaces and in service tunnels used solely for repairs and
maintenance
4.
“Exposed”
- means items are not “concealed”
5.
“Feeder”
- means “All circuit conductors between the service equipment, the
source of a separately derived system, or other power supply source and the final branchcircuit overcurrent device”
6.
“Feeder circuit breakers” - means circuit breakers protecting feeders.
7.
NETA ATS
- International Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing
Specifications 1999 Edition
8.
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
9.
Outdoors – An area that is NOT inside a building.
10. Indoors – An area that is inside a building.
11. Building – A structure that stands alone or that is cut off from adjoining structures by fire
walls with all openings therein protected by approved fire doors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit Product Data applicable to items listed under Submittals in each Section
of Division 26; and such items as may be Scheduled on the Drawings.
B.
Shop Drawings
C.
1.
General: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, before fabrication,
detailed shop drawings for all electrical equipment and materials in accordance with the
requirements of Division 1 Section "Submittals".
2.
Shop drawings shall clearly indicate, using arrows and/or highlighting on all copies,
which items are being submitted and that each item being submitted is in compliance
with all requirements on the drawings and in these specifications. All pertinent
specification and drawing requirements shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s
drawings.
"As-Built" Drawings:
1.
D.
Accurate project record drawings and specifications, showing in red ink on the working
drawings and electrical drawings all changes from the original plans made during
installation of the work. Upon completion of the work the contractor shall deliver to the
City one neat set of drawings with alterations and notations made in red ink.
Operating and Maintenance Manuals
1.
General: Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish Operating and
Maintenance Manuals for use by the Owner. The manuals shall include operating and
maintenance information on all systems and items of equipment. The data shall consist
of catalogs, brochures, bulletins, charts, schedules and drawings describing location,
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 355
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
operation, maintenance, lubrication, operating weight and other information necessary for
the Owner to establish an effective operating and maintenance program.
1.6
2.
Shop Drawings: Copies of appropriate shop drawings shall be included in the Operating
and Maintenance Manuals. The requirements for manuals are a separate contractual item
and in no way supersedes the requirements for shop drawings and vice-versa.
3.
Approval: Completed manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and
approval. Incomplete or inadequate manuals will be returned to the Contractor for
correction and resubmission.
4.
List: Manuals shall be submitted for all the equipment specified.
5.
Provide 3 copies of each operating and maintenance manual unless a greater quantity is
specified elsewhere in the specifications, in which case the higher quantity will apply.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials and equipment to the Project site in a clean condition with openings plugged
or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) both during shipping and during temporary
storage.
B.
Delivered electrical equipment crating and/or packaging shall clearly identify pick-points or liftpoints. In the absence of crating or packaging, pick-points or lift-points must be identified on
the equipment.
C.
When unloading materials and equipment provide special lifting harness or apparatus as may be
required by manufacturers. Handle materials and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
D.
The Contractor shall determine the required equipment needed for unloading operations and
have such equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery.
E.
Store materials and equipment, both on and off site, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. Keep equipment in a dry location.
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
The Contractor shall guarantee that all work performed and all materials and equipment
installed by him are free from defects. He shall repair or replace any defective equipment,
materials or workmanship, free of cost to the Owner for a period of one (1) year from date of
final acceptance. Where individual specification sections indicate a warranty period longer than
one (1) year, the longer warranty period shall apply.
B.
During this warranty period the Contractor shall:
1.
Correct and make good all electrical defects. Faulty equipment and materials shall be
repaired or replaced as required to produce satisfactory results as directed by the engineer
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 356
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
and without additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall provide service within 24
hours after the call has been made by the Owner.
C.
1.8
DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK
1. Damage: Cutting or damage to existing structures, surfaces or installations shall be
repaired at the expense of the Contractor. All such repairs or patching shall be done by
mechanics of the appropriate trade and shall be neatly done and in such a fashion as to
leave no readily apparent joint or change in appearance, and to leave no structural or
other weakness.
TEMPORARY POWER
A.
1.9
Contractor shall be entirely responsible for temporary power. All applications, fees, temporary
connections, etc. shall be made by the contractor.
COORDINATION
A.
General: The Contractor shall coordinate the work as specified herein in this Division with
work to be performed and equipment to be furnished under other Divisions of the specifications
to insure a complete and satisfactory installation.
END OF SECTION 260501
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 357
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260501 - 358
RK&K
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 260519 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Division Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
Alcan Aluminum Coporation: Alcan Cable Div.
2.
American Insulated Wire Corp.: a Leviton Company.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260519 - 359
RK&K
LOW VOLT. ELECT. POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
3.
4.
Southwire Company.
Or Approved Equal
B.
Refer to Part 3 “Conductor and Insulation Applications” Article for insulation type, cable
construction, and ratings.
C.
Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG
and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
D.
Cable Duct: Cable Duct shall consist of cables preinstalled in either Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
or polythene (PE) plastic duct conforming to NEMA TC 7 and the NEC. PVC shall conform to
D 3485. PE duct shall be manufactured from black, virgin, high density PE resin conforming to
D 1248, Type III. Grade P34, Class C, Category 5. Minimum inside diameter of duct shall be
1-1/2 in. Cable shall be rated for 600 volts.
E.
Ground wire: Ground wire shall be bare medium drawn copper. Ground wire installed
underground shall be of the size (solid or stranded) configuration shown in the contract drawing
Conductor.
F.
Insulation Types: Type THWN/XHHN complying with NEMA WC 5.
2.3
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Available Manufacturers:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
4.
Or approved equal.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Service Entrance: Type XHHW-THWN, single conductors in concrete duct bank of PVC
conduit
C.
Feeders concealed below grade: Type THWN, direct buried in PVC conduit.
D.
Branch Circuits Concealed below Grade: Type duct cable, direct buried and in PVC conduit,
while crossing pavement area.
E.
Branch circuit for luminaries and photocell: Type THWN, single conductor in raceway.
F.
Control circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260519 - 360
RK&K
LOW VOLT. ELECT. POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and
follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements.
F.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section “Identification
for Electrical Systems.”
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published torquetightening values. If manufacturuer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL486A and UL-486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
3.4
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping.
B.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved openings.
D.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies
unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall.
E.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
F.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G.
Size pipe sleeves to provide ¼-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless seal is
to be installed.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260519 - 361
RK&K
LOW VOLT. ELECT. POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
H.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
I.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve
and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
J.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials.
K.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing
units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L.
Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical
sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M.
Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Size
sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.
3.5
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and
size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular
space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing
elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.6
FILED QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Upon installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
Procedure: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA Standard ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B.
Correct malfunctioning products at site, where possible, and retest compliance; otherwise,
remove and replace with new units, and retest, to demonstrate compliance.
END OF SECTION 260519
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260519 - 362
RK&K
LOW VOLT. ELECT. POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
SECTION 260530 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Division Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This section includes the following:
1.
Electrical equipment coordination and installation.
2.
Common electrical installation requirements.
3.
Electrical penetrations
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:
1.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce
headroom are indicated.
2.
To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other
installations.
3.
To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.
4.
So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of
obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete,
masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and
systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful
interoperability.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260530 - 363
RK&K
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FIRESTOPPING
A.
Materials:
barrier.
UL listed and labeled and FM approved for fire rating consistent with penetrated
B.
Material:
NRTL listed and labeled for fire consistent with penetrating barrier.
C.
Sleeves:
Schedule 40, welded, black steel pipe sleeves. Sizes as indicated or minimum
NEC size for cable or cable group to be installed.
D.
Sealing fitting:
Suitable for sealing cables in sleeves or core drilled holes.
E.
Sealing mortar:
Suitable for sealing cable penetration slots/openings in fire rated barriers.
F.
Sealant:
One (1) part compound for sealing cables, sleeves, and openings in fire barriers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit
for wall-mounting items, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom
consistent with these requirements.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components
of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to
facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: All penetrations of concrete slabs and walls shall be core-drilled.
Grout between core-drilled holes and raceway. Do not damage concrete reinforcement or rebar.
B.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable
penetration sleeves with firestop materials.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260530 - 364
RK&K
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
3.3
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.4
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly at the penetrations. Perform firestopping as specified
in 'firestopping'.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work. Correct installations if possible.
Remove and replace defective products.
END OF SECTION 260530
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260530 - 365
RK&K
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260530 - 366
RK&K
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for
exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.
C.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
D.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
E.
LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
F.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 367
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2.
Alflex Inc.
3.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5.
Electri-Flex Co.
6.
Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7.
Maverick Tube Corporation.
8.
O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
9.
Or approved equal.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.
D.
IMC: ANSI C80.6.
E.
PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
1.
Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2.
Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.
F.
EMT: ANSI C80.3.
G.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel
H.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
I.
Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
J.
Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies,
and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and
enhance their conductivity.
2.2
OPTICAL FIBER/COMMUNICATIONS CABLE RACEWAY AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Arnco Corporation.
2.
Endot Industries Inc.
3.
IPEX Inc.
4.
Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
5.
Or approved equal.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 368
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B.
2.3
Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible type, approved for general-use installation.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
2.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
3.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
4.
Hoffman.
5.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.
6.
O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
7.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
8.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
9.
Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.
10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).
13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
14. Or approved equal.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast 316 Stainless Steel Device Boxes: UL 514A.
D.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
E.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
F.
Cabinets:
1.
NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.
Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3.
Key latch to match panelboards.
4.
Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
2.4
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain
ends.
B.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch
(1.3- or 3.5-mm) thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
C.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 369
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.5
SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.
Calpico, Inc.
3.
Metraflex Co.
4.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5.
Or approved equal.
B.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and cable.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.
Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.
2.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.6
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A.
Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance
with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1.
Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit
2.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit.
3.
Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC
5.
Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B.
Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: RGS
2.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: RGS.
3.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
5.
Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit].
6.
Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental
Air: EMT
7.
Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or
Communications Cable: General-use, optical fiber/communications cable raceway.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 370
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
8.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless
steel in damp or wet locations.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F.
Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated.
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support.
2.
Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion
fittings.
3.
Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising
above the floor.
I.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings
to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 371
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
K.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end
of pull wire.
L.
Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and
nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1.
3/4-Inch (19-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50
feet (15 m).
2.
1-Inch (25-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet
(23 m).
3.
Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
M.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway
sealing fittings at the following points:
1.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
N.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for
equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and
motors.
1.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2.
Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
O.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall.
P.
Recessed device boxes for mounting in steel columns of pavilions shall be furnished to the
pavilion steel fabricator for welding into the column channels.
Q.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
R.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping
specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed
openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 372
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.4
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements
are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 373
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260533 - 374
RK&K
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Standard Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Ducts in direct-buried duct banks.
2.
Handholes and handhole accessories.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding
electrodes, clamps and connectors for grounding metallic handhole accessories, and
testing of grounds.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Handhole hardware.
2.
Conduit and ducts, including elbows, bell ends, bends, fittings, and solvent cement.
3.
Duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.
4.
Warning tape.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for underground ducts and utility
structures and include the following:
1.
For Handholes:
a.
Duct sizes and locations of duct entries.
b.
Reinforcement details.
c.
Handhole covers design.
d.
Grounding details.
C.
Record Documents: Show dimensional locations of underground ducts and handholes
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with ANSI C2.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 375 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
C.
1.5
Comply with NFPA 70.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent
bending, warping, and deforming.
B.
Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical
damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.
C.
Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by City or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated
1.
Notify City at least two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without City's written permission
B.
Construction staking:
1.
The Contractor shall provide stakes and reference marks necessary for all construction of
the improvements covered by this Contract.
2.
Final location of Control stakes shall be approved by the Engineer before proceeding
with the proposed work.
3.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to inform his employees and his
Subcontractors of the stakes’ importance, and the necessity for their preservation. The
cost of replacing such controls, should it become necessary for any reason whatsoever,
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ducts and hand holes with final arrangement of other
utilities and site grading, as determined in the field.
B.
Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into hand holes with final profiles of
conduits as determined by coordination with existing and other utilities and underground
obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field
conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to handholes, and as approved by Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUIT
A.
Conduit and fittings are specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
System."
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 376 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
2.2
DUCTS
A.
2.3
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings
by the same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B
HANDHOLES
A.
2.4
MATERIALS
1.
Handbox Base: Mix No. 3 Concrete, as per Std. Detail BC 804.01.
2.
Cylindrical Box Section: Mix No. 3 Concrete, Wire Mesh Reinforced, as per City Std.
BC Detail 804.02.
3.
Frame and Cover: Cast Iron and Cast Steel, respectively, as per City Standard Details BC
804.03 through 804.09. Covers for electric service shall read “DPW CONDUIT”.
4.
Ground Rod: Solid, steel, 3/4” diameter x 10’ length, with rod copper-jacketed, UL
Approved and Listed.
5.
Ground Rod: Solid, steel, 3/4” diameter x 10’ length, with rod copper-jacketed, UL
Approved and Listed.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grounding Materials: Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to
cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F. Capable of withstanding
temperature of 300 deg F without slump and of adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts,
metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets,
insulation materials, and common metals.
2.5
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A.
Mortar: Comply with ASTM C 270, Type M, except for quantities less than 2.0 cu. ft. where
packaged mix complying with ASTM C 387, Type M, may be used.
B.
Concrete: Use 3000-psi- minimum, 28-day compressive strength and 3/8-inch maximum
aggregate size. Concrete and reinforcement are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Underground Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: Type Sch. 40 PVC, direct-buried duct bank.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 377 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
3.2
EARTHWORK
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for verifying existing and location of all utilities prior of start of
excavation. Call Miss Utility (1-800-257-7777) 72 Hrs prior to excavation. Any existing utilities
and structure damaged by contractor’s operation shall be repaired immediately at contractor’s
expenses.
B.
Contractor shall verify existing utilities, locations, and inverts and points of connection.
C.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of
pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
D.
Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
E.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
F.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
G.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
H.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
I.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
J.
Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
K.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless
otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.
L.
Restore all areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore
vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and
mulching.
M.
Restore disturbed pavement.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A.
Direct-Buried Conduit:
1.
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork”.
2.
Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork".
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 378 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
3.
4.
5.
After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end
of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction
as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12
inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete
backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout the length of the elbow.
Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and
at building entrances through the floor.
a.
Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase
coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
b.
For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit
horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation.
Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
c.
Provide 3/4” PVC sleeves for protection of grounding conductor from the ground
rod enters the pole base.
B.
Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches below grade. Align tape parallel to
and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each
12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12
inches apart, horizontally.
C.
Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf test nylon cord in ducts.
3.4
HANDHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for verifying existing and location of all utilities prior of start of
excavation. Call Miss Utility (1-800-257-7777) 72 Hrs prior to excavation. Any existing utilities
and structure damaged by contractor’s operation shall be repaired immediately at contractor’s
expenses.
B.
Grounding: Install ground rod through floor in each structure with top protruding 4 inches
above floor. Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof nonshrink grout.
Ground exposed metal components and hardware with bare-copper ground conductors. Train
conductors neatly around corners. Use cable clamps secured with expansion anchors to attach
ground conductors.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of
installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
B.
Grounding: Test handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding
connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems"
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 379 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
C.
Duct Integrity: Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and
test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of the duct. If obstructions
are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
D.
Correct installations if possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace
defective products and retest.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.
Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout
ducts.
END OF SECTION 260543
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
260543 - 380 UNDGRND. DUCTS &RACEWAYS FOR ELECT. SYSTEMS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Standard Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1.
Outdoor photoelectric switches.
2.
Multipole contactors.
3.
Time Switches.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for photoelectric switches and lighting contactors.
1.
Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is
supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and
partition assemblies.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260923 - 381
RK&K
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.3
Line-Voltage Surge Protection: An integral part of the devices for 120/208 solid-state
equipment. For devices without integral line-voltage surge protection, field-mounting surge
protection shall comply with IEEE C62.41 and with UL 1449.
OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Area Lighting Research, Inc.
2.
Fisher Pierce.
3.
TORK
4.
Or approved equal.
B.
Description: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA
inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, and complying with UL 773A.
1.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range.
2.
Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
3.
Surge Protection:
Metal-oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41 for
Category A1 locations.
4.
Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the North sky
exposure.
2.4
MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
2.
ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.
3.
Cutler-Hammer; Eaton Corporation.
4.
Or approved equal.
B.
Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and
UL 508.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260923 - 382
RK&K
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
1.
2.
2.5
Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
Control-Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
TIME SWITCHES
A.
2.6
Manufacturer: -Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the
following:
1.
Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics.
2.
Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company.
3.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
4.
Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company.
5.
Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.
6.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
7.
TORK.
8.
Touch-Plate, Inc.
9.
Watt Stopper (The).
10. Or approved equal
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG, complying with Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Electrical Conductors and Cables”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SENSOR INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas indicated.
Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power conductors
and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate
power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
D.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260923 - 383
RK&K
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
E.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
F.
Place and compact bedding course on Retain paragraph and subparagraphs below unless
locations for expansion fittings for PVC conduits are indicated on Drawings. See Evaluations.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems".
B.
Label contactors with a unique designation.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
B.
Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 260923
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
260923 - 384
RK&K
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
For work under this Contract, all Standard Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 26 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and
finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
b.
Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
c.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
d.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
2.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 385
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
B.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by City or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging
to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Plant Manager no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of
electrical service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Plant Manager's written
permission.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a.
Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
b.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.
c.
Square D.
d.
Or approved equal.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 386
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise noted on the
drawings.
1.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
2.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or
primer coat.
3.
Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside
panelboard door.
B.
Phase and Ground Buses:
1.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
2.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
C.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.
1.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
2.
Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.
2.3
PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A.
2.4
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:
disturbing adjacent units.
B.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.5
Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
3.
Main circuit Breaker shall have the provision to connect two wires on outgoing (Off) side
as shown on plan.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and
number of poles.
1.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
2.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 387
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
3.
2.6
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a single
unit.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Fungus Proofing: Provide permanent fungicidal treatment for panelboard interior, including
overcurrent protective devices and other components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts
uniformly flush with wall finish.
D.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers.
1.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing
load balancing.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification For Electrical System."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain
approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten
directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with
corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
System."
B.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 388
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.
1.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
2.
Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3.
After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4.
Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is
not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 262416
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 389
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
262416 - 390
RK&K
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 265100 - ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
GENERAL REFERENCE
All Work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of the Conditions of the Contract
(General, Supplementary, and Special), with all Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements,
with the Drawings, and with all other Contract Documents.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
All information contained in the Fixture Schedule, Fixture Cuts, Layouts and Specifications shall
be considered to form a complete and integrated Specification for Lighting Fixtures. The
Contractor is responsible for contacting the Architect regarding the proper interpretation of all
information indicated on the Lighting Fixture Schedules, Fixture Cuts and Details, the Electrical
Plans and the Reflected Ceiling plans.
The Contractor is responsible for all fixture quantities, lengths and clearances required. The
Contractor shall inform the Architect of project conditions, which affect installation, or fixture
location at the time submission is made.
Any exception to the following Specifications shall be qualified in writing by the Contractor prior
to the submission of bids. Only upon the Contractor's receipt of the Architect's written approval
of the requested exception shall the Contractor's bid be accepted by the Owner.
At each location shown on the drawings, furnish and install a lighting fixture of the type
indicated.
Furnish and install all materials, accessories and other equipment necessary for the complete and
proper installation of all lighting fixtures included in this Contract.
Fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the Contract Drawings and
Specifications.
Specifications and scale drawings are intended to convey the salient features, function and
character of the fixtures only, and do not undertake to specify every item or detail necessary.
Minor details necessary for the proper execution and completion of the fixtures not indicated on
the drawings nor specified shall be provided as if they were specified here or indicated on the
drawings. Parts not specifically identified shall be made of materials most appropriate for their
intended use.
The Owner shall not be held responsible for the omission or absence of any detail, construction
feature, etc. which may be required in the production or installation of the lighting fixtures. The
responsibility of obtaining all information necessary for accurately fabricating the lighting
fixtures to the fulfillment of this specification rests with the Contractor.
Contractor shall furnish unit fixture costs during all bidding phases. “Packaging” or lump sum
pricing is not acceptable.
Contractor shall provide unit costs for each listed approved manufacturer for each fixture type.
Owner shall be entitled to “cherry pick” individual fixtures at their sole discretion, at published
unit prices. Separate fixture, lamp, and installation costs shall be provided for each individual
fixture type for each manufacturer as required by Architect.
Unit costs for all equipment shall apply to the Owner for all fixtures, regardless of quantity or use
of fixtures, for the full term of the project, or 12 months whichever is shorter.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 391
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
L.
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Unit price format shall be MS Excel listed as “Quantity x Unit Price = Extended Price” for each
fixture and fixture variant.
ALTERNATES
Alternates shall meet performance and aesthetics of primary specification, subject to final
judgment by the Designer. Furnish requested review samples within one week of request or
Contractor will be bound to provide primary specification
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
Related Sections of electrical Work: Refer to pertinent Division 16 Electrical Sections for
information relevant to this Section.
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
Shop drawings of all custom or modified standard lighting equipment shall be submitted in
reproducible sepia form only. Shop Drawings shall be drawn at either full size or half-full size
wherever practical. Shop Drawings shall illustrate a minimum of three (3) critical views
indicating all fabrication and assembly methods, materials, material gauges and finishes to be
employed, electrical supply, mechanical support, electrical accessories, etc. Shop Drawings of
custom and modified standard fixtures shall clearly indicate the fixture type, the drawings
referenced in the development of the shop drawings and the names of the project, Architect and
Lighting Consultant. Shop Drawings of standard fixtures shall clearly indicate the fixture type
and space permitting, the names of the project, Architect and Lighting Consultant.
Submittals lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with Contract documents will be
rejected without review and any penalty for delay will borne by the Contractor.
Review of shop drawings or samples does not waive Contract requirements.
Fixtures substitutions (from manufacturers other than those listed as approved equal) shall be
equal in all respects of performance, quality of construction, suitability to project conditions and
appearance of the specified fixture. The Lighting Designer will be the sole arbiter of what
constitutes an “equal.” Substitutions shall be submitted for consideration in the form of catalog
cuts or detail drawings not later than three weeks before base bids are due to allow for timely
processing. Provided with the substitution submission shall be unified cost savings for substitute
product in comparison to base specified product, as well as Contractors’ cost basis for the
equipment. Actual fixture samples shall be provided at the same time the substitution paperwork
is submitted. Substitutions will not be entertained without all this information. Disapproved
substitutions shall be withdrawn and a submission for a listed approved manufacturer shall follow
with no time penalty to the project.
"Approved Equal" specification status does not exempt the identified manufacturers from full and
complete compliance with all criteria identified either in the specification or as attributed to
"prime specification" equipment with regard to photometric performance, brightness control,
aperture size, finishes, trim configuration, etc.
No variation from the general arrangement, dimensions and details indicated on the drawings
shall be made on the shop drawings unless required to suit field conditions, and then only with the
written approval of the Architect. All variations must be clearly marked as such on drawings
submitted for approval.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 392
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
G.
Dimensions and configurations of continuous fixtures shall be field verified by the fixture
manufacturer.
H.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval before fabrication. Fabrication details may vary
slightly from those shown on drawings provided those changes do not adversely affect ease of
installation, durability, performance or appearance of fixture.
I.
Reflector curves shown are for representation only. Curves shall be mathematically determined
and empirically tested by the fixture manufacturer to achieve distributions indicated. Dark areas,
hot spots, rings, etc. shall not be acceptable.
J.
Upon request, supply complete photometric data for the fixture furnished by a recognized
independent testing laboratory using methods recommended by the Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America.
K.
For direct and semi-direct fixtures used for general illumination:
1.
Visual Comfort Probability data (fluorescent only for 100 footcandles), rooms with
reflectances of 80% (ceiling) 50% (walls), and 20% (floor), including a (20 ft. by 20 ft.)
room with 10 ft ceiling and luminaires lengthwise.
2.
Coefficients of utilization.
3.
Candlepower data, presented graphically and numerically, in 5° increments (5°, 10°, 15°
etc.). Data developed for up and down quadrants normal, parallel, and at 221/2°, 45°,
1671/2° to lamps if light output is asymmetric.
4.
Zonal lumens stated numerically in 10° increments (5°, 15°, etc.) as above.
5.
For area and roadway luminaires:
6.
Isocandela and / or isofootcandle charts.
7.
Coefficients of utilization.
8.
IES roadway / area lighting distribution classification.
1.6
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
SAMPLES
Upon the request of the Architect or Lighting Consultant, after shop drawing review and prior to
release for manufacturing, Contractor shall submit for approval one complete and functioning
representative sample (and / or mock-up of any fixture component) within 30 days of request of
any lighting fixture required under this Contract. Approved sample fixtures shall be sent to the
project for use as a standard. If the sample fixture is disapproved, the Contractor shall
immediately submit the initially named manufacturer for approval.
Pursuant to the sample provisions above Contractor shall provide, for inspection of finish and
workmanship, functioning samples of all fixture types requested by Architect. Refer to fixture
specification for additional sample requirements.
Samples shall be complete with specified lamp(s), ready for hanging, energizing, and examining,
and shall be shipped to the Lighting Consultant, or as otherwise advised by the Architect.
Fixtures designed to be operated at voltages other than 120V shall be shipped with an appropriate
buck or boost transformer to permit 120V operation during examination.
All shipping costs shall be prepaid by the Contractor.
The Architect and Lighting Consultant shall be allowed ten business days from date received for
thorough examination of the samples.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 393
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
1.7
A.
B.
1.8.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the Electrical Code
adopted by the local municipality and all applicable Federal, State and other codes and
regulations.
All fixtures shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the appropriate and current
requirements of the Electrical Code adopted by the local municipality, Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. "Standards for Safety," and other standards as deemed applicable. A code
authority approved listing shall be provided for each fixture type, and the appropriate label or
labels shall be affixed to each fixture in a position concealed from normal view, either directly or
as a reflected image.
QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
A.
"Base Bid" and "Approved Equal" manufacturers listed in the fixture schedule may be assumed
capable of supplying the fixtures as specified. Manufacturers not listed must have a minimum of
five years' experience in design and manufacture of lighting fixtures of the type and quality
shown. A pre-qualification submission shall include a list of completed projects and dates of
completion as well as samples, which represent the type and quality of the fixture(s) specified.
The Architect and the Lighting Consultant shall be the sole judges of whether the substitute
manufacturer can comply with the specifications.
B.
“Base Bid” and “Approved Equal” manufacturers listed must have experience furnishing
equipment to a project of this project’s magnitude. Furnish a list of projects with references to
substantiate as required.
1.9
A.
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
The Contractor shall receive, handle, and store equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage,
to equipment, nor impede the progress of work.
COORDINATION
Where lighting equipment interfaces with or relies upon architectural enclosures, substrates, or
bonding material, the Contractor shall coordinate subcontractors work and demonstrate
coordination via the shop drawings and/or mock-ups as necessary.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials, equipment and appurtenances as well as workmanship provided under this Section
shall conform to the highest commercial standard.
The Contractor shall coordinate the lighting fixture installation with the drawings and details of
the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical, and other related trades to assure a perfect
and efficient installation.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 394
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
1.12
WARRANTY
A.
The Manufacturer shall warrant the fixture, its finishes, and all of its component parts, except
ballasts, acrylic plastic lenses and Alzak parabolic cones to be free from defects for a period of
one year from date of acceptance if operated within rated voltage range. Ballasts shall be
warranted for two years. Alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a
minimum of ten years. Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall remain free of any dimensional
instability, discoloration, embrittlement, or loss of light transmittance for 15 years. Replacement
of faulty materials and the cost of labor required to make the replacement shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
Lamps shall be warranted from the contractor for labor and equipment replacement, should lamps
fail outside the design parameters of the lamp manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
Refer to Part 4. For catalog data refer to attachment (SECTION 16500 – Paragraph 3.07).
FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION (GENERAL)
All lighting fixtures shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. or code
approved equal, for installation in fireproof or non-fireproof construction, damp or wet locations,
as required by project conditions.
All materials, accessories, and other related fixture parts shall be new and free from defects
which in any manner may impair their character, appearance, strength, durability or function.
All sheet metal Work shall be free from tool marks and dents, and shall have accurate angles bent
as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal. All intersections and joints shall be
formed true of adequate strength and structural rigidity to prevent distortion after assembly.
All castings shall be exact replicates of the approved patterns and shall be free of sand pits
blemishes, scales and rust, and shall be smoothly finished. Tolerance shall be provided for
shrinkage of the metal castings to assure accurate fit.
Fabricate fixture enclosures with a minimum of #20 gauge (0.0359 inch) thick cold rolled sheet
steel. Enclosures may be constructed of other metals, provided they are equivalent in mechanical
strength and acceptable for the purpose. Fabricate lighting fixtures to be finished in vitreous
porcelain enamel from a minimum of #20 gauge enameling steel.
All screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching hardware for steel and aluminum fixtures
shall be cadmium or equivalent plated. All screws, bolts, nuts and other fastening and latching
hardware for stainless steel fixtures shall be stainless steel or bronze.
All lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the specified lamp(s) and shall be set so
that the lamp(s)
are positioned in optically correct relation to all lighting fixture
components. If adjustable socket positions are provided, socket shall be preset in factory for
lamp(s) specified. If different socket positions are specified for same fixture, sockets shall be
preset for each type, and cartons marked accordingly. Where modified / standard fixtures are
specified, fixtures shall be modified as required with lamp sockets positioned to provide desired
photometric performance.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 395
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
2.3
All lighting fixtures which have a beam angle adjustment shall have reliable angle locking
devices. All lighting fixtures with lamps that produce oval beam patterns shall contain lamp
orientation locking devices to insure that beam orientation is not disturbed during relamping or
cleaning. Each light fixture, which has a spread lens, shall contain lens orientation locking
devices to insure that lens orientation is not disturbed during lamp replacement or cleaning.
Housings shall be constructed so that electrical components are easily accessible and replaceable
without removing fixtures from their mountings or disassembly of adjacent construction. All
fixtures shall be factory pre-wired.
All fixtures and ballasts must operate within the temperature limits of their design and as
specified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for the applications and mounting conditions
specified. Recessed fixtures installed in insulated ceilings shall be provided with thermal
protection.
If required by the ceiling system(s), each recessed and semi-recessed fixture shall be furnished
with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which they are to be installed. The
frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed with electrically welded butt joints and shall be
of sufficient size and strength to sustain the weight of the fixture.
Light leaks between ceiling trim of recessed lighting fixtures and the ceiling are not acceptable.
For fixtures used in partially transparent ceilings, light leaks above the ceiling line are not
acceptable.
Fixtures for use outdoors shall be suitably gasketed to prevent the entrance of moisture. Provide
approved wire mesh insect screens for ventilation openings. Install and seal all lighting fixtures
and associated equipment in damp or wet locations as per fixture / equipment manufacturers
recommendations. All equipment used outdoors shall be constructed of materials suitable for the
environment in which it is to be installed: e.g. in a salt air environment, use materials such as
copper-free aluminum, stainless steel, etc: in a cold environment provide 0° rated fluorescent
ballasts, etc.
FINISHES
A.
Painted surfaces shall be synthetic enamel, with acrylic, alkyd, epoxy, polyester, or polyurethane
base, light stabilized, baked on at 350° Fahrenheit minimum, catalytically or photochemically
polymerized after application.
B.
White finishes shall be minimum 85% reflective unless otherwise specified.
C.
Ceiling opening frames shall either be manufactured of nonferrous metal, or be suitably rust
proofed after fabrication.
D.
Unless otherwise noted, the finish and color of all exposed metal parts shall be as selected by the
Architect from the fixture manufacturers' standard finish range.
E.
After fabrication and before final painting, give ferrous metal surfaces a five-stage phosphate
undercoat treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment, except for stainless steel
surfaces.
F.
Unpainted non-reflecting surfaces shall be satin finished and coated with a baked-on clear lacquer
to preserve the surface. Where aluminum surfaces are treated with an anodic process, the clear
lacquer coating may be omitted.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 396
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
G.
Finish interior unpainted aluminum trims with an anodized coating; color and surface finish as
selected by the Architect.
H.
Apply porcelain finishes smoothly. Porcelain finish shall be not less than 7.5 mil thick of
non-yellowing, white, vitreous porcelain enamel with a reflectance of not less than 85%.
2.4
INCANDESCENT, HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (H.I.D.) AND LOW VOLTAGE
INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A.
Aluminum reflectors shall be Alzak (finish as selected) unless otherwise noted and not less than
0.057 inch thick unless specified otherwise.
B.
Lighting fixtures utilizing tungsten halogen sources shall be designed and constructed so that
lamp seal temperatures do not exceed 350° C at an ambient of 25° C when tested in accordance
with U.L. Standard #57 and shall maintain an operating bulb wall temperature of approximately
600° C and not less than 250° C.
C.
Socket lead wires for fixtures utilizing tungsten halogen sources shall be rated for not less than
200° C, but shall be rated for 250° C if temperature warrants.
D.
Socket lead wires for H.I.D. fixtures shall be rated for no less than 200° C operation, but shall be
rated for higher temperature if duty warrants.
E.
All fixtures designed to be recessed in suspended ceilings shall be supplied with pre-wired
junction boxes.
F.
Remote step-down transformers and associated secondary wiring shall be sized installed within
NEMA enclosures and acoustically isolated mounts to assure quiet operation. Transformers
found by the Architect to be unduly noisy shall be replaced without charge prior to acceptance of
the job.
G.
All remote transformer installations shall utilize transformers located in a remote, accessible,
ventilated, sound attenuated location in accordance with transformer manufacturer’s
specifications and as indicated on electrical drawings.
H.
All secondary wiring shall use the quantity of homeruns as indicated in electrical drawings or
manufacturer’s submittal drawings, or as determined in the field by the electrical contractor due
to secondary run lengths required.
I.
Electrical contractor shall determine wire gauge sizes, and secondary lengths as necessary to limit
voltage drop to 5% for 24V systems and 3% for 12V systems.
J.
Electrical contractor to provide equal secondary length wiring for all homeruns, in order to
achieve uniform illumination of luminaires, regardless of distance from transformer.
K.
When multi-tap step-down transformer power supply assemblies are specified, the electrical
contractor shall order transformers with multi-tap secondaries to allow both over-voltage and
under-voltage wiring to luminaires.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 397
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
L.
Remote step-down transformers shall be composed of a power distribution enclosure with
toroidal transformer; integral fused distribution bus for each secondary lead and is suitable for
surface mounting or within 3 1/2” deep wall cavity. Provide transformer configuration specific to
load requirements either for Class I or Class II wiring.
M.
Temperature on the exterior of fixture housing and auxiliaries shall not exceed 205° C at any
point.
2.5
FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Housing end plates, socket bridges, reflectors, wiring channels and ballast covers shall be
die formed of not less than #20 gauge (0.0359 inch thick) cold rolled steel unless
specified otherwise.
B. Mount lamps on rapid-start circuits within one inch of grounded metal, minimum one
inch wide, as long as lamp.
2.6
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Use the most efficient combination of four, three, two and / or single lamp high
frequency electronic ballasts in fluorescent fixtures. Fluorescent lighting fixture ballasts
(except single reactor type) shall be equipped with an internal, automatic resetting
thermal protector adjacent to the coils, and a one time non-resetting thermal device to
protect the capacitor.
B. Unless otherwise noted, linear and compact fluorescent non-dim ballasts shall be
electronic, high power factor, high efficiency, low loss type with THD <10%, as
manufactured by Lutron, Advance, Osram-Sylvania or approved equal. Ballasts shall be
listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as Class "P". All ballasts shall be CBM
certified by ETL label, except for dimming ballasts. All ballasts shall be the Class A
sound rating, with the rating clearly indicated on the ballast case. Ballasts found by the
Architect to be unduly noisy shall be replaced without charge prior to acceptance of the
job.
C. All dimming ballasts shall be Lutron “Hi-lume” series, unless specifically noted
otherwise in fixture schedule.
D. Relative light output (percentage of light emitted with reference tube and ballast) shall
not be less than 100% unless specifically noted otherwise in fixture schedule.
E. Ballasts shall be designed and constructed to maintain a case temperature not greater than
90° C when operated at a room ambient of 50° C when tested in accordance with U.L.
and CBM standards.
F.
Ballasts shall be designed for single frequency operation, nominal 60 Hz, and shall be
operated at the voltage indicated on label, 120 volt and / or 277 volt as directed by the
Electrical Engineer. Final coordination of appropriate voltages shall be by Contractor.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 398
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
G. Secure ballasts firmly in lighting fixtures to prevent vibrations.
H. Emergency back-up ballasts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Provide ballast as referenced on the electrical drawings.
Ballasts shall provide lighting for 90 minutes minimum, or as specified by local code.
For all emergency ballasts, furnish required LED indicator lighting and/or test switch as
an integral part of the luminaire. Mount in a location out of normal view, such that the
optical performance of the fixture is unaltered.
Acceptable manufactures: Light Alarms, Bodine.
Separate wall or ceiling plates to house LED indicator lights and/or test switches are
unacceptable.
I.
Remote ballasts or emergency battery ballasts shall be furnished in NEMA enclosures
ready for mounting and connection. Enclosures with more than one ballast shall be
furnished pre-wired. Provide acoustically isolated mounts for remote ballasts and ballast
enclosures to assure quiet operation.
J.
Continuous runs of fluorescent lamps indicated as one dimmed control zone and is
comprised of more than one length or milliamperage rating shall be circuited and
dimmed separately. Exception; lamps dimmed with Lutron Electronics, Inc. "Hi-lume"
ballasts may mix various lengths (but not milliamperage ratings) in one zone when
installed as per manufacturers' instructions.
H.I.D. (HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE) BALLASTS
A. Ballasts for H.I.D. lamps shall be the manufacturer's best (quietest) sound rating, with the
rating clearly indicated on the ballast case. Ballasts found by the Architect to be unduly
noisy shall be replaced without charge prior to acceptance of the job.
B. Ballasts for H.I.D. lamps shall be constant wattage, high power factor, auto transformer
type, and shall be designed for single frequency operation, nominal 60 Hz, and shall be
operated at the voltage indicated on label; 120V, 208V, 240V, 277V or 480V as directed
by the Electrical Engineer. Final coordination of appropriate voltages shall be by
Contractor.
C. Core and coil ballasts shall be encased and potted for maximum noise reduction and shall
be secured firmly to acoustically isolated mounts.
D. Remote ballasts for H.I.D. lamps shall be furnished in NEMA enclosures ready for
mounting and connection. Enclosures with more than one ballast shall be furnished
pre-wired. Provide acoustically isolated mounts for remote ballasts and ballast enclosures
to assure quiet operation.
E. For ceramic arc-tube metal halide lamps provide compatible electronic ballasts,
acceptable manufactures Aromat/VS or Hatch. Utilize specific ballast only if referred to
within lighting fixture schedule.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 399
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
2.8
REFLECTORS, TRIMS AND LENSES
A. Reflectors, cones or baffles shall be absolutely free of spinning lines, ripples or any
marks or indentations caused by riveting or other assembly techniques. No hardware
shall be visible after installation.
B. Lenses, reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of all lighting fixtures shall not be
installed until completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting and general cleanup.
Trim specified to be painted to match surrounding conditions shall be removed from the
fixture housing prior to painting and be allowed adequate (minimum 24 hours) drying
time before insertion into housing. Trims shall be carefully handled to avoid scratching or
fingerprinting and shall be completely clean at the time of acceptance by the Owner.
C. All Alzak parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of ten
years, and, in the event of premature discoloration, shall be replaced by the manufacturer,
including both materials and the cost of labor.
D. Aluminum reflectors shall be finished specular, semi-specular, or diffuse as specified and
shall meet or exceed Alzak specifications. Minimum requirements of reflector finishes
for interior and exterior service shall be as follows:
DESCRIPTION OF
SERVICE CONDITIONS
MINIMUM
COATING
WEIGHT,
MILLIGRAMS PER
SQUARE INCH
SPECULAR
FINISH, MINIMUM
REFLECTANCE
DIFFUSE FINISH,
MINIMUM
REFLECTANCE
Normal interior
5.0
83%
75%
General interior industrial
and exterior service with
reflector protected with
glass covering.
7.5
82%
73%
Exterior industrial and
commercial service with
reflector not protected.
10.0
78%
75%
commercial service.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 400
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
Exterior marine service.
13.0
78%
65%
E. Optical lenses shall be free from spherical and chromatic aberrations and other
imperfections, which may hinder the functional performance of the lenses.
F.
Plastic for lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic as
manufactured by Rohm & Haas, DuPont, Acrylite or approved equal. The quality of the
raw material must exceed IES, SPI, and NEMA Specifications by at least 100% which, as
a minimum standard, shall not exceed a yellowness factor of 3 after 2,000 hours of
exposure in the fade-meter or as tested by an independent test laboratory. Acrylic plastic
lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded or extruded as specified.
G. For continuous lensed fixtures, the following chart listing approved lens lengths and
combinations shall be adhered to:
FIXTURE LENGTH
LENS QUANTITY
LENS LENGTH
Shorter than or equal to 8’-0”
1
Match fixture
8’-1” through 16’-0”
2
Equal segments
16’-1” through 24’-0”
3
Equal segments
24’-1” through 32’-0”
4
Equal segments
32’-1” through 40’-0”
5
Equal segments
40’-1” through 48’-0”
6
Equal segments
48’-1” through 56’-0”
7
Equal segments
56’-1” through 64’-0”
8
Equal segments
H. Glass used for lenses, refractors, and diffusers in incandescent lighting fixtures shall be
tempered for high impact and heat resistance; the glass shall be crystal clear in quality
with a transmittance of not less than 88%. For exterior fixtures use tempered Borosilicate
glass, tempered Corning #7740 or approved equal. For fixtures directly exposed to the
elements, aimed above the horizontal and with a radiant energy of 4.16 watts per square
inch or greater, use Vycor glass.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 401
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
I.
Lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements shall be removable, but positively held
so that hinging or other normal motion associated with cleaning or relamping shall not
cause them to drop out. All removable trims shall be provided with safety chains or
cords.
J.
All lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements shall illuminate uniformly; free of
shadows, hot-spots, or dead-spots.
2.9
LAMP HOLDERS
A. Incandescent and high-intensity discharge lamp holders shall be fabricated of porcelain
with a nickel-plated brass screw shell. Pre-lubricate lamp holders with silicone
compound. Provide medium base sockets for lamps to and including 250 watts (rated for
1500W, 600V service) unless specified otherwise. H.I.D. lampholders shall be heavyduty pulse-rated type.
B. Linear and compact fluorescent lamp holders shall be fabricated of heavy white
thermoset urea plastic with a definite locking-in feature and silver plated contacts.
Exposed outdoor lamp holders shall be compression neoprene gasketed type. Sockets
with open-circuit voltage over 300 volts shall be safety type designed to open supply
circuit on lamp removal.
2.10
LAMPS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all lamps specified shall be as manufactured by General
Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips or Venture. Substitutions by other manufacturers shall
be equal in all respects of the following: initial and maintained lumen output, lamp life,
color temperature, correlated color temperature (in° Kelvin) and compatibility with
specified equipment. Submit substitutions for approval in the form of manufacturer's
printed data and corresponding lamp samples for review.
B. All lamps of a given type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
C. If a specific manufacturer is noted in the lighting fixture schedule, only that manufacturer
shall be acceptable.
D. Prior to final inspection, incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps shall not be operated
other than for initial testing.
E. Ceramic arc-tube metal halide lamps shall be Philips “Master Color” series without
exception.
F.
Fluorescent T8 lamps and compact fluorescent lamps shall be classified as “nonhazardous waste” by the EPA and California.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 402
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
G. Fluorescent lamps used in congruent with dimming ballast. Provide “burn-in” period as
specified by dimming ballast manufacturer for all lamps being dimmed. Deliver project
to owner with all lamps “burned-in” and functional, with a maximum of 200 hours burn
time.
2.11
SOLID STATE LIGHTING
A. Light Emitting Diodes – Single Color White:
1.
Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) - provide CCT of 2700K, 3000K, 3500K or as
otherwise specified.
2.
Color Rendering Index (CRI) – provide a minimum CRI of 82 for 2700K, 84 for 3000K3500K, or as otherwise specified in schedule.
3.
Binning – binning shall meet in accordance with American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) Specification #C78.377-2008.
4.
Visual Deviance - all LED products shall be visually color consistent at all locations.
Manufacturer shall bench-sort fabricated product and ship only color consistent product.
Final acceptance of any color variance shall be by the architect in field. Any rejected
fixtures, modules, or segments shall be replaced by manufacturer at no expense to Owner.
5.
Lamp Life – minimum lamp life shall be 50,000 hours @ IES L70 rating.
6.
Warranty – See manufacturer fixture cut sheets for warranty information.
B. Acceptable LED manufacturers – LEDs shall be provided by Cree, Nichia, Philips or Lumileds
unless otherwise specified in schedule.
C. Drivers:
1.
All drivers shall be integral circuit board mounted, unless otherwise specified.
2.
All drivers shall have built-in dimming capability with conventional dimming equipment,
unless otherwise specified or required.
3.
Driver warranty shall meet or exceed that of the L.E.D. warranty.
D. Dimming:
1.
For ALL fixtures indicated as dimmed on the plans, provide integral dimming drivers
coordinated with control gear. Minimum dimming shall be 10% light output.
2.
For Lutron dimming equipment, Contractor shall supply Lutron dimming driver
interfaces integral to fixture as required, to the extent that the equipment is applicable to
the particulars of the load technology.
2.12
MISCELLANEOUS
A. All fixtures shall bear “wattage restriction labels” that correlate to the specified & approved lamp
wattage designated for the project in the lighting fixture schedule.
B. Wattage restriction labels shall apply to all fixtures, regardless of ability of fixture to
accommodate various wattages.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 403
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
C. All track and busway applications shall be provided with current-limiting devices at all feed
points per section, equal to quantities of heads shown on plans, unless otherwise indicated on
plans and/or fixture schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBMITTALS PROCESS
A. A comprehensive submittal shall be furnished for review to meet with the project schedule. The
submittal shall be a document authored by the Contractor; a facsimile or direct photocopy of the
Lighting Consultant’s documentation does not constitute a formal submittal.
B. Greater than two partial or piecemeal submittals will not be accepted. Should greater than two
partial or piecemeal submittals be furnished to the design team, the Contractor will be expected to
compensate the Lighting Consultant for additional time required to review and process the
submittal. The cost of additional submittal reviews due to a piecemeal submittals will be $1800
per review. These fees are due prior to the review completion. The Contractor shall bear the cost
of any processing delay due to untimely payment or dispute of these fees.
C. Partial submittals are only acceptable for subsequent reviews, to a maximum of one re- submittal.
3.2
EXPEDITING
A. The Contractor is expected to have extensive experience in projects of the same like and kind as
this project. The Contractor shall enlist a lighting fixture vendor with similar experience. The
collective experience and local knowledge of the Contractor and his sub-Contractors shall
demonstrate capacity to control the procurement of all lighting equipment in a timely manner.
Provision of a bid for the project is representation from the Contractor that he meets the criteria
above.
B. The Contractor’s proactive involvement in lighting fixture procurement is necessary. Submission
of complete and comprehensive shop drawings conforming to the specifications is required. For
custom fixtures, the Contractor shall allow ample time for at least two submittals, if required, to
meet project schedule.
C. Contractor shall identify long lead fixtures, and make necessary provisions for acquisition of
these fixtures to meet project schedule. The Contractor shall enlist pre-purchase procedures
where necessary, and/or identify fixtures that may jeopardize the project schedule BEFORE this
bid is accepted.
D. Timely provision and expediting of lighting fixture equipment shall be borne in its entirety by the
Contractor. The Owner will not be liable for overtime fabrication, overnight freight, additional
expediting fee services or other special cost-adding measures required to maintain project
schedule after a bid has been accepted.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 404
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
E. The Owner has engaged the Contractor, as part of the base bid, for services indicated above. In
the event the Contractor can not maintain project sequencing or schedule due to lighting fixture
lead times regardless of a fixtures approval status, the design team’s services may be enlisted to
assist in fixture expediting. Expediting-assistance services are available to the Contractor to
maintain his project schedule on a fee basis by the Lighting Consultant. A retainer equal to $800
per individual fixture type shall be furnished to the Lighting Consultant prior to commencing with
expediting-assistance services. Expediting-assistance services will be billed hourly against the
retainer at the rate of $100 per hour. If the retainer is exhausted, continuing expediting-assistance
services will not commence until another retainer amount of $800 per individual fixture type is
furnished to the Lighting Consultant. Any surplus fee will be refunded to the Contractor at the
end of the project.
F. The Lighting Consultant may assist in the expediting of equipment as noted above. The
Lighting Consultant has no contractual agreement with fixture manufacturers nor does he have
actual control of manufacturing or shipping. As such, the Lighting Consultant in no manner
makes any representations that their services will guarantee fixture deliveries.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A. Do not scale electrical drawings for exact location of the lighting fixtures. In general, the
Architectural reflected ceiling plans indicate the proper locations of lighting fixtures. In the case
of conflicts or inconsistencies in the plans or specifications, the Contractor shall promptly contact
the Architect to request proper interpretation. Where fixture quantities are given in the Contract
documents, they are for design reference only. The Contractor shall be responsible for all quantity
take-offs.
B. Install each fixture properly and safely. Provide necessary structural supports where required for
the safe attachment of all lighting fixtures. Furnish and erect hangers, rods, mounting brackets,
supports and other equipment required. Coordinate conduit entry locations with fixture
manufacturers prior to roughing.
C. Contractor shall be responsible for matching fixture rough in and trim configuration with ceiling
system(s). Determine surface types from the Architectural drawings and furnish lighting fixtures
with trim appropriate for the ceiling system(s) the fixture is to be mounted in. If required by the
ceiling system(s), furnish a suitable mounting frame or ring for each recessed and semi-recessed
fixture.
1.
For all fixtures scheduled to be installed in a trimless, flush manner to drywall ceilings, a
Level 5 finish shall be scheduled. Contractor shall use high-performance plaster within a
4' radius to the fixture (DuroBond or equal) to achieve a durable final finish not
susceptible to cracking, crazing, flaking, or other failure over the long term. Contractor
shall source sample fixture(s) for each scheduled luminaire in order to understand the
mechanics of mounting the fixture firmly to the structure, and proper sequencing of
construction. Trim-ring shall be set at true-level, and square. Plaster compound shall be
finished flush to fixture trim-ring, without any build-up beyond the screen edge of trimring, to ensure a true flush finish. Contractor shall fare plaster out from trim-ring
progressively for a minimum of a 2' radius and provide a seamless blend to surrounding
ceiling finish. Work shall be undertaken with a worklight oriented to graze across ceiling
to proactively identify any undue ripples, undulations, or other surface imperfections.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 405
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
Prior to paint coat, fixture trim-ring surfaces that receive final fixture reflector shall be
cleaned of any plaster build-up. Paint finishing shall be applied so as not to create any
texture or surface appearance that differs from surrounding ceiling area (i.e. brush "cutin" marks, etc). Before installation of final reflector, contractor shall again remove any
foreign material (plaster, paint, etc.) to ensure precise and clean mating surfaces of
reflector to trim-ring, precisely flush to adjacent ceiling.
D. Install pendant lighting fixtures plumb and true, at the height from the floor specified on the
drawings. In cases where conditions make this impractical, refer to the Architect for a decision.
Use ball aligners and canopies on pendant fixtures unless noted otherwise. Rigidly align
continuous rows of lighting fixtures for true in-line appearance. Support all lighting fixtures
independently of duct Work or piping. Whenever a fixture or its hanger canopy is applied to a
surface mounted outlet box, provide a finishing ring to conceal the outlet box.
E. Lighting fixture locations in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms are approximate.
Coordinate mounting height and location of lighting fixtures with other trades to clear
mechanical, electrical and plumbing equipment and to adequately illuminate meters, gauges and
equipment that requires periodic servicing or inspection.
F. In all uplight coves; fluorescent, cold cathode, incandescent, low voltage, LED, etc., fixtures shall
be installed so as to provide a continuous and visually unbroken band of light in far-field and
near-field viewpoints. Socket shadows, dark spots or visible light gaps are not acceptable.
G. Each lighting fixture shall be packaged with clear, complete installation instructions. Install
lighting fixtures in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
H. Splices in internal wiring shall be made with approved insulated "wire nut" type mechanical
connectors, suitable for the temperature and voltage conditions to which they are subjected. All
wiring shall be suitable for temperature, current, and voltage conditions to which it is subjected,
including internal wiring between individual lamp sockets, lamp auxiliaries, etc.
3.4
I.
Installation of fixtures requires extensive surface-mounted conduit that requires cleanly organized
layouts including consistent bend radii from bending jigs, unistrut supports, and coordination
with other trades. Refer to architectural and electrical drawings for conduit organization details.
J.
Effectively protect all lighting equipment against damage from the time of fabrication to final
acceptance of the Work. Install reflector cones, baffles, aperture plates, light controlling element
for air handling fixtures, and decorative elements after completion of ceiling tiles, painting and
general cleanup. Replace blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures as directed.
AIMING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. All adjustable lighting units shall be aimed, focused, locked, etc., by the Contractor under the
supervision of the Lighting Consultant. The Lighting Consultant shall indicate the number of
crews required. All aiming and adjusting shall be carried out after the entire installation is
complete. All ladders, scaffolds, etc. required shall be furnished by the Contractor at the direction
of the Lighting Consultant. As aiming and adjusting is completed, locking set screws and bolts
and nuts shall be tightened securely.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 406
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
B. Where possible, lighting fixtures shall be focused during normal business hours. However, where
daylight interferes with aiming and focusing, this Work shall be performed at night at no
additional cost to Owner.
3.5
CLEANUP
A. Furnish all available maintenance data for each lighting fixture to the Owner, including tools
required for routine maintenance, types of cleaners to be used, replacement parts lists and for
custom or modified custom fixtures, as-built shop drawings.
B. At the time of final acceptance by the Owner, all lighting fixtures shall have been thoroughly
cleaned with materials and methods recommended by the manufacturers, all broken parts shall
have been replaced, and all lamps shall be operative.
3.6
EXTRA STOCK / SPARE PARTS
A. See Division 1.
3.7
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
PART 4 – SCHEDULE OF FIXTURES
4.1
“F” SERIES –EXTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL FIXTURES
TYPE "FA"
RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHT
MOUNTING
RECESSED IN SCHEDULED PAVILION STRUCTURE
HOUSING
NOMINAL 1.75” DIAMETER APERTURE X 6” TALL X 11” LONG
ALUMINUM HOUSING AND REFLECTOR CONE
REFLECTOR
47° WIDE FLOOD OPTICS WITH 50° CUTOFF
SHIELDING
N/A
PERFORMANCE
331 NOMINAL LUMEN OUTPUT; 30 LUMEN/WATT EFFICACY; 3000K
COLOR TEMPERATURE
LAMP
3000K DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
11 WATTS
BALLAST
INTEGRAL DRIVER
MANUFACTURER
LIGHTOLIER #C2L-04-DL-30K-47-R-UZ10V-C2L-DL-CUSTOM RAL-P
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 407
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
LOCATION
PAVILION ‘A’
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES WITH
PAVILION STRUCTURE.
ARCHITECT TO VERIFY CUSTOM RAL# FINISH
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 408
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FB"
SURFACE-MOUNTED ADJUSTABLE LINEAR LED
MOUNTING
SURFACE-MOUNTED TO SCHEDULED PAVILION STRUCTURE WITH
ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING BRACKET
HOUSING
NOMINAL 1.56” W X 1.97” T X 48” LONG; ANODIZED ALUMINUM
HOUSING
REFLECTOR
N/A
SHIELDING
UV RESISTANT ACRYLIC LENS
PERFORMANCE
780 LUMENS PER FOOT; 60 LUMENS/WATT EFFICIENCY; 3000K COLOR
TEMPERATURE
LAMP
3000K DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
56 WATTS
BALLAST
LINE-VOLTAGE
MANUFACTURER
I2 SYSTEMS #V2355-A-4-3-CBB-OUTDOOR-CLEAR ANODIZE-VLA-13
LOCATION
PAVILION ‘A’
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES WITH
PAVILION STRUCTURE
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 409
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FC"
NOT USED
TYPE "FD"
RECESSED LED IN EXTERIOR WALL MOUNTED HANDRAIL
MOUNTING
LED SOURCE RECESSED IN HANDRAIL
HOUSING
NOMINAL 1.67” DIAMETER RAIL
REFLECTOR
N/A
SHIELDING
N/A
PERFORMANCE
HIGH OUTPUT LED OPTION
LAMP
WARM WHITE LED DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
ALLOW 10 WATTS/LF
BALLAST
REMOTE POWER SUPPLY
MANUFACTURER
EFFICIENT-TECH INTERNATIONAL MYRIS RAIL #LEDRAIL-WARM
WHITE-HIGH OUTPUT-ANNODIZED
LOCATION
STAIRS
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
ALL RAIL ASPECTS AND BLOCKING TO BE CONFIRMED BY
ARCHITECT.
GC TO CONFIRM REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES FOR
SCHEDULED WALL SURFACE.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 410
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FD-1"
RECESSED LED IN EXTERIOR FREE-STANDING HANDRAIL
MOUNTING
LED SOURCE RECESSED IN HANDRAIL
HOUSING
NOMINAL 1.67” DIAMETER RAIL
REFLECTOR
N/A
SHIELDING
N/A
PERFORMANCE
HIGH OUTPUT LED OPTION
LAMP
WARM WHITE LED DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
ALLOW 10 WATTS/LF
BALLAST
REMOTE POWER SUPPLY
MANUFACTURER
EFFICIENT-TECH INTERNATIONAL ANDA RAIL #LEDRAIL-WARM
WHITE-HIGH OUTPUT-EMBED-ANNODIZED
LOCATION
STAIRS
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
ALL RAIL ASPECTS AND BLOCKING TO BE CONFIRMED BY
ARCHITECT.
GC TO CONFIRM REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES FOR
SCHEDULED WALL SURFACE.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 411
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FE"
3-HEAD LED FLOOD LIGHT MOUNTED ON 14’ POLE
MOUNTING
POLE-MOUNTED FIXTURE
HOUSING
FIXTURE:
NOMINAL 3” DIA X 21-1/4” TALL MACHINED ALUMINUM POLE MOUNT
HOUSING WITH (3) 3” DIA X 8-3/16” LONG ADJUSTABLE LED FIXTURE
HEADS OF FULLY MACHINED ALUMINUM
POLE:
NOMINAL 14’ TALL X 5” WIDE BASE TAPERING TO 2.38” DIA TOP; 9-1/2”
BASE ANCHOR PLATE; INTEGRAL DUPLEX WITH TAMPERPROOF
COVER.
POLE BASE COVER:
NOMINAL 5” DIAMETER X 5” TALL ALUMINUM HOUSING WITH
STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE
REFLECTOR
SHIELDING
SHOCK RESISTANT, TEMPERED SPREAD LENS
PERFORMANCE
LAMP
3000K DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
75 WATTS
BALLAST
(3) POWER DRIVERS INTEGRAL TO POLE MOUNTING HOUSING
MANUFACTURER
B-K LIGHTING #DE-LED-X25-WFL-RAL #7026 GRANITE GREY -10-BMOD. 3-HEAD FIXTURE WITH 3” DIAMETER POLE MOUNT HSG
VALMONT #R-130830506T4-P2-SC-RAL7026-3DR12520G-EA-DT12AC-SCRAL7026-5
LOCATION
TYPICAL AT PEDESTRIAN WALKING PATHS
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
G.C./E.C. TO VERIFY FINAL HEIGHT, RADIUS ORIENTATION, AND
QUANTITY FOR HANDHOLES AND RECEPTACLES.
G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES WITH
SCHEDULED PAVING SURFACE.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 412
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FE-1"
4-HEAD LED FLOOD LIGHT MOUNTED ON 25’ POLE
MOUNTING
POLE-MOUNTED FIXTURE
HOUSING
FIXTURES:
NOMINAL 4.5” DIA X 21-1/4” TALL MACHINED ALUMINUM POLE
MOUNT HOUSING WITH (3) 3” DIA X 8-3/16” LONG ADJUSTABLE LED
FIXTURE HEADS OF FULLY MACHINED ALUMINUM
POLE:
NOMINAL 25’ TALL X 9” WIDE BASE TAPERING TO 4.5” DIA TOP; 13-1/4”
BASE ANCHOR PLATE; INTEGRAL DUPLEX WITH TAMPERPROOF
COVER
POLE BASE COVER:
NOMINAL 9” DIAMETER X 5” TALL ALUMINUM HOUSING WITH
STAINLESS STEEL HARDWARE
REFLECTOR
SHIELDING
SHOCK RESISTANT, TEMPERED SPREAD LENS
PERFORMANCE
LAMP
3000K DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
100 WATTS
BALLAST
(3) POWER DRIVERS INTEGRAL TO POLE MOUNTING HOUSING
MANUFACTURER
B-K LIGHTING #DE-LED-X25-WFL-CUSTOM RAL-10-B-MOD. 4-HEAD
FIXTURE WITH 4.5” DIAMETER POLE MOUNT HSG
VALMONT #R-240845905T4-P2-SC-RAL7026-3DR12520G-EA-DT12AC-SCRAL7026-9
LOCATION
TYPICAL AT PEDESTRIAN WALKING PATHS
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER.
G.C./E.C. TO VERIFY FINAL HEIGHT, RADIUS ORIENTATION, AND
QUANTITY FOR HANDHOLES AND RECEPTACLES.
G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING ACCESSORIES WITH
SCHEDULED PAVING SURFACE.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 413
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
TYPE "FF"
POLE-MOUNTED INDIRECT LED UPLIGHT
MOUNTING
POLE MOUNTED TO CANOPY ON SCHEDULE FLAG POLE
HOUSING
NOMINAL 3” APERTURE DIAMETER X 7” TALL X 4” NOMINAL DEPTH;
FULL MACHINED ALUMINUM BILLET
REFLECTOR
FLUSH LENS CAP
SHIELDING
SHOCK RESISTANT, TEMPERED GLASS LENS
PERFORMANCE
LAMP
3000K LED DIODES INTEGRAL TO FIXTURE
INPUT WATTS
25 WATTS
BALLAST
REMOTE POWER SUPPLY
MANUFACTURER
B-K LIGHTING #CK-LED-X25-SP-RAL#7026-9-C-RM
LOCATION
FLAGPOLES
REMARKS
VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS TO BE VERIFIED BY ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL REQUIRED MOUNTING
ACCESSORIES WITH SCHEDULED FLAGPOLES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
265100 - 414
HDLC
ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING FIXTURES
SECTION 311100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
City of Baltimore Department of Public Works Specifications for Material, Highways, Bridges,
Utilities and Incidental Structures, Latest Edition and Amendments; hereinafter referred to as
BCDPW Standard Specifications.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Removing trees and other vegetation.
2.
Clearing and grubbing.
3.
Removing above- and below-grade site improvements including asphalt pavement,
sidewalks, curb and miscellaneous items.
4.
Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities and abandoning site
utilities in place.
5.
Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing inplace surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable,
pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably
free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of
subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain as the Owner’s
property. Remove, clean and pack or crate items to protect against damage. Identify contents of
containers and deliver to Owner’s designated storage area.
1.4
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared
materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and
site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as
damage caused by site clearing.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
311100 - 415
RK&K
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
1.
2.
B.
1.6
Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape.
Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each
tree or other plants designated to remain.
Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other
subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied
or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1.
See drawings for further maintenance of traffic notes and details.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
3.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways as required by
authorities having jurisdiction and in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices (MUTCD).
B.
Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's
premises where indicated.
C.
Notify Miss Utility, 48 hours prior to performing any site clearing operations.
D.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures are in place and authorities having jurisdiction have been notified as indicated on
Drawings.
E.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
2.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
3.
Foot traffic.
4.
Erection of sheds or structures.
5.
Impoundment of water.
6.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
7.
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
F.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
G.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in BCDPW
Standard Specification Division 31 Section "Earthwork.”
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
311100 - 416
RK&K
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B.
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or be removed or to be
relocated.
C.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A.
Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction
activity do not enter buildings or cross protection zones.
C.
Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction
until permanent vegetation has been established.
D.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during
removal.
3.3
UTILITIES
A.
Arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site
clearing.
1.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site
clearing.
B.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in
place.
1.
Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
C.
Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.
D.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.
E.
Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
311100 - 417
RK&K
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
F.
3.4
Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 26 and Division 33 Sections and per
approved City of Baltimore Public Works Developer Agreement Documents.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate
new construction.
B.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1.
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along
line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Sawcut faces vertically.
3.5
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste
materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
B.
Do not bury organic matter on site.
END OF SECTION 311100
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
311100 - 418
RK&K
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.2
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade walks, pavements, turf and grasses and plants.
Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.
Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements.
Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving.
Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.
Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for unit-price authorized additional excavation
provisions.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for recording pre-excavation and earthwork
progress.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities,
and support facilities.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting and trimming
vegetation remaining on-site that are affected by site operations.
Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27 and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.
Section 31 11 00 "Clearing and Grubbing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation
control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above- and
below-grade improvements and utilities.
Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during
construction.
Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet
piling of excavations.
Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading, including preparing and placing
topsoil and planting soil for lawns.
UNIT PRICES
A.
Work of this section is affected by unit prices for earth moving specified in Division 01 Section
“Unit Prices.”
B.
Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not
to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved
materials.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 419
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or
exterior waterproofing treatments.
6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42
inches wide.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
B.
Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
C.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil (Select Borrow) imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.
1.
2.
3.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by
the Geotechnical Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material
will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.
Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations without direction by
the Geotechnical Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed
by the Geotechnical Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.
F.
Fill: Soil materials approved by the Geotechnical Engineer to be used to raise existing grades.
G.
Recycled Material: Recycled Material shall contain a minimum of 90% post-consumer
material.
H.
Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and
pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the
following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping,
or blasting, when permitted:
1.
Excavation of Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator;
equipped with a 42-inch-wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less
than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf and
stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf; measured according to SAE J-1179.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 420
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
2.
Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp
flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a generalpurpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.
I.
Structures: Buildings, footings, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical and electrical
appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground
surface.
J.
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement
concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
K.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill
or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
L.
Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt and
clay particles; friable and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying
subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in
diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other non-soil materials.
M.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detectable warning tape.
Geotextile fabric.
Recycled Materials.
Requirements for local material source.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
2.
D.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each borrow soil material proposed for fill
and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site and borrow
soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
Pre-excavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused
by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 421
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented
according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
B.
Contractor shall follow all OSHA requirements and all local, State and Federal regulations for
soil excavation.
C.
Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management, Schedules and Coordination."
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Notify Owner and Architect not less than 72 hours in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
Verify existing utility services for area where Project is located before excavation.
B.
Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be
removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.
C.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.
1.
2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner.
D.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before
beginning earth moving operations.
E.
Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control
measures, specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," are in place.
F.
Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in
Division 01 56 39 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.
G.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.
Parking vehicles or equipment.
Foot traffic.
Erection of sheds or structures.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 422
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
5.
6.
7.
Impoundment of water.
Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.
Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise
indicated.
H.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
I.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Section 916 of SHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials.
B.
General: Provide select borrow soil materials for replacement of all excavated material
removed from the pipe trench. All excavated material removed from the trench excavations
shall be hauled and disposed off-site. Provide test results or certification that borrow material
meets the requirements for the specified material.
C.
Recycled Content of Backfill: Provide recycled concrete (RC-6) for temporary roads, subbase,
pipe bedding, and fill material, except under the building slab. Recycled aggregates shall
contain a minimum of 90% post-consumer aggregate content.
D.
Regional Materials: Provide aggregate and sand products manufactured and of primary raw
materials extracted or recovered within 300 mile radius of Project Site.
E.
Satisfactory Soils: Select Borrow as Per Section 916.01.01 of the MSHA Standard
Specifications for Construction and Materials.
F.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve per Section 901 of the MSHA
Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials .
G.
Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve per Section 901 of the MSHA
Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials.
H.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
I.
Bedding Course and Initial Backfill: Washed #8 Pea Gravel Per ASTM - D-448, 1/8” to 3/8”
size.
J.
Topsoil: Loam, without stones or debris larger than 1/2 inch in diameter, without roots,
vegetation, and without harmful materials or other debris which may be harmful to plant life.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 423
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
The topsoil shall contain a minimum of 5% of organic matter by weight when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 194. Other components shall be within the following
percentages:
Silt
25 – 50%
Clay
10 – 30 %
Sand
20 – 35 %
Ph
6 – 7.5
Soluble Salts
1.
600 ppm maximum
Off-Site Topsoil: Topsoil furnished by the Contractor shall meet the requirements
specified above, as tested by the Contractor and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.
K.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
L.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
M.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
N.
Structural Fill: All fills placed directly below or within the zone of influence of any bearing
foundation or structural slab. Structural fill material shall consist of soils meeting Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS) of SC or greater (i.e. SC through GW) with a Liquid Limit no
greater than 30 and a maximum Plasticity Index of 10. All soil materials that fall within the
USCS type ML, CL, CL-ML, OL, MH, CH, OH, PT, as well as material containing organic
matter, ashes, cinders, refuse, frozen or other unsuitable materials are prohibited for use as
Structural Fill.
2.2
GEOTEXTILES
A.
2.3
Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Woven; manufactured for subsurface drainage applications,
made from fibers consisting of long chain synthetic polymers, composed of a minimum 95
percent by weight of polyolefins or polyesters; with 15 percent minimum elongation;
complying with Maryland State Highway Administration type ST per SHA Standard
Specifications for Construction and Materials.
CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL
A.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, low-density, flowable concrete material
produced from the following:
1.
2.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Type II or Type III.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 424
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/8-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
Water: ASTM C 94.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with a metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches. Color shall be as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer and drainage systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B.
Prepare subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section
"Site Clearing."
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
D.
Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.2
DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared
subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
1.
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 425
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
2.
3.3
Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from
excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.
EXPLOSIVES
A.
3.4
Explosives: Do not use explosives on this project.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
All excavations and trenching shall be accomplished in strict accordance with applicable OSHA
regulations.
B.
Do not excavate within twelve (12) inches of any building wall, column, pier, etc. Where
excavation is required next to an existing building, excavate up to twenty-four (24) inches and
allow the balance of soil to “fall away”. Take care to not damage the existing waterproofing
systems.
C.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface
and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock,
soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be
authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
1.
2.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.5
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A.
Excavate to the indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.
If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing
concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.
1.
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.
Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim
bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 426
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
2.
B.
Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1.
2.
3.6
Excavation for Underground Basins and Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to
elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not
disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use
narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop
exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree
and Plant Protection."
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A.
3.7
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and
subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1.
B.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of
pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Clearance: As indicated.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints and barrels of pipes,
unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
For pipes less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and
support pipe on an undisturbed subgrade.
For pipes 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support
bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tampered sand backfill.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:
1.
2.
Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrowtine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed
roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.
Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with
installation of utilities.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 427
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
3.
3.8
Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 015 6 39 "Temporary Tree
and Plant Protection."
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and
replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded
10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and
areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by the Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as
directed.
D.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to
Contract provisions for Unit Price Items.
E.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.
3.9
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations by extending bottom elevation of concrete
foundation to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day
compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by the Engineer.
1.
3.10
A.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
3.11
A.
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by the
Engineer.
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 428
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.12
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,
fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill trenches excavated under structure and within 18 inches of bottom of structure with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or
conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely
encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing
roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
E.
After installing compacted pipe bedding material, place and compact initial backfill of
satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches
over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial bedding material under pipe haunches and compact evenly up
on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or
displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
F.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to
a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
G.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
H.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
I.
Install detectable warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6
inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. Detectable warning tape is not required for
storm drains.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 429
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
3.13
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
3.14
A.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
3.15
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under building slabs, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Under structures and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing
subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.Under structures, building
slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and
each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 430
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
5.
6.
3.16
A.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.17
Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85
percent.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Walks: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
C.Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested
with a 10-foot straightedge.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.
Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.18
A.
Install separation geotextile fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer’s
written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.
Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
Place subbase and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
Place subbase and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of
equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches
thick.
Compact subbase and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,
cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Testing Agency: The Contractor shall engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 431
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be
performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other
footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Geotechnical Engineer.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,
ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at
the following locations and frequencies:
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.19
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in
no case fewer than three tests.
Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every
100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for
every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.20
A.
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and
recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and
debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 432
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
END OF SECTION 312000
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 433
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312000 - 434
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
EARTH MOVING
SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes construction dewatering.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and
controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosioncontrol measures and temporary controls and protections.
Review geotechnical report.
Review proposed site clearing and excavations.
Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.
Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.
Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers,
headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control
of sediment, and disposal of water.
Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance
of dewatering system.
Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and well-point
placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and control procedures to be
adopted if dewatering problems arise.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For dewatering system indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer registered in Maryland responsible for their preparation.
C.
Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312319 - 435
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
DEWATERING
E.
Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of
adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins.
F.
Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped wells and well points and other
abandoned-in-place dewatering equipment.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering
systems and dewatering work.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of the Owner.
1.5
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of a geotechnical
engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses
conducted by a geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or
conclusions drawn from this data.
1.
Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for
dewatering according to the performance requirements.
B.
Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent
existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points
to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to
lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to
proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer.
Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control,
stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and
prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures.
Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site
improvements adjacent to excavation.
Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris-disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312319 - 436
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
DEWATERING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering
operations.
1.
2.
B.
Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from
ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate
routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
C.
Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
D.
Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified on the
MDE approved plans.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water
disposal, and surface-water controls.
1.
2.
Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.
Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.
B.
Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating
below ground-water level.
C.
Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain
dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.
3.3
OPERATION
A.
Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill
materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312319 - 437
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
DEWATERING
B.
Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of
structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water-bearing strata above
and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1.
2.
3.
Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade
softening, and slope instability.
Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of
foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below bottom of excavation.
C.
Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,
property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and
sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.
D.
Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well
holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Observation Wells: Provide observation wells or piezometers, take measurements, and
maintain at least the minimum number indicated; additional observation wells may be required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in
observation wells.
Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or
destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend
construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water
from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning
properly.
Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.
B.
Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks regularly during dewatering and maintain an
accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in
adjacent construction.
C.
Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the
dewatering operation.
D.
Prepare reports of observations.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.
B.
Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.
END OF SECTION 312319
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
312319 - 438
Carroll Engineering, Inc.
DEWATERING
SECTION 321113 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 32 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
This work consists of constructing base courses as shown on the Contract Documents and in
accordance with Section 32 11 23.10 of the BCDPW Specifications, delete all reference to
“Measurement and Payment”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GRADED AGGREGATE FOR BASE COURSE
A.
Graded Aggregate for Base Course as per Section 32 11 23.10 of the BCDPW Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
As per Section 32 11 23.10 of the BCDPW Specifications.
END OF SECTION 321113
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321113 - 439
RK&K
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321113 - 440
RK&K
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 32 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
All materials and construction methods shall be in accordance with the City of Baltimore
“Standard Specifications for Material, Highways, Bridges, Utilities and Incidental Structures,”
(latest edition), hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”, City of Baltimore
Standard Details (latest edition), and as noted on the Drawings.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Related Sections:
1.
Refer to Standard Specification section 32 12 16.13 and supplement with the following:
a.
Work in this section shall include installation of Hot Mix Asphalt pavement as
required for the construction/repair of the roadway during utility trenching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Supplement with the following:
B.
Performance Graded Asphalt Binders:
Performance Graded Binders For Specific Mixes
C.
Mix
Binder
Hot Mix Asphalt Superpave 9.5mm for
Surface
PG 64-22
Hot Mix Asphalt Super pave 19mm for Base
PG 64-22
Hot Mix Design Compaction Levels:
Mix Design Compaction Levels
Mix
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
Compaction Level
321216 - 441
RK&K
ASPHALT PAVING
Hot Mix Asphalt Superpave 9.5mm for
Surface
Level 1 (less than 0.3 million ESALs)
Hot Mix Asphalt Super pave 19mm for Base
Level 1 (Less than 0.3 million ESALs)
END OF SECTION 321216
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321216 - 442
RK&K
ASPHALT PAVING
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
All materials and construction methods shall be in accordance with the City of Baltimore
“Standard Specifications for Material, Highways, Bridges, Utilities and Incidental Structures,”
(latest edition), hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications”, City of Baltimore
Standard Details (latest edition), and as noted on the Drawings.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Concrete curb and gutter.
Concrete base for pavers.
Section 03 30 00 “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for general building applications of concrete.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. Design
and engineering of formwork are Contractor’s responsibility.
2.
Reinforced Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of reinforcing.
C.
Other Action Submittals:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 443
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
1.
1.5
Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures
when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
1.
Cementitious materials and aggregates.
2.
Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3.
Fiber reinforcement.
4.
Admixtures.
5.
Curing compounds.
6.
Applied finish materials.
7.
Bonding agent or adhesive.
8.
Joint fillers.
B.
Field Quality Control / Material Test Reports: As described in this Section. From a qualified
testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with
requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with
ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.
1.
Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete
Association’s "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities"
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing
indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and
ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
D.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation
tests and to design concrete mixtures.
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, “Specification for Structural Concrete”, unless
modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 444
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMS
A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1.
Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less.
B.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing
materials.
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire
into flat sheets.
B.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.
C.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:
1.
Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will
not support chair legs.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer’s plant and each aggregate from one source.
B.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout the Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.
C.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, from a single source, with coarse
aggregate as follows:
1.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
2.
Do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing substances that cause spalling.
D.
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 445
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
2.4
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.
WATERSTOPS
A.
Waterstops shall be flexible PVC conforming to CD CRD-C-572, 9 inches wide, for embedding
in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints.
B.
Profile of waterstop shall be as follows:
1.
Expansion Joints: 9 inches wide with center bulb to fill expansion joint.
2.
Construction Joints: 9 inches wide, ribbed without center bulb.
C.
Waterstops shall contain a continuous fastening system for mechanically attaching each edge of
the waterstops to reinforcing steel of formwork as necessary to prevent displacement during
concrete placement and consolidation operations.
D.
Waterstop material shall be impervious to water and resistant to alkalis and weak acids. The
material must not be subject to degradation by the concrete mix design.
E.
Waterstop material must become thoroughly plasticated when heated during splicing operations
so that it will readily flow across but spliced ends and achieve a strong and leakproof seam.
F.
Factory fabricated and test junction sections are required at all joint intersections thus
eliminating splices other than properly mitered butt splices.
G.
Waterstop must exhibit zero water leakage when tested in accordance with the ACI test method.
Test reports must be conducted by a suitable, private testing laboratory.
2.6
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene
sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick:
1.
2.
Nonwoven, polyester-reinforced, polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils thick.
Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene
sheet; 7.8 mils thick.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 446
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
B.
Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve
and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM C
33 for fine aggregates.
C.
Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,
Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
2.7
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
D.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
E.
Clear, Solvent-Borne Liquid-Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B,.
F.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,.
2.8
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.
B.
Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive
aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less
than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by
freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.
C.
Bonding Agent:
butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881/C 881M, two-component epoxy resin capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces; of class suitable for application temperature, of
grade complying with requirements, and of the following types:
1.
Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
321313 - 447
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
2.9
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301, for each type and
strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or
field experience.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete
design mixtures for the trial batch method.
B.
Proportion mixtures to provide a normal-weight concrete with the following properties unless
otherwise indicated in the Drawings:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi.
2.
Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8
inches after admixture is added to concrete with 2-to 4-inch slump.
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches.
C.
Cementitious Materials: As per City of Baltimore Standard Specifications Section 03 30 00
2.1G. Limit percentage by weight of cementitious materials other than portland cement as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent
portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.
D.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of
placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 percent:
1.
Air Content: 5-1/2 percent for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate.
2.
Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate.
3.
Air Content: 6 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate.
E.
Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate,
but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd..
2.10
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing
and delivery time to 60 minutes.
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Comply with requirements and measure, batch, and mix concrete
materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drumtype batch machine mixer.
1.
For mixers of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more
than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 448
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
2.
3.
For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each
additional 1 cu. yd.
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixing time, quantity, and amount of
water added.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
The subgrade shall be prepared as per Section 31 23 13 of the City of Baltimore Standard
Specification. Proceed with pavement only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected
and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.
B.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
3.2
FORMWORK
A.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
B.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
C.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer’s written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.3
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,
grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
3.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 449
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
D.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at
least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent
continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and
free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required
before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats.
3.5
WATERSTOP
A.
3.6
Install material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and using
appropriate and approved equipment.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
3.7
Vapor Retarder: Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and
manufacturer’s written instructions.
JOINTS
A.
General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1.
When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
2.
At locations indicated on plans, saw cut exiting
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
1.
Provide preformed galvanized steel or plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms
with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
2.
Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.
4.
Use a bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
5.
Use epoxy bonding adhesive at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
6.
At keyed joints, provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys
unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys as indicated on Drawings.
C.
Isolation Expansion Joints: Form isolation expansion joints of preformed joint-filler strips
abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects.
1.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 450
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
2.
3.
4.
5.
Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not
indicated.
Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
D.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete
thickness, as follows:
1.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing
random contraction cracks.
3.
Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.
E.
Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an
edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.
Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.8
CONCRETE CURBS
A.
3.9
As per Baltimore City Standard Specification Section 32 16 13.13 and as noted on the
Drawings.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and
items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.
B.
Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
D.
Comply with ACI 304R requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 451
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
E.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
F.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push
or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G.
Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete according to
recommendations in ACI 309R.
1.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side
forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate
with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels and joint devices.
H.
Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the
required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately
in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed.
1.
Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than
15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by
Engineer.
I.
Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
J.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
K.
Slip-Form Pavers: When automatic machine placement is used for pavement, submit revised
mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce pavement to
required thickness, lines, grades, finish and jointing as required for formed pavement.
1.
Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of
slip-form paving machine during operations.
L.
When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on
concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.
M.
Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that
could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the
following:
1.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
N.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305R and as follows when hot-weather conditions
exist:
1.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 452
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
2.
3.
3.10
A.
3.11
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
CONCRETE FINISHING
General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations
is prohibited.
1.
Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Expose course aggregate in paving surface as follows:
a.
Immediately after float finishing, spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving
according to manufacturers written instructions.
b.
Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove
when ready to continue finishing operations.
c.
Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate lightly
brushing surface with a stiff, nylon bristle broom. Do not expose more than onethird of the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the
diameter of the smaller aggregate.
d.
Fine spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and
brushing until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
FLOAT FINISHING
A.
General: Wetting of concrete surfaces during screeding, initial floating, or finishing operations
is prohibited.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform
granular texture.
1.
Burlap Finish: For sidewalk, drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across float-finished
concrete, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, gritty texture.
2.
Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: For pedestrian ramps provide a coarse finish
by striating float-finished concrete surface 1/16 deep with a stiff-bristled broom,
perpendicular to line of traffic.
3.12
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R
for hot-weather protection during curing.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 453
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
C.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound or a combination of these as follows:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
Water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches
and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears
occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3.
3.13
A.
3.14
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected
to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating, and repair damage during curing period.
PAVING TOLERANCES
Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1.
Elevation: 1/4 inch.
2.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
3.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
4.
Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch.
5.
Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1/4 inch.
6.
Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 2 inch.
7.
Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch
per 12 inches of dowel.
8.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
9.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: The Owner shall engage a qualified independent testing and inspection agency
to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according
to requirements specified in this Article.
B.
Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 454
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests
will be required when concrete consistency changes.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressivestrength specimens.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and
stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day’s pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu.
yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen
shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a
given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Engineer may
waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be
provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
Strength of concrete will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressivestrength test results equal or exceeds specified compressive strength and no individual
compressive-strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than
500 psi.
C.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28-day tests.
D.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
E.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have
not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine
adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed.
F.
Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 455
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
G.
3.15
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not
comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to
joint unless otherwise approved by Owner.
B.
Drill test cores, where directed by Engineer, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks
or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement
concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after
placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
END OF SECTION 321313
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321313 - 456
RK&K
CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 321316 - DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes colored, plain (uncolored), and exposed aggregate concrete paving.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications and site wall
applications of concrete.
Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for cast-in-place concrete curbs and gutters and
concrete slabs for pavers.
Section 321373 "Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction
joints within decorative concrete paving and in joints between decorative concrete paving
and other paving or adjacent construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans.
B.
W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
Review methods and procedures related to decorative concrete paving, including but not
limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Concrete mixture design.
Quality control of concrete materials and decorative concrete paving construction
practices.
Discussion of methods and intent for finishing exposed aggregate concrete
surfaces.
Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with decorative concrete paving
to attend, including the following:
a.
b.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
Contractor's superintendent.
Decorative concrete paving Installer.
321316 ‐ 457
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color, pattern, or texture indicated.
1.
C.
1.5
Exposed Aggregate: 5-lb Sample of aggregate mix.
Design Mixtures: For each decorative concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design
mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.
B.
Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Material Test Reports: For each of the following:
1.
D.
1.6
Cementitious materials.
Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
Admixtures.
Curing compounds.
Applied finish materials.
Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
Joint fillers.
Aggregates. Include service-record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing readymixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated.
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
2.
Build mockups of full-thickness sections of decorative concrete paving to demonstrate
typical joints; surface color, pattern, and texture; curing; and standard of workmanship.
Build mockups of decorative concrete paving where directed by Architect and not less
than 96 inches by 96 inches.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 458
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
3.
4.
1.7
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A.
1.8
Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on decorative concrete paving mixtures.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B.
Cold-Weather Concrete Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced
strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1
and the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat
water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
Hot-Weather Concrete Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather
conditions exist:
1.
2.
3.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time
of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using
liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap, so steel temperature will not exceed
ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE, GENERAL
A.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 459
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
2.2
FORMS
A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.
1.
B.
2.3
Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves of a radius of 100 feet or less.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
B.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
C.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars, welded-wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports
according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete
of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:
2.4
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from
single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Cementitious Materials:
1.
C.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 4M, uniformly graded. Provide
aggregates from a single source.
1.
2.
D.
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Exposed Aggregate: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious
reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse
aggregate as follows:
1.
E.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, gray portland cement Type I/II.
Manufacturer: Charles Luck Stone – Augusta (3/8-inch to 5/8-inch nominal)
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 460
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
F.
Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of
cementitious material.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.
1.
H.
2.5
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A, colored.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D, colored.
Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.
L.M. Scofield: Chromix Admixture – Winter Beige (6063)
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
CURING AND SEALING MATERIALS
A.
Curing Paper: Nonstaining, waterproof paper, consisting of two layers of kraft paper cemented
together and reinforced with fiber, and complying with ASTM C 171.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
C.
Waterborne, Membrane-Forming
manufactured for colored concrete.
1.
2.6
Curing
Compound:
ASTM C 309,
Type I,
Class B,
L.M. Scofield: Lithochrome Colorwax – Color-matched to integral concrete coloring.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or selfexpanding cork in preformed strips.
B.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.
2.7
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete mixture from single manufacturer with
resources to provide concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
B.
Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field
experience.
1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete
design mixtures for the trial batch method.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 461
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
C.
Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:
1.
Air Content: 4-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size.
D.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
E.
Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
F.
Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
G.
Concrete Mixtures: Normal-weight concrete.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi.
Maximum W/C Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 4 inches, minus 1 inch.
CONCRETE MIXING
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B.
The subgrade shall be prepared as per Section 31 23 13 of the City of Baltimore Standard
Specification.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 462
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
B.
3.3
Protect adjacent construction from discoloration and spillage during application of color
hardeners, release agents, stains, curing compounds, and sealers.
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines,
grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can
remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete
without damage.
3.4
STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and
supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during
concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded-wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least
one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous
laps in either direction.
3.5
JOINTS
A.
General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with
faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to
centerline unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at
locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving
terminates at isolation joints.
1.
2.
3.
Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do
not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.
Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to
one side of joint.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 463
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
C.
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs,
catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Contraction (Control) Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into
areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the
concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
E.
3.6
Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint.
Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if
joint sealant is indicated.
Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or
clip joint-filler sections together.
During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other
temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both
sides of joint.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random
contraction cracks.
Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of concrete paving with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch
radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on
concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and
items to be embedded or cast-in.
B.
Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing
concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not
place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment.
D.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh
concrete after testing.
F.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or
drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.
G.
Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented
by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 464
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
1.
Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an
internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms.
Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with
care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels and joint devices.
H.
Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
I.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform
surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further
disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
3.7
FLOAT FINISHING
A.
General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleedwater sheen has disappeared and
concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven
floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true
planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular
texture.
3.8
INTEGRALLY COLORED CONCRETE FINISH
A.
Integrally Colored Concrete Finish: After final floating, apply the following finish:
1.
3.9
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished
concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic, to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
D.
Curing Compound: Apply to integrally colored concrete immediately after final finishing.
Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial
application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.
1.
E.
Cure integrally colored concrete with a pigmented curing compound.
Curing Paper: Cure with unwrinkled curing paper in pieces large enough to cover the entire
width and edges of slab. Do not lap sheets. Fold curing paper down over paving edges and
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 465
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
secure with continuous banks of earth to prevent displacement or billowing due to wind.
Immediately repair holes or tears in paper.
3.10
A.
EXPOSED AGGREGATE CONCRETE FINISH
Seeded Exposed-Aggregate Finish: Immediately after initial floating, spread a single layer of
aggregate uniformly on paving surface. Tamp aggregate into plastic concrete and float finish to
entirely embed aggregate with mortar cover of 1/16 inch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.11
A.
PAVING TOLERANCES
Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.12
Spray-apply chemical surface retarder to paving according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Cover paving surface with plastic sheeting, sealing laps with tape, and remove sheeting
when ready to continue finishing operations.
Without dislodging aggregate, remove mortar concealing the aggregate by lightly
brushing surface with a stiff, nylon-bristle broom. Do not expose more than one-third of
the average diameter of the aggregate and not more than one-half of the diameter of the
smallest aggregate.
Fine-spray surface with water and brush. Repeat cycle of water flushing and brushing
until cement film is removed from aggregate surfaces to depth required.
Elevation: 1/4 inch.
Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch.
Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch.
Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch.
Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch
per 12 inches of dowel.
Joint Spacing: 3 inches.
Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Testing Services: Testing shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: Representative samples of fresh concrete shall be obtained
according to ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests
will be required when concrete consistency changes.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test,
but not less than one test for each day’s pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 466
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressivestrength specimens.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each
compressive-strength test, unless otherwise indicated. Cylinders shall be molded and
stored for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day’s pour of each concrete
class exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu.
yd.. One specimen shall be tested at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days; one specimen
shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for a
given class of concrete, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Engineer may
waive compressive-strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured cylinders, current operations shall be evaluated and corrective procedures shall be
provided for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
C.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive
compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no
compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500
psi.
D.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor
within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project
identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break
for both 7- and 28-day tests.
E.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when
test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements
have not been met, as directed by Architect.
G.
Decorative concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
H.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 467
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
3.13
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove and replace decorative concrete paving that is broken or damaged or does not comply
with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless
otherwise approved by Architect.
B.
Protect decorative concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14
days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as
possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
C.
Maintain decorative concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
3.14
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING SCHEDULE
A.
Decorative Concrete Paving (P1): Uncolored concrete paving with light broom finish.
B.
Decorative Concrete Paving (P2, P5): Integrally colored concrete paving with light broom
finish.
C.
Decorative Concrete Paving (P3, P4): Uncolored concrete paving with exposed aggregate
finish.
END OF SECTION 321316
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321316 ‐ 468
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CONCRETE PAVING
SECTION 321373 – PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.2
Cold-applied joint sealants
Joint-sealant backer materials
Primers
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing non-traffic and traffic joints in locations not
specified in this Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material
matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
C.
Paving-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 469
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths and depths are more or less than those allowed by joint-sealant
manufacturer for applications indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
2.3
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane, Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A.
Joint-Sealant Backer Materials: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers,
and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer,
based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and
density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.
C.
Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and
fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 470
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Before installing joint sealants, clean out joints immediately to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.3
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water
repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions.
C.
Install joint-sealant backings to support joint sealants during application and at position required
to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Install joint sealants immediately following backing installation, using proven techniques that
comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Place joint sealants so they fully contact joint substrates.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1.
2.
F.
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.
Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do
not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 471
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean off excess joint sealant as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials
approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturers.
B.
Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants
are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such
protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint
sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are
indistinguishable from the original work.
3.5
PAVING-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Decorative Concrete Paving Joint-Sealant Application.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
2.
3.
B.
Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, urethane, elastomeric joint sealant.
Joint-Sealant Color: To be selected by landscape architect from the manufacturer’s full
range of available colors.
Concrete Unit Paving Joint-Sealant Application.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
2.
3.
C.
Expansion and isolation joints in concrete paving.
Expansion and isolation joints in unit paving where concrete slab joint extends
through surface unit paving or where unit paving abuts precast or cast-in-place
concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, concrete walkways and
slabs, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, urethane, elastomeric joint sealant.
Joint-Sealant Color: To be selected by landscape architect from the manufacturer’s full
range of available colors.
Granite Unit Paving Joint-Sealant Application.
1.
Joint Location:
a.
2.
3.
Expansion and isolation joints in concrete paving where concrete slab joint extends
through surface unit paving or where unit paving abuts precast or cast-in-place
concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, concrete walkways and
slabs, other fixed objects, and where indicated.
Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, nonsag, urethane, elastomeric joint sealant.
Joint-Sealant Color: To be selected by landscape architect from the manufacturer’s full
range of available colors.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 472
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
END OF SECTION 321373
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 473
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321373 ‐ 474
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Concrete pavers set in bituminous setting beds.
Granite pavers set in mortar setting beds.
Cobblestone pavers set in aggregate setting beds.
Aluminum edge restraints.
Cast-in-place concrete edge restraints.
Precast concrete curbs.
Section 034500 "Precast Architectural Concrete" for precast concrete curbs serving as
edge restraints for unit pavers.
Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete base under unit pavers and for cast-inplace concrete curbs and gutters serving as edge restraints for unit pavers.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pavers.
Bituminous setting materials.
Mortar and grout materials.
Edge restraints.
B.
Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.
C.
Samples for Verification: For full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. Include no
fewer than two Samples of each type of unit. In addition, include Samples of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Joint materials.
Edge restraints.
Precast concrete curbs.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 475
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For unit pavers. Include statements of material properties indicating
compliance with requirements, including compliance with standards. Provide for each type and
size of unit.
1.
1.5
For solid interlocking paving units, include test data for freezing and thawing according
to ASTM C 67.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. One mock up
required at southern plaza as indicated on the drawings, additional mock up required at pedestal
of Pavilion A.
1.
2.
1.6
Build mockups of decorative concrete paving where directed by Architect and not less
than 96 inches by 96 inches.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed
location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.
B.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
D.
Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.
E.
Store asphalt cement and other bituminous materials in tightly closed containers.
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or
frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work
damaged by frost or freezing.
B.
Weather Limitations for Bituminous Setting Bed:
1.
Install bituminous setting bed only when ambient temperature is above 40 deg F and
when base is dry.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 476
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
2.
C.
Apply asphalt adhesive only when ambient temperature is above 50 deg F and when
temperature has not been below 35 deg F for 12 hours immediately before application.
Do not apply when setting bed is wet or contains excess moisture.
Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:
1.
2.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and
use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of
100 deg F and higher.
a.
When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or when wind velocity exceeds 8
mph and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F, set pavers within 1 minute of
spreading setting-bed mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from
single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in
appearance and physical properties.
CONCRETE PAVERS
A.
Concrete Pavers for Plaza Area: Solid interlocking paving units complying with
ASTM C 936/C 936M and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to
ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates.
1.
2.
3.
Hanover Architectural Products
Thickness: 2 inches for Paver Type ‘A’, 3 inches for Paver Type ‘B’.
Face Size and Shape: Paver Types ‘A’ and ‘B’ shall have the following face sizes with
beveled edge as indicated on the drawings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
B.
4 inches x 8 inches
6 inches x 12 inches
8 inches x 16 inches
12 inches x 24 inches
16 inches x 30 inches
Color: An even blend of M3251, Charcoal, M2190, and M1287.
Concrete Pavers for Pavilion Area: Solid interlocking paving units complying with
ASTM C 936/C 936M and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to
ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 477
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Hanover Architectural Products
Thickness: 2 inches for Paver Type ‘A’, 3 inches for Paver Type ‘B’.
Face Size and Shape: Paver Types ‘A’ and ‘B’ shall have 6 inch x 12 inch face with
square edge (no bevel).
Color: An even blend of M3251, Charcoal, M2190, and M1287.
STONE PAVERS
A.
Granite Paver Band at Fountain: Rectangular paving stones, with thermal-finished faces and
edges, made from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Granite Paver Field at Fountain: Square paving stones, with thermal-finished faces and edges,
made from granite complying with ASTM C 615/C 615M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Coldspring Granite
Color and Grain: Iridian, honed finish.
Thickness: ¾ inch.
Edge Face Size: 18 inches x 60 inches.
Coldspring Granite
Color and Grain: Kenoran sage, thermal finish.
Thickness: ¾ inch.
Face Size: 24 inches x 24 inches.
COBBLESTONE PAVERS
A.
Pavers: Square paving stones, with split face and sawn edges, made from granite complying
with ASTM C 615/C 615M.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Hanover Architectural Products.
Color: Basalt Black.
Thickness: 4 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Face Size: 4 by 4 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch.
EDGE RESTRAINTS
A.
Aluminum Edge Restraints (P8): Manufacturer's standard straight, 3/16-inch- thick by 5-inchhigh extruded-aluminum edging with loops pressed from face to receive stakes at 12 inches o.c.
and aluminum stakes 12 inches long for each loop.
1.
B.
Permaloc: CleanLine XL – Natural Aluminum Mill Finish
Aluminum Edge Restraints (P6, P7): Manufacturer's standard L-shaped, 3/16-inch- thick by 21/4-inch- high extruded-aluminum edging.
1.
Permaloc: StructurEdge – Natural Aluminum Mill Finish
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 478
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
2.6
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.
B.
Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.7
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS (P8 - COBBLESTONE PAVERS)
A.
Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448
for Size No. 57.
B.
Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for
Size No. 8.
C.
Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with
gradation requirements in ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate.
D.
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
1.
E.
2.8
Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.
Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered with the EPA. Provide in
granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MATERIALS (P6, P7 – CONCRETE PAVERS)
A.
Fine Aggregate for Setting Bed: ASTM D 1073, No. 2 or No. 3.
B.
Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381/D 3381M, Viscosity Grade AC-10 or Grade AC-20.
C.
Neoprene-Modified Asphalt Adhesive: Paving manufacturer's standard adhesive consisting of
oxidized asphalt combined with 2 percent neoprene and 10 percent long-fibered mineral fibers
containing no asbestos.
D.
Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing
No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve.
2.9
MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS (P9 – GRANITE PAVERS)
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type II.
B.
Sand: ASTM C 33.
C.
Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
D.
Thin-Set Mortar for Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 479
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
1.
2.
E.
2.10
A.
Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or
acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 1 inch.
Water: Potable.
GROUT MATERIALS
Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, made of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
1.
Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use only pigments that have proved,
through testing and experience, to be satisfactory for use in portland cement grout.
a.
B.
Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, sanded.
1.
C.
<Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and
products.>
<Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
High-Performance Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, sanded.
1.
<Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.
Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form,
prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition
to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
3.
D.
Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E.
Water: Potable.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED MIX
Mix bituminous setting-bed materials at an asphalt plant in approximate proportion, by weight,
of 7 percent asphalt cement to 93 percent fine aggregate unless otherwise indicated. Heat
mixture to 300 deg F.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
General: Comply with referenced standards and with manufacturers' written instructions for mix
proportions, mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing times, and other
procedures needed to produce setting-bed and joint materials of uniform quality and with
optimal performance characteristics. Discard mortars and grout if they have reached their initial
set before being used.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 480
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
B.
Mortar-Bed Bond Coat: Mix neat cement and water to a creamy consistency.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Setting-Bed Mortar: Type M complying with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specification.
D.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Setting-Bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement,
sand, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with written instructions of latex-additive
manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface when bed is ready
to receive pavers.
E.
Latex-Modified, Portland Cement Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate,
and liquid latex for bond coat to comply with written instructions of liquid-latex manufacturer.
F.
Thinset Mortar Bond Coat: Proportion and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Job-Mixed Portland Cement Grout: Proportion and mix job-mixed portland cement and
aggregate grout to match setting-bed mortar except omit hydrated lime and use enough water to
produce a pourable mixture.
1.
2.
H.
Pigmented Grout: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Do not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio of 1 to 10, by weight.
Colored-Aggregate Grout: Produce color required by combining colored aggregates with
portland cement of selected color.
Packaged Grout: Proportion and mix according to grout manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces indicated to receive unit paving, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing
and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.
B.
Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.
C.
Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after
deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive [subbase] [and] [base] course
for unit pavers.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 481
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B.
Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
C.
Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1.
For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D.
Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of
brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
E.
Joint Pattern: As indicated.
F.
Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10
feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
G.
Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise
indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is
complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified
in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
H.
Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at
intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.
For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch below top
edge.
Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate
setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate
setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not
interfere with aggregate setting bed.
Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure
before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete below
aggregate setting bed.
AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A.
Compact soil subgrade uniformly to at least 95 percent of ASTM D 698 laboratory density.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 482
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
B.
Proof-roll prepared subgrade to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Excavate soft
spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by
Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
C.
Place separation geotextile over prepared subgrade, overlapping ends and edges at least 12
inches.
D.
Place aggregate base, compact by tamping with plate vibrator, and screed to depth indicated.
E.
Place aggregate base, compact to 100 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum laboratory density,
and screed to depth indicated.
F.
Place drainage geotextile over compacted base course, overlapping ends and edges at least 12
inches.
G.
Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture
content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are set and compacted.
H.
Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.
I.
Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful
not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer
bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with
pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.
1.
J.
When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with
spacer bars on sides of each unit.
Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to
5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face of plate or
other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes
across paving with vibrator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of vibrator,
leaving at least 36 inches of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges.
Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-inch
width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying faces).
As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are adjacent
to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches of laying face.
Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that have not
been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not been placed with
nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.
K.
Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate
pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight
surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.
L.
Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.
M.
Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 483
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
3.5
BITUMINOUS SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A.
Apply primer to concrete slab or binder course immediately before placing setting bed.
B.
Prepare for setting-bed placement by locating 3/4-inch- deep control bars approximately 11 feet
apart and parallel to one another, to serve as guides for striking board. Adjust bars to subgrades
required for accurate setting of paving units to finished grades indicated.
C.
Place bituminous setting bed where indicated, in panels, by spreading bituminous material
between control bars. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F. Strike setting bed
smooth, firm, even, and not less than 3/4 inch thick. Add fresh bituminous material to low,
porous spots after each pass of striking board. After each panel is completed, advance first
control bar to next position in readiness for striking adjacent panels. Carefully fill depressions
that remain after removing depth-control bars.
1.
Roll setting bed with power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch. Adjust thickness as
necessary to allow accurate setting of unit pavers to finished grades indicated. Complete
rolling before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
D.
Apply neoprene-modified asphalt adhesive to cold setting bed by squeegeeing or troweling to a
uniform thickness of 1/16 inch. Proceed with setting of paving units only after adhesive is tacky
and surface is dry to touch.
E.
Place pavers carefully by hand in straight courses, maintaining accurate alignment and uniform
top surface. Protect newly laid pavers with plywood panels on which workers can stand.
Advance protective panels as work progresses, but maintain protection in areas subject to
continued movement of materials and equipment to avoid creating depressions or disrupting
alignment of pavers. If additional leveling of paving is required, and before treating joints, roll
paving with power roller after sufficient heat has built up in the surface from several days of hot
weather.
F.
Joint Treatment: Place unit pavers with hand-tight joints. Fill joints by sweeping sand over
paved surface until joints are filled. Remove excess sand after joints are filled.
3.6
MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A.
Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B.
Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
mortar bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch thickness for bond coat. Limit area of bond coat to avoid
its drying out before placing setting bed.
C.
Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D.
Place reinforcing wire over concrete subbase, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of mortar bed. Hold edges back from
vertical surfaces approximately 1/2 inch.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 484
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
E.
Place mortar bed with reinforcing wire fully embedded in middle of mortar bed. Spread and
screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of
pavers to finished grades indicated.
F.
Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that
has reached initial set.
G.
Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat
trowel.
H.
Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting
bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single
operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for
purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
I.
Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 1/2-inch nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus
or minus 1/16 inch.
J.
Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.
K.
Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
L.
3.7
Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to
remove smears before tooling joints.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or
rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.
Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended
by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged
or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in
same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point
joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant
application.
C.
Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
END OF SECTION 321400
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 485
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321400 ‐ 486
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
UNIT PAVING
SECTION 321540 – DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.2
Decorative crushed stone used as a surface paving material.
Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage aggregate fill below decorative crushed
stone.
Section 321400 "Unit Paving" for aluminum edge restraint.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each manufactured material and product indicated.
B.
Samples:
1.
2.
1.3
Three 12 inch by 12 inch swatches of geotextile.
5-lb bag of crushed stone for verification of selection.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
B.
Mock up: Install 4’ wide x 10’ long mock-up of decorative crushed stone path at location as
directed by Landscape Architect.
C.
Do not install decorative crushed stone path during rainy conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Decorative Crushed Stone: Graham Mix
1.
2.
Manufacturer: Stancills, Inc.
Size: Minus 1/4 inch to fine powder
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321540 ‐ 487
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING
3.
B.
Color: Light Beige
Geotextile: Non-woven, needle-punched, polypropylene geotextile fabric - US 100NW
1.
Manufacturer: US Fabrics, Inc. or approved equal.
2.
Geotextile shall be made of 100% polypropylene staple filaments and resist ultraviolet
and biological deterioration, rotting, naturally encountered basics and acids.
Polypropylene shall be stable within a pH range of 2 to 13.
C.
Landscape Staples: 12 gauge steel staples, 6 inches long by 1 inch wide intended for use with
landscape fabrics.
D.
Water: Potable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces indicated to receive decorative crushed stone paving, with Installer present,
for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" to
identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with decorative crushed stone paving
installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing decorative crushed
stone paving.
1.
2.
3.
Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at
intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after decorative crushed
stone paving installation.
For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 1 inch below top
edge.
Set, brace and secure edge restraints as necessary to withstand compaction operations.
Remove any additional bracing only after compaction operations are completed.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321540 ‐ 488
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING
B.
Install geotextile over prepared subgrade allowing 12 inch overlap at all joints. Pull geotextile
taught across width and length of area to receive decorative crushed stone paving and fasten in
place by inserting landscape staples at no greater than 6 feet on center and along all edge
conditions. Trim and remove excess fabric along edge restraints. Cut to within 1 inch of edge
restraint.
C.
Blend decorative crushed stone with water to achieve an evenly damp gravel mix. Mixture shall
not be saturated. Place decorative crushed stone and screed to depth as indicated on the
drawings. After allowing sufficient time for mix to dry, compact blended stone to 95% relative
compaction.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Repairs prior to approval: Remove and replace decorative crushed stone material sections that
become damaged, settle, and/or do not meet the requirements of this section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Do not begin compaction for 6 hours after placement and up to 48 hours.
After compaction, check depth and add additional decorative crushed stone where
needed. Compact again as necessary.
Repair or replace any edge restraints damaged during the compaction process.
Excavate damaged area to the full depth of the decorative crushed stone. Geotextile may
be left intact if not damaged during stone excavation.
If the area to receive decorative crushed stone is dry, moisten to achieve a uniform
dampened condition.
Install decorative crushed stone as described in this section.
Keep traffic off the area for 24 hours after the repair has been completed.
Post installation Repairs/Maintenance: Remove and replace decorative crushed stone material
sections that have become damaged, settled, do not drain properly, or do not otherwise meet the
requirements of this section.
1.
Remove debris by mechanically blowing or hand raking the surface as needed.
2.
One year after final completion, the contractor shall rake and redistribute any loose
material over the entire surface area. Water thoroughly to a depth of 1 inch and compact
with a power roller of no less than 1000 pounds.
3.
If cracking occurs, sweep or rake additional fines into the cracks, water thoroughly and
re-compact.
END OF SECTION 321540
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321540 ‐ 489
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
321540 ‐ 490
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
DECORATIVE CRUSHED STONE PAVING
SECTION 321723 - REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
For work under this Contract, all Standard Specification Sections shall be superseded by the
Division 32 specification sections in these Contract Documents.
SUMMARY
A.
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing reflective thermoplastic pavement markings
on pavement surfaces. These materials include line marking tape and symbols.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Thermoplastic material shall be homogeneously composed of pigment, filler, resins and glass
relectorizing spheres and shall meet the following requirements:
COMPOSITION:
Component
Binder, % min.
Premixed Glass Beads
% min.
Titanium Dioxide
% min.
Calcium Carbonated &
Inert Fillers & max.
Yellow Pigments % min.
Reference
Certified
MSMT 614
White
18.0
30.0
Yellow
18.0
30.0
AASHTO T 250
10.0
N/A
ASTM D 34
42.0
N/A
Note: Amount of yellow pigment, calcium carbonate and filler shall be at the option of the
Manufacturer, provided all specifications are met.
B.
Binders – The binder may be alkyd or hydrocarbon. Alkyd Binders shall maleic modified rosin
ester and other plasticizer. Hydrocarbon binders shall consist of petroleum derived resins and
plasticizer.
PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS:
Bond strength, psi min.
Cracking resistance
Softening Point, F
Abrasion Resistance, G max.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
Method
Specification
MSMT 614
MSMT 614
MSMT 614
MSMT 614
180
No Cracks
215 +/- 15F
0.0
RK&K
321723 - 491 REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
C.
Specific Gravity – The specific gravity of the white and yellow thermoplastic pavement
marking materials shall be 1.7 to .2 when tested, in accordance with ASTM D153, Method A at
seventy-seven degrees Fahrenheit (77F).
D.
Color – After heating for four (4) hours five (5) minutes at four hundred twenty-five degrees
Fahrenheit plus or minus three degrees Fahrenheit (423F +/- 3 F) and cooled to seventy seven
degrees Fahrenheit plus or minus three degrees Fahrenheit (77 F +/- 3 F) the thermoplastic shall
meet the requirements of ASTM E 97. Color shall also meet Federal Standards 595, Color No.
17886 for white and No. 12538 for yellow.
E.
Glass Beads – All glass beads shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 247, Type I.
The surface dressing beads shall be moisture resistant. Reflectance shall meet the following:
White – Daylight reflectance at 45-0 75% min.
Yellow – Daylight reflectance at 45-0 45% min.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
CONSTRUCTION METHODS
A.
Application
1.
The ambient and surface temperatures shall be fifty-five degrees Farenheit (55°F) and
rising at the time of application.
2.
Pavement markings shall be uniformly sprayed onto the pavement surface to the specified
dimensions and at a temperature range between four hundred degrees Fahrenheit and four
hundred-forty degrees Fahrenheit (400°F & 440°F). A primer may be used at the
discretion of the Contractor. Any primers used shall be compatible with thermoplastic
pavement markings.
3.
Prior to starting application of pavement markings, a field test strip shall be placed to
determine bead distribution, placement of bonding of beads, as directed by the
Engineer. These requirements shall be determined by using a minimum 10X magnifying
glass or other method approved by the Engineer.
4.
Surface dressing glass beads shall be applied uniformly across the surface of the stripe
at a minimum rate of 8lbs./100 ft.
5.
Footage counters used to measure thermoplastic pavement markings and primers shall
be calibrated, and notarized certification shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to
application.
B.
Cleaning/Preparation
1.
Pavement surfaces shall be dry and free of glaze, oil, dirt, grease or other contaminants
prior to application of pavement markings. Surfaces not meeting these requirements,
shall be cleaned by the Contractor to a width equal to two inches (2”) wider than the
width of the lane.
C.
Thickness
1.
Pavement markings shall yield a minimum finished solid thickness of 60 mil. Thickness
is measured after application by placing two (2) shimgs approximately 70 mil. Thick next
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
321723 - 492 REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
2.
3.2
to each edge of the marking. A straight edge bridging these shims should leave a small
space between the pavement marking and the straight edge.
The space shall be measured in mils using a “Automotive Feeler Gauge” or other method
approved by the Engineer. The thickness of the pavement marking is determined by
subtracting the space measured from the known shim thickness.
RESPONSIBILITY
D.
The Contractor shall remove and replace at his expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
material which exhibits any of the following deficiencies:
1.
Non-adherence to road surface.
2.
Material improperly set or tracked.
3.
Insufficient film thickness or width of stripe.
4.
Insufficient glass bead coverage or retention.
5.
Material spilled or improperly placed.
E.
The Contractor shall protect the markings until dry, by placing guard or warning devices as
approved by the Engineer and in accordance with the “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
Devices.” In the event any vehicle crosses the wet marking such marking shall be reapplied.
Any marks left on the pavement by the vehicle shall be removed by the Contractor at his
expense. For pavements in service the Contractor shall be allowed to close only one (1) lane of
traffic at a time.
F.
The Contactor shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of all empty containers and
other debris from the project site.
3.3
OBSERVATION PERIOD
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any defects in material and workmanship of the
thermoplastic markings for a period of one hundred eighty (180) days from the date of
application.
H.
A minimum of ninety-five percent (95%0 of the applied markings shall remain intact during the
observation period as determined by the Engineer.
I.
The Contractor shall replace at his expense, all pavement markings not meeting the
requirements of these specifications as determined by the Engineer.
J.
Acceptance for the project will be contingent upon successful completion of the observation
period.
END OF SECTION 321723
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
321723 - 493 REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
RK&K
321723 - 494 REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKINGS
SECTION 321726 - DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing detectable warning surfaces as specified in
the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer.
B.
The detectable warning surface shall conform to the most recent accessibility guidelines of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) under Section R304 of the Public Rights-of-Way
guidelines.
C.
This work also includes the removal and disposal of the existing sidewalk or other materials
necessary for the construction and installation of the detectable warning surfaces.
D.
Detectable warning surfaces are required at street crossing and signalized intersections and
wherever sidewalk ramps are installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Composition: The surface shall be of rigid composition.
B.
Size: The surface standard size shall be a minimum of 24” wide in the direction of pedestrian
travel and extend the full width of the curb ramp landing. The detectable warning surface shall
not encroach on the blended transition areas.
C.
Shape: The system shall consist of a surface of truncated domes aligned in a square grid
patterns as specified in the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer. The domes
shall be 0.2” in height and 0.9” to 1.4” in diameter. The domes shall be spaced perpendicularly
1.6” to 2.35” from center of domes.
D.
Color: The detectable warning surfaces shall contrast visually with adjacent – gutter, street,
highway or walkway surfaces, either light-on-dark or dark-on-light.
E.
Friction: The surfaces shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.8 when tested in
conformance with C 1028.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
The Contractor shall install the system in conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation. These recommendations shall address the conditions of the concrete surface
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321726 - 495
RK&K
DETECTABLE WARNING SUFRACES
on which the system will be applied; surface finish, presence of curing compound, length of
cure, and other installation practices to ensure the longevity of the detectable warning surfaces.
3.2
The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6”-8”
from the face of curb. For skewed applications, detectable warning surfaces shall be places
such that the domes closest to the back of curb are no less than 0.5” and no more than 1” from
the back of curb. Truncated dome surfaces shall be fabricated to provide full domes only.
END OF SECTION 321726
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
321726 - 496
RK&K
DETECTABLE WARNING SUFRACES
SECTION 321816 - PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Organic loose-fill surfacing.
Aggregate for base.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Definitions in ASTM F 2223 apply to Work of this Section.
B.
Critical Height: Standard measure of shock attenuation according to ASTM F 2223; same as
"critical fall height" in ASTM F 1292. According to ASTM F 1292, this approximates "the
maximum fall height from which a life-threatening head injury would not be expected to occur."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples for Verification: For each type of protective surfacing and exposed finish.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Include Samples of accessories to verify color and finish selection.
Loose-Fill Surfacing: Minimum 1 quart.
Drainage/Separation Geotextile: Minimum 12 by 12 inches.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Material Certificates: For each type of loose-fill surfacing.
B.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For playground protective surfacing to include in maintenance manuals.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of protective surfacing that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 08/15/2014
321816 ‐ 497
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Reduction in impact attenuation as measured by reduction of critical fall height.
Deterioration of protective surfacing and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Compaction of engineered wood fiber to a thickness less than indicated on the
drawings.
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Final Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain protective surfacing materials, from single source from single
manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Impact Attenuation: Critical fall height tested according to ASTM F 1292.
B.
Accessibility Standard: Minimum surfacing performance according to ASTM F 1951.
2.3
ORGANIC LOOSE-FILL SURFACING
A.
Engineered Wood Fiber: ASTM F 2075; containing no bark, leaves, twigs, or foreign or toxic
materials; tested for accessibility according to ASTM F 1951.
1.
2.
2.4
Critical Height: 8 feet.
Uncompressed Material Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL
A.
2.5
Graded Aggregate for base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for
Size No. 57.
GEOSYNTHETIC ACCESSORIES
A.
Drainage/Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for
drainage applications and made from polyolefins or polyesters; with the following minimum
properties:
1.
2.
Weight: 4 oz./sq. yd.; ASTM D 5261.
Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm/sq. ft. according to ASTM D 4491.
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 08/15/2014
321816 ‐ 498
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for subgrade elevations, slope, and drainage and for other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Verify that substrates are sound and without high spots, ridges, holes, and depressions.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare substrates to receive surfacing products according to protective surfacing
manufacturer's written instructions.
LOOSE-FILL SURFACING
A.
Loose Fill: Place loose-fill materials to required depth. Include manufacturer's recommended
amount of additional material to offset natural compaction over time.
B.
Grading: Uniformly grade loose fill to an even surface free from irregularities.
C.
Compaction: After initial grading, mechanically compact loose fill before finish grading.
D.
Finish Grading: Hand rake to a uniformly smooth finished surface and to required elevations.
END OF SECTION 321816.13
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 08/15/2014
321816 ‐ 499
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
Eager Park
Bid Documents - 08/15/2014
321816 ‐ 500
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Chain-link fence
Swing Gates
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for cast-in-place concrete post footings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link
fences and gates.
1.
2.
3.
Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.
Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.
Gates and hardware.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Show accessories, hardware, and gate operation.
C.
Samples for Verification: Prepared on Samples of size indicated below:
1.
1.3
Polymer-Coated Components: In 6-inch lengths for components.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence and gate, from manufacturer.
B.
Product Test Reports: For framing strength according to ASTM F 1043.
C.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include, operation, and maintenance
manuals:
1.
Polymer finishes
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 501
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.
1.5
Gate hardware
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on
Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field
measurements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace
components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
2.
B.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Final Completion.
Manufacturer:
1.
Master Halco, or approved equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A.
General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of
selvage knuckle. Comply with CLFMI Product Manual and with requirements indicated below:
1.
2.
Fabric Height: 3 feet.
Steel Wire Fabric: 6 gauge with 2 inch mesh opening size.
a.
Polymer-Coated Fabric: ASTM F 668, Class 2b over zinc-coated steel wire.
1)
3.
2.2
Color: Black, complying with ASTM F 934.
Selvage: Knuckled top and bottom.
FENCE FRAMING
A.
Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, including rails, braces, and line;
terminal; and corner posts. Provide members with minimum dimensions and wall thickness
according to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 based on the following:
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 502
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
1.
Fence Height: 36 inches.
a.
b.
2.
Horizontal Framework Members: Top and bottom rails complying with ASTM F 1043.
a.
3.
Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating
per
ASTM A 123/A 123M
or
4.0-oz./sq.
ft.
zinc
coating
per
ASTM A 653/A 653M.
Polymer coating over metallic coating.
a.
2.3
Top Rail: 1.66 inches in diameter.
Metallic Coating for Steel Framing:
a.
4.
Line Post: 2.375 inches in diameter.
End, Corner and Pull Post: 2.375 inches in diameter.
Color: Match chain-link fabric, according to ASTM F 934.
SWING GATES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts single and double swing gate types.
1.
2.
B.
Gate Leaf Width: As indicated on the drawings.
Gate Fabric Height: As indicated on the drawings.
Pipe and Tubing:
1.
2.
3.
Zinc-Coated Steel: Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating
and finish to match fence framework.
Gate Posts: 2.875 inches in diameter.
Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel.
C.
Frame Corner Construction: Welded.
D.
Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Hinges: 90-degree outward swing.
Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking
accessible from both sides of gate.
Lock: By Owner.
Closer: Manufacturer's standard.
FITTINGS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM F 626.
B.
Post Caps: Provide for each post.
1.
Provide dome caps for all end and corner posts.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 503
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
2.
Provide line post caps with loop to receive top rail.
C.
Rail and Brace Ends: For each gate, corner, pull, and end post.
D.
Rail Fittings: Provide the following:
1.
2.
E.
Top Rail Sleeves: Pressed-steel or round-steel tubing not less than 6 inches long.
Rail Clamps: Line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting bottom rails to posts.
Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.
1.
Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames,
complying with the following:
a.
F.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel:
0.148-inch- diameter wire; galvanized coating
thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.
Finish:
1.
Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.
a.
Polymer coating over metallic coating to match fence color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site
clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by
Architect.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
If schedule requires that construction of the fence occur after planting, the contractor is
responsible for replacing any damaged plant material.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground
structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements
indicated.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 504
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
3.4
CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A.
Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacings indicated, in
firm, undisturbed soil.
B.
Post Setting: Set posts in concrete at indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.
1.
2.
Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts to dimensions indicated and vibrate or tamp
for consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.
a.
Exposed Concrete: Extend 1 inch above grade; shape and smooth to shed water.
C.
Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more.
D.
Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet o.c.
E.
Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of
fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and
terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal
posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer.
F.
Bottom Rails: Install and secure to posts with fittings.
G.
Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inch clearance
between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension
wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.
H.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts
with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c.
I.
Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire
at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach
other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to
individuals and clothing.
1.
3.5
Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches
o.c.
GATE INSTALLATION
A.
Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamperresistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust
hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
END OF SECTION 323113
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 505
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 08/15/2014
323113 ‐ 506
Mahan Rykiel Associates, Inc.
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 328400 – PLANTING IRRIGATION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
A.
B.
C.
1.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.3
A.
B.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The sprinkler system shall include sprinklers, valves, piping fittings, controller, wiring, all of
sizes and types as shown on the drawings and specified. The system shall be constructed to
grades and conform to areas and locations as shown on the drawings.
Sprinkler lines shown on the drawings are essentially diagrammatic. Spacing of the sprinkler
heads or quick coupling valves are shown on the drawings and shall be exceeded only with
written permission of the Designer.
Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, the construction of the sprinkler
system shall include the furnishing, installing, and testing of all mains, laterals, risers and
fittings, sprinkler heads, gate valves, control valves, controllers, electric wire, controls,
backflow preventers, enclosures, and other necessary specialties and the removal and/or
restoration of existing improvements, excavating and backfill, and all other work in accordance
with the plans and specifications a required for a complete system.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Conference: Before any work is started a conference shall be held between the Contractor and
the Owner concerning the work under this contract.
The Contractor shall maintain continuously a competent superintendent, satisfactory to the
Owner, on the work during progress with authority to act or him in all matter pertaining to the
work.
It is the Irrigation Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate and cooperate with the other
Contractors to enable work to proceed rapidly and efficiently.
The Contractor shall confine his operations to the area to be improved and to the areas allotted
him by the Designer and General Contractor for material and equipment.
Contractor shall take all necessary to protect the existing site conditions and vegetation.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit in accordance with Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Shop Drawings and Equipment Product Information:
1.
2.
Prior to purchasing materials, submit product information on all sprinkler heads,
automatic valves, quick coupling valves, controller, and pipe to be used on the project.
Contractor shall review drawings and data to supply actual precipitation rates and times
for each zone in maintenance package.
3.
C.
Prior to trenching, Contractor shall submit proposed trenching equipment to Designer for
approval.
Record Drawings and Instructions
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
328400 ‐ 507
Irrigation Consultant Services
PLANTING IRRIGATION
1.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
D.
Upon completion of installation, Contractor shall produce as-built drawings in Autocad
2010 format and furnish one set of reproducible and one set of printed record drawings
showing all sprinkler heads, valves, drains, and pipelines to scale with dimensions.
These drawings shall have dimensions from easily located stationary points (cross
measured) as they relate to all valves, mainlines, and wire. Clearly note all approved
substitutions of size, material, etc. Complete, concise instruction sheets and parts lists
covering all operating equipment and weathering techniques shall be bound into folders
and furnished to the Owner in three (3) copies. Submission of this information is a
requirement for final acceptance.
SITE CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall examine the site, plans and specifications (i.e. system requirements).
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to report in writing to the Designer any deviations
between drawings, specification, and actual site conditions. Failure to do so prior to the
installing of equipment shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.
Adjustment of the sprinkler heads and automatic equipment will be done by the Contractor,
upon completion of installation, to provide optimum performance.
After completion, testing, and acceptance of the system, the Contractor shall verbally instruct
the Owner’s personnel in the operation and maintenance of the system. All written instruction
shall be included in the bound maintenance package as stated in Paragraph 1.3 - Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
PIPE AND FITTINGS
Pipe sizes shall conform to those shown on the drawings. No substitutions of smaller pipe sizes
will be permitted, but substitutions of larger size may be approved. All pipe damaged or
rejected because of defects shall be removed from the site at the time of said rejection.
All mainline piping (2-1/2”) two and one half inches and larger will be equipped with gaskets.
All fittings for mainline pipes two and one half (21/2”) inches or larger will be equipped with
gaskets.
All piping downstream of electric valves, sizes (3) inches and smaller, shall be rigid
unplasticized PVC 200 PSI working pressure extruded from virgin parent material of the type
specified on the drawings. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible
cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles and permanently marked with the
manufacture’s name, material, size, and schedule type. Pipe must bear the NFS seal.
All mainline piping and underground piping under continuous pressure shall be rigid
unplasticized PVC-Class 200 PSI working pressure extruded from virgin parent material of the
type specified on the drawings. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from
visible cracks, holes, and foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles and dents.
All plastic fittings to be installed shall be molded fittings manufactured of the same material as
the pipe and shall be suitable for solvent weld, slip joint ring tight seal, or screwed connections
NO fitting made of other material shall be used except as hereinafter specified.
Slip fitting socket tapers shall be so sized that a dry unsoftened pipe end conforming to these
special provisions can be inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Plastic saddle and
flange fittings will not be permitted. Only Schedule 80 pipe may be threaded.
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
328400 ‐ 508
Irrigation Consultant Services
PLANTING IRRIGATION
H.
2.2
Fittings for all Mainline Piping 4” and larger shall be Harco Ductile Iron Gasketed Fittings. All
mainline 4” and larger shall utilize approved thrust blocking and or restraints. Thrust Blocking
and restraints to be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations for pipe type, pipe size
and local environmental conditions.
SLEEVES
A.
All sleeves shall be Class 200 PVC or stronger. All sleeves are required at every crossing
indicated on drawings. (Size Noted)
B.
All sleeves shall be installed under proposed pavement areas prior to subgrade and base
construction.
C.
Sleeves shall have a minimum horizontal separation of 18” and a maximum of twenty-four
(24) inch clearance below bottom of curb.
All sleeves shall have a minimum horizontal separation of twenty-four (24) and maximum of
thirty-six inches from center to center.
Stub up sleeve pipe twelve (12) inches above ground surface and cap. Paint cap with
fluorescent orange paint for easy identification.
The location of all sleeves shown on the plans is schematic. The contractor shall make any
adjustments necessary to accommodate existing vegetation, utilities, or other existing
conditions.
If the road crossings are designated as being bore locations the bore must be ample size to
accommodate the size sleeve specified.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.3
A.
B.
2.4
A.
B.
C.
2.5
A.
CONTROL SYSTEM
The automatic controllers shall be as shown on the plans and shall be made by the same
manufacturer as valves.
Install Rain Check or Mini-Click type shut off device to override the control timer in the event
of rain.
CONTROL WIRE
Control wire shall be type UF, UL approved, for direct burial and shall be gauge 14 or larger
for the control wire and gauge 12 or larger for common wire.
Joining of underground wires shall be made with watertight connectors in valve boxes. No
splicing between boxes is acceptable. Utilize 3M DBR/Y-6 Connections unless directed
otherwise.
All wire connections in valve boxes; first example shall stay open until the Designer approves.
IRRIGATION VALVES
Zone Control Valves
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
328400 ‐ 509
Irrigation Consultant Services
PLANTING IRRIGATION
1.
2.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
2.7
A.
2.8
Globe-type diaphragm valves of normally closed design, with bronze bodies or heavyduty plastic and covers (type noted on drawings). Operation accomplished by means of
an integrally mounted heavy-duty 24 volt AC solenoid complying with National
Electrical Code, Class II Circuit, solenoid coil potted in epoxy resign within a plasticcoated stainless steel housing. Solenoids shall be completely waterproof, suitable for
direct underground burial. Provide a flow stem adjustment in each valve.
Drip Control Valves shall be prefabricated assemblies as specified on plans.
VALVE BOXES
All valves shall be installed in thermoplastic valve access boxes of the size required to permit
access to the valve. Valve boxes shall include black thermoplastic locking covers.
Manufacturer - Ametek or approved equal.
All valve boxes shall be installed on at least a two (2) cubic foot gravel base to provide
foundation and drainage.
All valve box elevations shall be ½” below finished grade.
THRUST BLOCKS
Place one cubic ft. of concrete for each inch of pipe diameter for thrust block. Thrust shall not
allow vertical or horizontal movement of pipe in any direction unless otherwise noted on
design. Thrust blocking shall be provided on all piping three (3) inch diameter and larger.
DRIP EQUIPMENT
A.
Drip tubing shall be as specified on plans (type, emitter flow, emitter spacing, etc).
B.
All miscellaneous drip equipment required for proper operation must be installed (i.e. air vent
valves, drip flush tubes, staking, etc).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
Trenches for pipe sprinkler lines shall be excavated of sufficient depth and width to permit
proper handling and installation by any other method the Contractor may desire if approved by
the Owner, pipe manufacturer, and Designer. The backfill shall be thoroughly compacted and
evened off with the adjacent soil level. Selected fill dirt or sand shall be used if soil conditions
Eager Park
Bid Documents – 8/15/14
328400 ‐ 510
Irrigation Consultant Services
PLANTING IRRIGATION
B.
C.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
A.
B.
are rocky. In rocky areas the trenching depth shall be two (2) inches below normal trenching
depth to allow for this bedding. The fill dirt or sand shall be used in filling (4) inches above the
pipe. The remainder of the backfill shall contain no lumps or rocks larger than three (3) inches.
The top twelve (12) inches of backfill shall be topsoil, free of rocks, subsoil, or trash. Any
open trenches or partially backfilled trenches left overnight or left unsupervised shall be
barricaded to prevent undue hazard to the public.
The Contractor shall backfill in six (6) inch compacted lifts as needed to bring the soil to its
original density.
In the spring following the year of installation, the Contractor shall repair any settlement of the
trenches by bringing them to grade with topsoil, and seeding with the existing lawn type(s).
Watering and maintenance of the repaired areas shall be the Owner’s responsibility.
INSTALLATION OF PLASTIC PIPE
Plastic pipe shall be installed in a manner that permits expansion and contraction as
recommended by the manufacturer.
Plastic pipe shall be cut with a handsaw or hacksaw with the assistance of a square in sawing
vice or in a manner so as to ensure a square cut. Burrs at cut ends shall be removed prior to
installation so that a smooth unobstructed flow will be obtained.
All plastic-to-plastic joints shall be solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Only the solvent
recommended for the pipe and fittings shall be installed as outlined and instructed by the pipe
manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the correct installation.
The joints shall be allowed to set at least twenty-four (24) hours before pressure is applied to
the system on PVC pipe.
CONTROLLER AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
All electrical connections shall conform to the National Electrical Code, latest edition.
Control wires installed beneath walks, drives, or other permanent surfaces shall be placed in
sleeves.
Wires shall be spliced only at valve boxes.
Leave twenty-four (24) inch loop of wire at each valve for expansion/contraction and servicing.
Controllers and valves shall be from the same company e.g. (Rain Bird, Toro or approved
equal).
120 VAC electrical power supply to the controller location shall be supplied by others.
FLUSHING AND TESTING
After all new sprinkler piping and risers are in place and connected for a given section and all
necessary division work has been completed and prior to the installation of sprinkler heads all
control valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system.
Sprinkler main shall be pressure tested as follows:
1.
2.
Two (2) hour pressure test at 1.5 times the system operating pressure
Twenty four (24) hour pressure test at the system operating pressure
Eager Park
Bi